vnto them Let vs passe ouer vnto the otherside 36 And they left the multitude and toke him as he was in the ship aÌd there were also with him other shippes 37 And there arose a great storme of winde the waues dashed into the ship so that it was now ful 38 And he was in the sterne a slepe on a pillowe and they awoke him and said to him Master carest thou not that we perish 39 And he rose vp and rebuked the winde and said vnto the sea Peace be stil. So the winde ceased and it was a great calme 40 Then he said vnto them Why are ye so feare ful how is it that ye haue no faith 41 And they feared excedingly and said one to another Who is this that both the winde and the sea obey him CHAP. V. 8 Iesus casteth the deuils out of the man and suffereth theÌ to enter into the swine 25 He healeth a woman from the blodie ãâã 41 And raiseth the captaines daughter 1 ANd * they came ouer to the other side of the sea into the countrey of the Gadarens 2 And wheÌ he was come out of the ship there met him incontinently out of the graues a man which had an vncleane spirit 3 Who had his abyding among the graues and no man colde binde him no not with chaines 4 Because that when he was often bounde with fetters aÌd chaines he plucked the chaines a sondre and brake the fetters in pieces nether colde anie man tame him 5 And alwayes bothe night and day he cryed in the mountaines and in the graues and stroke him self with stones 6 And when he saw Iesus a farre of he ranne and worshipped him 7 And cryed with a loude voyce and said What haue I to do with thee Iesus the Sonne of the moste high God I charge thee by God that thou torment me not 8 For he said vnto him Come out of the man thou vncleane spirit 9 And he asked him What is thy name and he answered saying My name is Legion for we are manie 10 And he prayed him instantly that he wolde not send them away out of the countrey 11 Now there was there in the mountaines a great herd of swine feeding 12 And all the deuils besoght him saying Send vs into the swine that we may entre into them 13 And incontinently Iesus gaue them leaue Then the vncleane spirits went out entred into the swine and the herd ran headling from the high baÌke into the sea and there were about two thousand swine and they were drowned in the sea 14 And the swineherds fled and tolde it in the citie and in the countrey and they came out to se what it was that was done 15 And they came to Iesus and sawe him that had bene possessed with the deuil and had the legion sit bothe clothed and in his right minde and they were afraid 16 And they that sawe it tolde them what was done to him that was possessed with the deuil and concerning the swine 17 Then they began to praye him that he wolde departe from their coastes 18 And when he was come into the ship he that had bene possessed with the deuil prayed him that he might be with him 19 How beit Iesus wolde not suffre him but said vnto him Go thy way home to thy friends and shewe them what great things the Lord hathe done vnto thee and how he hathe had compassion on thee 20 So he departed and began to publish in Decapolis what great things Iesus had done vnto him and all men did marueil 21 ¶ And when Iesus was come ouer againe by ship vnto the other side a great multitude gathered to him aÌd he was nere vnto the sea 22 * And beholde there came one of the rulers of the Synagogue whose name was Iairus when he sawe him he fel downe at his fete 23 And besoght him instantly saying My litle daughter lieth at point of death I praye thee that thou ãâã come and laye thine haÌds on her that she may be healed and liue 24 Then he went with him and a great multitude followed him and thronged him 25 And there was a certeine woman which was diseased with an yssue of blood twelue yeres 26 And had suffered many things of many physicions and had spent all that she had and it auailed her nothing but she became muche worse 27 When she had heard of Iesus she came in the preasse behinde and touched his garment 28 For she said If I may but touche his clothes I shal be whole 29 And straight way the course of her blood was dryed vp and she felt in her bodie that she was healed of that plague 30 And immediatly when Iesus did knowe in him self the vertue that went out of him he turned him rounde about in the preasse and said Who hathe touched my clothes 31 And his disciples said vnto him Thou seest the multitude throng thee and sayest thou Who did touche me 32 And he loked rounde about to se her that had done that 33 And the woman feared and trembled for she knewe what was done in her and she ca me and fel downe before him and tolde him the whole trueth 34 And he said to ãâã Daughter thy faith hath made thee whole go in peace and be whole of thy plague 35 While he yet spake there came from the same ruler of the Synagogues house certei ne which said Thy daughter is dead why diseasest thou the Master anie further 36 Assone as Iesus heard that worde spoken he said vnto the ruler of the Synagogue Be not a fraide onely beleue 37 And he suffered no man to followe him saue Peter and Iames and Iohn the brother of Iames. 38 So he came vnto the house of the ruler of the Synagogue and sawe the tumulte and them that wept and wailed greatly 39 And he went in and said vnto them Why make ye this trouble and wepe the childe is not dead but slepeth 40 And they laught him to scorne but he put them all ãâã and toke the father and the mo ther of the childe and them that were with him and entred in where the childe laye 41 And toke the childe by the hand and said vnto her Talitha cumi which is by interpretation ãâã I say vnto thee arise 42 And straight way the maiden arose and wal ked for she was of the age of twelue yeres and they were astonied out of measure 43 And he charged them straitely that no man ãâã knowe of it and commanded to giue her meat CHAP. VI. 4 How Christ and his are receiued in their owne countrey 7 The Apostles commission 15 Soudrie opinioÌs of Christ 25 Iohn is put to death and buryed 31 Christ giuest rest to his ãâã s. 38 The fiues loaues and two ãâã 48. Christ walketh on the water 55
our Father Isaac 11 For yer the children were borne when they had nether done good nor euil that the purpose of God might remaine according to election not by workes but by him that calleth 12 It was said vnto her * The elder shal serue the yonger 13 At it is written * I haue loued Iacob haue hated Esau. 14 What shal we say then Is there vnrighte ousnes with God God forbid 15 For he saith to Moses * I wil haue mercie on him to whome I wil she we mercie and wil haue compassioÌ on him on whome I wil haue compassion 16 So then it is not in him that willeth nor in him that runneth but in God that sheweth mercie 17 For the Scripture saith vnto Pharao * For this same purpose haue I stirred thee vp that I might shew my power in thee and that my Name might be declared through out all the earth 18 Therefore he hathe mercie on whome he wil and whome he wil he hardeneth 19 Thou wilt say then vnto me Why doeth he yet complaine for who hath resisted his ãâã 20 But ô man who art thou which pleadest against God shal the * thing formed say to him that formed it Why hast thou made me thus 21 Hathe not the potter power of the claie to to make of the same lompe one vessel to honour and another vnto dishonour 22 What and if GOD wolde to shewe hys wrath and to make his power knowen suffre with long pacience the vessels of wrath prepared to destruction 23 And that he might declare the riches of his glorie vpon the vessels of mercie whiche he hathe prepared vnto glorie 24 Euen vs whome he hathe called not of the Iewes onely but also of the Gentiles 25 As he saith also in Osee * I wil call them My people which were not my people and her Beloued which was not beloued 26 And it shal be in the place where it was said vnto theÌ * Ye are not my people that there they shal be called The chyldren of the lyuing God 27 Also Esaias cryeth coÌcerning Israel * thogh the nomber of the children of Israel were as the sand of the sea yet shall but a ramnant be saued 28 For he wil make his account and gather it into a short summe with righteousnes for the Lord wil make a short count in the earth 29 * And as Esaias sayd before Excepte the Lorde of hostes had left vs a sede we had bene made as Sodome and had bene lyke to Gomorrha 30 What shall we iaye then That the Gentiles whiche folowed not ryghteousnes haue atteined vnto righteousnes euen the rightous nes which is of faith 31 But Israel which folowed the Law of rightousnes ãâã not atteine vnto the Lawe of righteousnes 32 Wherefore Because they soght it not by fayth but as it were by the workes of the Lawe ãâã they haue stombled at the stombling stone 33 As it is written * Beholde Ilaye in Sion a stombling stone and a rocke to make men fall and euerie one that beleueth in him shal not be ashamed CHAP. X. 1 After that he had declared his zeale towardes them 3 He sheweth the cause of the ruine of the Iewes 4. The end of the Lawe 5 The difference betwene the iustice of the Lawe and of faith 17 Wherof saith ãâã and to whome it belongeth 19 The reiection of the Iewes and calling of the Gentiles 1 BRethren myne hearts desire and prayer to GOD for Israelis that they myght be saued 2 For I beare them recorde that they haue the zeale of GOD but not accordynge to knowledge 3 For they beyng ignorant of the righteousnes of God aÌd going about to stablish their owne righteousnes haue not submited them selues to the righteousnes of God 4 * For Christe is the end of the Lawe for righteousnes vnto euerie one that beleueth 5 For Moses thus describeth the ryghteousnes whiche is of the Lawe * That the man which doeth these things shal liue thereby 6 But the righteousnes which is of faith speaketh on this wise * Saye not in thine heart Who shall ascende into heauen that is to bring Christ from aboue 7 Or Who shall descende into the depe that is to bring Christ againe from the dead 8 But what saith it * The worde is nere thee euen in thy mouth and in thine heart This is the worde of faith which we preache 9 For if thou shalt confesse with thy mouth the Lorde Iesus and shalt beleue in thine heart that God raised him vp from the dead thou shalt be saued 10 For with the heart man beleueth vnto right ousnes and with the mouth man ãâã to saluation 11 For the Scripture saith * Whosoeuer beleueth in him shal not be ashamed 12 For there is no difference betwene the Iewe and the Grecian for he that is Lord ouer all is riche vnto all that call on him 13 * For whosoeuer shal call vpon the Name of the Lord shal be saued 14 But how shal they cal on him in whom they haue not beleued and how shal they beleue iu hym of whome they haue not heard and how shall they heare without a preacher 15 And howe shall they preache except they be sent as it is written * How beautifull are the fete of them whyche bryng glad tydyngs of peace and brynge glad tydings of good things 16 But they haue not all obeyed the Gospell for Esaias saith * Lorde who hathe beleued our reporte 17 Then faith is by hearyng and hearing by the worde of God 18 But I demande Haue they not heard * No doute theyr so unde went out through all the earth and their wordes into the ends of the worlde 19 But I demande Did not Israel know God First Moses saith * I wil prouoke you to enuie by a nation that is not my nation and by a foolish nation I wil anger you 20 * And Esayas is bolde sayth I was founde of them that soght me not and haue bene made manifeste to them that asked not after me 21 And vnto Israel he saith * All the daye long haue I stretched forthe myne hande vnto a disobedient and gainesaying people CHAP. XI 4 God hath his Church althogh it be not sene to maÌs eye 5 The grace shewed to the elect 7 The iudgement of the reprobate 8 God hathe blinded the Iewes for a time and reueiled him self to the Gentiles 18 Whome he warneth to humble them selues 29 The giftes of God without repentance 33 The depth of Gods iugdement 1 I Demande then Hathe God cast awaye hys people God forbid for I also a man Israelite of the sede of Abraham of the tribe of Beniamin 2 God hathe not cast away his people which he knewe before Knowe
instructed bothe to be ful and to be hongrie and to abunde and to haue want 13 I am able to do all things through the helpe of Christ which strengtheneth me 14 Notwithstanding ye haue wel done that ye did communicate to mine affliction 15 And ye Philippians knowe also that in the beginning of the Gospel when I departed from Macedonia no Church communicated with me concerning the matter of giuing and receiuing but ye onely 16 For euen when I was in Thessalonica ye sent once and afterwarde againe for my necessitie 17 Not that I desire a gift but I desire the frute which may further your reckening 18 Nowe I haue receiued all and haue plentie I was euen filled after that I had receiued of Epaphroditus that which came from you an odour that smelleth swete a sacrifice acceptable and pleasant to God 19 And my God shall fulfil all your necessities through his riches with glorie in ãâã Christ 20 Vnto God euen our Father be praise for euermore Amen 21 Salute all the Saintes in Christ Iesus The brethren which are with me grete you 22 All the Saintes salute you and moste of all they which are of Cesars housholde 23 The grace of our Lord Iesus Christ be with you all Amen Written to the Philippians from Rome and sent by Epaphroditus THE EPISTLE OF Paul to the Collossians THE ARGVMENT IN this Epistle S. Paul putteth difference betwene the liuelie effectual true Christ and the fained ãâã and imagined Christ whome the false Apostles taught And first he confirmeth the doctrine whiche Epaphras had preached wishing them increase of faith to esteme the excellencie of Gods benefite towarde them teachyng them also that saluacion and whatsoeuer good thing can be desired standeth onely in Christ whome onely we embrace by the Gospell But for asmuche as the false brethren wolde haue mixed the Lawe with the Gospel he toucheth those flatterers vehemently and exhorteth the Collossians to staye onely on Christ without whome all things are but mere vanitie And as for Circumcision abstinence from meates externall holines worshiping of Angels as meanes whereby to come to Christ he vtterly condemneth shewing what was the office and nature of ceremonies whiche by Christ are abrogate so that now the exercises of the Christians stande in mortification of the flesh new ãâã of life with other lyke offices apperteyning bothe generally and particularly to all the faithful CHAP. I. 3 He giueth thankes vnto God for their faith ãâã Confirmeth the doctrine of Epaphras 9 Prayeth for the increase of their faith 13 He sheweth vnto them the true Christ and discouereth the contrefait Christ of the false Apostles 25 He approueth his autoritie and charge 28 And of his faithful executing of the same 1 PAVL an Apostle of IESVS Christ by the wil of God and Timotheus our brother 2 To theÌ which are at Coloce Saintes faithful brethereÌ in Christe Grace be with you and peace from God our Father and from the Lord Iesus Christ. 3 We giue thankes to God euen the Father of our Lorde Iesus Christ alwayes praying for you 4 Since we heard of your faith in Christ Iesus and of your loue towarde all Saintes 5 For the hopes sake whyche is layd vp for you in heauen whereof ye haue hearde before by the worde of trueth which is the Gospel 6 Which is come vnto you euen as it is vnto all the worlde and is fruteful as it is also among you from the daye that ye heard and truely knewe the grace of God 7 As ye also learned of Epaphras our deare felowe seruaunt whiche is for you a faithfull minister of Christ. 8 Who hathe also declared vnto vs your loue which ye haue by the Spirit 9 For thys cause we also sinne the daye we heard of it cease not to praye for you and to desire that ye myght be fulfilled wyth knowledge of his will in all wisdome and spiritual vnderstanding 10 * That ye might walke worthie of the Lord and please him in all things beyng * frutefull in all good workes and increasing in the knowledge of God 11 Strengthned with all might through his glo rious power vnto all pacience and long suffring with ioyfulnes 12 Gyuing thankes vnto the Father whiche hathe made vs mete to be partakers of the inheritance of the Saintes in light 13 Who hathe deliuered vs from the power of darkenes and hathe translated vs into the kingdome * of his deare Sonne 14 In whom we haue redemption through his bloode that is the forgiuenes of sinnes 15 Who is the * image of the inuisible God the first borne of euerie creature 16 * For by him were all things created which are in heauen and which are in earth things visible and inuisible whether they be Thro nes or Dominions or Principalities or Pow ers all thynges were created by hym and for hym 17 And he is before all thynges and in hym all things consist 18 And he is the head of the bodie of the Chur che he is the beginning * aÌd the first borne of the dead that in all things he might haue the preeminence 19 * For it pleased the Father that in hym shulde all fulnes dwell 20 And by him to reconcile all thynges vnto hymselfe and to set at peace through the blood of his crosse both the things in earth and the things in heauen 21 And you whiche were in times past strangers and enemyes because your mindes were set in euil workes hathe he now also reconciled 22 In the bodie of his flesh through death to make you * holie aÌd vnblameable and without faute in his sight 23 * If ye continue grounded and stablished in the fayth and be not moued awaye from the hope of the Gospell whereof ye haue heard and whiche hathe bene preached to euerie creature which is vnder heaueÌ wherof I Paul am a minister 24 Nowe ãâã I in my suffrings for you and fulfil the rest of the afflictions of Christ in my flesh for his bodies sake which is the Church 25 Whereof I am a minister accordynge to the dispensation of GOD whiche is giuen me vnto you warde to fulfill the worde of God 26 * Whiche is the mysterie hyd since the worlde began and from all ages but now is made manifest to his Saintes 27 To whome GOD wolde make knowen what is the riches of this glorious mysterie among the Gentiles which riches is Christ in you * the hope of glorie 28 Whome we preache admonishyng euerie man and teaching euerie man in al wisdome that we may present euerie man perfecte in Christ Iesus 29 Whereunto I also labour and striue accordyng to his working which worketh in me myghtly CHAP. II. 1 Hauing protected his good wil towarde them 4 He admonisheth them not to
ãâã cometh of Godsblessing as Chap 3. 11. q Meaning to pleasures a He speaketh of this diuersitie of time for ãâã cau ses first to declare that there is nothing in this Worlde perpetual next to teache ãâã not to be grieued if We haue not all things at once according to our desires ne ther inioye them so long as We Wolde Wish b Read Chap. 1. 13 c God hathe giuen man a desire and affection to seke out the ãâã of this Worlde to ãâã therein d Read Chap 2. 24. and these places declare that We shulde do all things With sobrietie and in the feare of God for asmuche as he gi ueth not his giftes to the intent that ãâã shulde be abused e That is man shal neuer be able to let Gods Worke but as he hath determined so it shal come to passe f God onelie causeth that Whiche is past to returne g Meaning With God how socuer man neglect his ãâã h And made theÌ pure in their first creation i Man is not able by his reason iudgemeÌt to put difference betwe ne man beast as touching those things Whereun to both are subiect or the eye caÌ not iudge anie other Wise of a man being dead then of a beast Which is dead yet ãâã the Worde of God and faith We ãâã know the diuersitie as vers 21. k Meaning that reason caÌ not coÌprehend that Which faith bele ueth herein l By the often repetition of this sentence as Chap ãâã 24. chap. 3 12 and 22. chap. 5 7. chap 8 15 he declareth that man by reason caÌ ãâã othing better in this life theÌ to vse the giftes of God ãâã comfortably for to knowe ãâã is a special gifte of God reueiled by his Spirit a He maketh here another discours With him self coÌcerning the tyraÌnie of them that oppressed the poore b Because they are no more subiect to these oppressions c He speaketh according to the iugement of the flesh Which can not abide to fele or se troubles d The more profit that the Worke is the more is it enuied of the Wicked e For ydlenes he is compelled to destroye him self f Forasmuche as WheÌ maÌ is alone he can net ãâã hel pe him self not others he sheweth that man ought to liue in mutual ãâã to the iuteÌt thei may be profirable one to another that their things may ãâã g By this prouer be he declareth how necessairie it is that meÌ shulde liue in societie h That is from a poore and base estate or out of trouble ãâã ãâã ãâã Ioseph did Gen. 41. 14. i Meaning that is ãâã a King k Which follow and flatter the Kings sonne or ãâã that shal suc cede to enter ãâã credit With them in hope of gaine l They neuer cea se by all meanes to crepe into fauour but when they obteine not their greadie desires they thinke them selues abused as other haue bene in time past and so care no ãâã for him m That is With What affection thou comest to heare the Worde of God n Meaning of the Wicked Which thinke to please God With ceremonies and haue nether faith nor repentance a Ether in vowing or in praying meaning that We shulde vse all reuerence to God Ward b He heareth thee not for thy manie Wordes sake or often repetitions but considereth thy faith and ferueÌt minde Deut 23 21. c He speaketh of vowes Which are approued by Gods Worde and serue to his glorie d Cause not thy self to sinne by vowing ãâã as thei do which make a vowe to liue ãâã suche like e That is before Gods messenger when he shal ãâã thy doing as thogh thy igno rance shulde be a iust excuse f Meaning that God wil ãâã these things and therfore we must ãâã vpon him g The reuenues of the earth are to be preferred aboue all things ãâã ãâã to this life h Kings and prin ces can not main teine their estate withou ãâã which thing coÌmen deth the excelleÌcie of tillage i That is his great abundance of ãâã or the surse ãâã whichcometh by his great ãâã k when couetous men heape vp ãâã which ãâã to their destruction l He doeth not en ioye his fathers ãâã Iob. 1. 21. VVisd 7 5. 1. Tim. 6 7. m Meaning in vaine ãâã profit n In ãâã ãâã of minde o Read Chap. 3 22 p He wil take no great thoght for the peines that he ãâã endured in ãâã a He sheweth that it is the plague of God wheÌ the riche man hathe not a liberal heart to vse his ãâã b If be can neuer haue ynough c As we se often ãâã hat the co ãâã man ether ãâã into crimes that ãâã death or is murthered or drowned or ãâã himself or suche like so lacketh the honour of bu ryal which is the last office of humanitie d Meaning the vntimelie frure whoselife did ãâã ãâã profite or ãâã a nie e His desire and affection f That knoweth to vse his goods wel in the iudge ment of men g To be content with that which God hathe giuen is better then to followe the desires that neuer can be satisfied h Meaning God who wil make him to fele that he is mortal a There is no sta te wherein man can liue to haue ãâã quietnes in this life Iob. 14. 2. Psal. 145 4. Piou 22. 1. b He speaketh thus after the iud gement of the fl ãâã which thin keth death to be the end of al euils or els because that this ãâã death is the entring into life euerlasting c where wemaie se the haÌd of God and learne to examine our liues d which ãâã for a while and profite nothing e A man that is estemed wise ãâã he ãâã to oppression be cometh like a beast f He noteth ãâã lightnes which ãâã and suddenly lea ue it of againe g Murmure not against God wheÌ he ãâã haduersities for mans ãâã h He answer eth to them that ãâã me not wisdome except riches be ioyned there with ãâã that bo the are the giftes of God but that wisdome is farre more excellent ãâã be without riches Chap. 1. 15. i Consider wherfore God doeth sendit and ãâã maie comfort end k That man shuld be able to coÌrrolle nothing in his workes l Meaning that cruel ãâã put the godly to death and ãâã the wicked go fre m Boast not to muche of thyne owne iustice and wisdome n Tarie not long when thou ãâã ad monished to come out of the way of wickednes o ãâã wit on these admonitions that go before p Consider what desolation and de structioÌ shal come if thou do not ãâã them 1. King ãâã 46. 2. ãâã 6. 48. q Credit them not nether ãâã for them ãâã 20. 9. 1. Iohn 1. 8. â Or spoken ãâã of others r Meaning wisdome s That is to come to a conclusion t And so are cause of their
intention semed good and necessarie and of Iosiah also who for greate considerations was moued for the defence of true Religion and his people to fight agaynste Pharaoh Necho Kyng of Egypt may sufficiently admonish vs. Laste of all moste gracioÌus Quene for the aduancement of this buyldyng and rearyng vp of the worke two things are necessarie First that we haue a lyuely and sted fast faith in Christ Iesus who must dwel in our heartes as the only meanes and assurance of our saluation for he is the ladder that reacheth from the earth to heauen he lifteth vp his Churche and setteth it in the hea uenly places he maketh vs lyuely stones and buildeth vs vpon him selfe he ioyneth vs to hym selfe as the membres and body to the head yea he maketh him selfe aÌd his Church one Christ. The next is that our faith bring forthe good fruites so that our godly conuersation may serue vs as a witnes to confirme our election and by an example to all others to walke as apperteyneth to the vocation whereunto they are called leste the worde of God be euill spoken of and this buyldyng be stayed to growe vp to a iuste heyght whiche can not be without the greate prouocation of Gods iuste vengeance and discouragyng of many thousandes through all the worlde if they shulde se that our life were notholy and agreable to our profession For the eyes of all that feare God in al places beholde your countreyes as an example to all that beleue and the prayers of all the godly at all tymes are directed to God for the preseruation of your maiestie For consideryng Gods wonderfull mercies towarde you at all seasons who hathe pulled you out of the mouth of the lyons and howe that from your youth you haue bene broght vp in the holy Scriptures the hope of all men is so increased that they can not but looke that God shulde bryng to passe some wonderful worke by your grace to the vniuersall comforte of hys Churche Therefore euen aboue strength you muste she we your selfe strong and bolde in Gods matters and thogh Satan lay all his power and crafte together to hurt and hinder the Lordes building yet be you assured that God will fight from heauen againste this great dragon the ancient serpent whiche is called the deuill and Satan till he haue accomplished the whole worke and made his Churche glorious to hym selfe without spot or wrincle For albeit all other kingdomes and monarchies as the Babylonians Persians Grecians and Romaines haue fallen and taken end yet the Churche of Christe euen vnder the Crosse hathe from the begynning of the worlde bene victorious and shal be euerlastyngly Trueth it is that sometyme it semeth to be shadowed with a cloude or driuen with a stormie persecution yet suddenly the beames of Christ the sunne of iustice shine and bryng it to light and libertie If for a tyme it lye couered with ashes yet it is quickely kindeled agayne by the wynde of Gods Spirit thogh it seme drowned in the sea or parched and pyned in the wildernes yet GOD giueth euer good successe for he punysheth enemyes and deliuereth hys nourisheth theÌ and still preserueth them vnder hys wyngs This Lord of Lordes and King of kings who hath euer defended his strengthen comfort and preserue your maiestie that you maye be able to builde vp the ruines of Gods house to hys glorie the discharge of your conscience and to the comfort of all them that loue the commyng of Christ Iesus our Lord. From Geneua 10. April 1561. TO OVR BELOVED IN THE LORD THE BRETHREN OF ENGLAND Scotland Ireland c. Grace mercie and peace through Christ Iesus BEsides the manifolde and continuall benefites whiche almyghtie God bestoweth vpon vs bothe corporall and spirituall we are especially bounde deare brethren to giue him thankes without ceasing for hys great grace and vnspeakable mercies in that it hathe pleased hym to call vs vnto this meruelous lyght of his Gospel and mercifully to regarde vs after so horrible back esliding and falling away from CHRIST to ANTICHRIST from lyght to darcknes from the liuing God to dumme and dead idoles and that after so cruell murther of Gods Saintes as alas hathe bene among vs we are not altogether cast of as were the Israelites and many others for the like or not so manifest wickednes but receiued againe to gra ce with moste euident signes and tokens of Gods especialloue and fauour To the intent therefore that we may not be vnmyndefull of these greate merecies but seke by all meanes accordyng to ourduetie to be thank efull for the same it behoueth vs so to walke in his feare and loue that all the dayes of our life we maye procure the glorie of his holy name Now forasmuche as thys th ing chefely is atteyned by the knollage and practising of the worde of God which is the light to our paths the keye of the kyngdome of heauen our comforte in affliction our shielde and sworde against Satan the schoole of all wisdome the glasse wherein we beholde Gods face the testimonie of his fauour and the only foode and nourishement of our soules we thoght that we colde bestowe our labours and studie in nothyng whiche colde be more acceptable to God and comfortable to his Church then in the translating of the holy Scriptures into our natiue tongue the which thing albeit that diuers heretofore haue indeuored to atchieue yet consideryng the infancie of those tymes and imperfect knollage of the tongues in respect of thys rype age and cleare light whiche God hath now reueiled the translations required greatly to be perused and reformed Not that we vendicat anything to our selues aboue the least of our brethren for God knoweth wyth what feare tremblyng we haue bene nowe for the space of two yeres more daye and nyght occupied herein but beyng earnestly desired and by diuers whose learnyng and godlines we reuerence exhorted and also incouraged by the ready willes of suche whose heartes God lyke wise touched not to spare any charges for the fortherance of suche a benefite and fauour of God towarde his Churche thogh the tyme then was moste dangerous and the persecution sharpe and furious we submitted our selues at length to their godly iudgementes and seing the great oportunitie and occasions whiche God presented vnto vs in this Church by rea son of so many godly and learned men and suche diuersities of translations in diuers tongues we vnder toke this great and wonderful worke with all reuerence as in the presence of God as intreating the worde of God whereunto we thinke ourselues vnsufficient whiche nowe God according to his diuine prouidence and mercie hath directed to a moste prosperous end And this we may with good conscience protest that we haue in euery point and worde accordyng to the measure of that knollage whiche it pleased almightie God to giue vs
faithfully rendred the text and in all hard places most syncerely expounded the same For God is our witnes that we haue by al meanes indeuored to set forthe the puritie of the worde and right sense of the holy Gost for the edifying of the brethren in faith and charitie Now as we haue chiefely obserued the sense and laboured alwayes to restore it to all integritie so haue we most reuerently kept the proprietie of the wordes considering that the Apostles who spake and wrote to the Gentiles in the Greke tongue rather constrayned them to the liuely phrase of the Ebrewe then entreprised farre by mollifying their langage to speake as the Gen tiles did And for this and other causes we haue in many places reserued the Ebrewe phrases notwithstanding that they may seme somewhat hard in their eares that are not wel practised and also delite in the swete sounding phrases of the holy Scriptures Yet lest ether the simple shulde be discouraged or the malicious haue any occasion of iust cauillation seing some translations read after one sort and some after another whereas all may serue to good purpose and edification we haue in the margent noted that diuersitie of speache or readyng whiche may also seme agreable to the mynde of the holy Gost and propre for our langage with this marke Againe where as the Ebrewe speache semed hardly to agre with ours we haue noted it in the margent after thys sorte vsing that whiche was more intelligible And albeit that many of the Ebrewe names be altered from the olde texte and restored to the true writing and first original whereof they haue their signification yet in the vsual names litle is changed for feare of troublyng the simple readers Moreouer whereas the necessitie of the sentence required any thyng to be added for suche is the grace and proprietie of the Ebrewe and Greke tongues that it can not but ether by circumlocution or by adding the verbe or some worde be vnderstand of them that are not wel practised therein we haue put in the text with another kynde of lettre that it may easely be discerned from the common lettre As touching the diuision of the verses we haue followed the Ebrewe examples which haue so euen from the beginnyng distinct theÌ Which thing as it ismoste profitable for memorie so doeth it agre with the best translations is moste easie to finde out both by the best Concordances and also by the cotations which we haue diligently herein perused and set forth by this starre* Besides this the principal matters are noted and distincted by this marke ¶ Yea and the arguments both for the booke and for the chapters with the nombre of the verse are added that by all meanes the reader might be holpen For the which cause also we haue set ouer the head of euery page some notable worde of sentence whiche may greatly further aswel for memorie as for the chief point of the page And considering how hard a thing it is to vnderstand the holy Scriptures aÌd what errors sectes heresies growe dailie for lacke of the true knollage thereof and how many are discouraged as they pretend because they can not atteine to the true aÌd simple meaning of the same we haue also indeuored bothe by the diligent reading of the best commentaries and also by the conference with the godly and learned brethren to gather brief annotations vpon all the hard places aswel for the vnderstanding of suche wordes as are obscure and for the declaration of the text as for the application of the same as may moste apperteine to Gods glorie and the edification of his Church Forthermore whereas certeyne places in the bookes of Moses of the Kings and Ezekiell semed so darke that by no description they colde be made easie to the simple reader we haue so set them forthe with figures and notes for the ful declaration thereof that they whiche can not by iudgement being holpen by the annotations noted by the lettres a b c c. atteyn thereunto yet by the perspectiue and as it were by the eye may sufficiently knowe the true meaning of all suche places Whereunto also we haue added certeyne mappes of Cosmographie which necessarely serue for the perfect vnderstanding and memorie of diuers places and countreys partely described and partely by occasion touched bothe in the olde and newe Testament Finally that nothing might lacke which might be boght by labors for the increase of knowlage and forthe rance of Gods glorie we haue adioyned two moste profitable tables the one seruing for the interpretation of the Ebrewe names and the other conteyning all the chefe and principal matters of the whole Bible so that nothing as we trust that any colde iustely desire is omitted Therefore as brethreÌ that are partakers of the same hope and saluatioÌ with vs we beseche you that this riche perle and inestimable treasure may not be offred in vayne but as sent from God to the people of God for the increase of his kingdome the comfort of his Churche and discharge of our conscience whome it hath pleased him to raise vp for this purpose so you wolde willingly receyue the worde of God earnestly studie it and in all your life practise it that you may now appeare in dede to be the people of God not walking any more according to this worlde but in the frutes of the Spirit that God in vs may be fully glorified through Christ Iesus our Lord who lyueth and reigneth for euer Amen From Geneua 10. April 1561. THE FIRST BOKE OF MOSES called Genesis THE ARGVMENT MOses in effect declareth the thing which are here chiefly to be considered First that the worlde al things therein were created by God and that man being placed in this great tabernacle of the worlde to beholde Gods wonderfull workes and to praise his Name for the infinite graces ãâã with he had endued him fel willingly from God through disobedience who yet for his owne mercies sake restored him to life and confirmed him in the same by his promes of Christ to come by whome he shulde ouercome Satan death and hel Secondely that the wicked vnmindefull of Gods moste excellent benefites remained still in their wickednes and so falling most horribly from sinne to sinne prouoked God who by his preachers called them continually to repentance at length to destroye the whole worlde Thirdly he assureth vs by the examples of AbrahaÌ Izhák Iakob and the rest of the Patriarkes that his mercies neuer faile them whome he chuseth to be his Churche and to professe his Name in earth but in all their afflictions and persecutions he euer ãâã them sendeth comforte and deliuereth them And because the beginning increase preseruation and successe thereof might be onely attributed to God Moses sheweth by the examples of Rain I shmaél Esaú and others which were noble in mans iudgement that this churche dependeth not on the estimacion and nobilitie of the worlde
before thee departe I pray thee froÌ me if thou wilt take the left hand theÌ I wil go to the right or if thou go to the right hand then I wil take the left 10 So when Lot lifted vp his eies he sawe that all the plaine of Iordén was watered euerie where for before the Lord destroyed Sodôm and Gomorâh it was as the garden of the Lord like the land of Egypt as thou goest vnto Zôar 11 Then Lot chose vnto him all the plaine of Iordén and toke his iourney from the East and they departed the one from the other 12 Abrám dwelled in the land of ãâã and Lot abode in the cities of the plaine pitched his ten teuen to Sodôm 13 Now the men of Sodôm were wicked and exceading sinners against the Lord. 14 ¶ Then the Lord said vnto Abrám after that Lot was departed from him Lift vp thi ne eies now and loke from the place where thou art Northward and Southward and Eastward and Westward 15 For all * the land which thou seest wil I giue vnto thee and to thy sede for euer 16 And I wil make thy sede as the dust of the earth so that if a man can nomber the dust of the earth then shal thy sede be nombred 17 Arise walke throught the laÌd in the lenght thereof and bredth thereof for I wil giue it vnto thee 18 Then Abrám remoued his tent and came and dwelled in the plaine of Mamré ãâã is in Hebrôn and buylded there an altar vnto the Lord. CHAP. XIIII 12 In the ouer throwe of Sodóm Lot is taken prisoner 16. Abrám deliuereth him 18 Melchi-zédek commeth to mere him ãâã Abram wolde not be enriched by the King of Sodóm 1 ANd in the daies of Amraphél King of Shinar Arióch King of Ellasar Ched orlaômer King of Elám and Tidál King of the nacions 2 These men made warre with Berá King of Sodom and with Birshá King of Gomoráh Shináb King of Admáh Shemebér King of Zeboilm and the King of Belá which is Zôar 3 All these ioyned together in the vale of Siddîm which is the salte Sea 4 Twelue yeres were they subiect to Chedor laômer but in the thirtenthe yere they rebelled 5 And in the fourtenth yere came Chedorlaômer and the Kings that were with him and smote the Rephaims in Ashterôth karnaîm and the Zuzims in Ham and the Emims in Shauéh Kiriatháim 6 And the Horites in their mount Seir vnto the plaine of ParaÌ which is by the wildernes 7 And thei returned and came to En-mishpát which is Kadésh and smote all the countrie of the Amalekites aÌd also the Amorites that dwelled in Hazezon-tamár 8 Then went out the King of Sodóm and the King of Gomoráh and the King of Admáh and the King of ãâã and the King of Bê la which is Zôar and thei ioyned battel with them in the vale of Siddim 9 To wit with Chedor-laômer King of Elám and Tidál King of nacions and ãâã King of Shinâr and Ariôh King of Ellasár foure Kings against fiue 10 Now the vale of Siddim was ful of slyme pittes and the Kings of Sodôm and Gomoráh fled and fel there and the residue fled to the mountaine 11 Then thei toke all the substance of Sodôm and Gomoráh and all their vitailes and went their waie 12 Thei toke Lot also Abrams brothers sonne and his substance for he dwelt at Sodôm and departed 13 ¶ Then came one that had escaped tolde Abrám the Ebrewe which dwelt in the plaine of Mamré the Amorite brother of Eshcôl and brother of Anér which were confederat with Abrám 14 When Abrám heard that his brother was taken he broght forthe of them that were borne and broght vp in his house thre hundreth eightene pursued the vnto Dan. 15 TheÌ he and his seruantes diuided themselues against theÌ by night and smote them and pursued them vnto Hobáh which is on the left side of Damascus 16 And he recouered all the substaÌce and also broght againe his brother Lot his goods and the women also and the people 17 ¶ After that he returned from the slaughter of Chedor-laômer and of the Kings that we re with him came the King of Sodom for the to mete him in the valley of Shauéh which is the * Kings dale 18 And * Melchi-zedek King of Shalém broght forthe bread and wine and he was a Priest of the moste high God 19 Therfore he blessed him saying Blessed art thou Abrám of God moste high posses sor of heauen and ãâã 20 And blessed be the moste high God which hathe deliuered thine ennemies into thine hand * And Abrám gaue him tithe of all 21 Then the King of Sodóm said to Abrám Gi ue me the personnes and take the goods to thy selfe 22 And Abrám said to the King of Sodôm I haue lift vp mine hand vnto the Lord the moste high God possessor of heauen and earth 23 That I wil not take of all that is thine so muche as a threde or shoulachet lest thou shuldest saie I haue made Abrámriche 24 Saue onely that which the yong men haue eaten and the partes of the men which went with me Anêr Eshcôl and Mamré let them take their partes CHAP. XV. 1 The Lord is Abrahams defence and rewarde 6 He is iustified by faith 13 The seruitude and deliuerance out of Egypt is declared 18 The land of Canáan is promised the ãâã time 1 AFter these things the worde of the Lord came vnto AbraÌ in a * visioÌ saying Feare not Abrám I am thy buckler and thine exceading * great rewarde 2 And Abrám said O Lord God what wilt thou giue me seing I go childeles and the stuarde of mine house is this Eliézer of Damascus 3 Againe Abrám said Beholde to me thou hast giuen no sede wherfore lo a seruant of mine house shal be mine heire 4 Then beholde the worde of the Lord came vnto him saying He shal not be thine heire but one that shal come out of thine owne bowelles he shal be thine heire 5 Moreouer he broght him forthe and said * Loke vp now vnto heauen and tell the starres if thou be able to nombre them and he said vnto him So shall thy sede be 6 And Abrám * beleued the Lord and he counted that to him for righteousnes 7 Againe he said vnto him I am the Lord that broght thee out of * Vr of the Caldees to giue thee this land to inherit it 8 And he said O Lord God whereby shall I knowe that I shal inherit it 9 Then he said vnto him Take me an heyfer of thre yeres olde and a she goate of thre yeres olde and a ramme of thre yeres olde a ãâã doue also and a pigion 10 So he toke al these
multitude of thy ãâã o God heare me in the trueth of thy saluacion 14 Deliuer me out of the myre that I sinke not let me be deliuered from them that hate me and out of the depe waters 15 Let not the waterflood drowne me nether let the depe swallowe me vp and let not the pit shut her mouth vpon me 16 Heare me o Lord for thy louing kindenes is good turne vnto me according to the mul titude of thy tendre mercies 17 And hide not thy face from thy seruaÌt for I am in trouble make hast and heare me 18 Drawe nere vnto my soule and redeme it deliuer me because of mine enemies 19 Thou hast knowen my reprofe my shame my ãâã all mine aduersaries are before thee 20 Rebuke hathe broken mine heart and I am ful of heauines and I loked for some to ha ue pitie on me but there was none and for comforters but I founde none 21 For they gaue me gall in my meat and in my thirst they gaue me vinegre to drinke 22 Let their table be a snare before them and their prosperitie their ruine 23 Let their eyes be blinded that they se not make their loynes alwaye to tremble 24 Powre out thine angre vpon them and let thy wrathful displeasure take them 25 Let their habitacion be voide let none dwell in their tentes 26 For they persecute him whome thou hast smiten and they adde vnto the soro we of theÌ whome thou hast wounded 27 Lay iniquitie vpon their iniquitie and let them not come into thy righteousnes 28 Let them be put out of the boke of life ne ther let them be writen with the righteous 29 When I am poore and in heauines thine helpe o God shal exalt me 30 I wil praise the Name of God with a song and magnifie him with thankesgiuing 31 This also shal please the Lord better then a yong bullocke that hathe hornes and houses 32 The humble shal se this they that seke God shal be glad and your heart shal liue 33 For the Lord heareth the poore and despiseth not his prisoners 34 Let heauen earth praise him the seas and all that moueth in them 35 For God wil saue ZioÌn and buylde the cities of Iudáh that men maye dwell there and ha ue it in possession 36 The sede also of his seruants shal inherit it and they that loue his Name shal dwel therein PSAL. LXX 1 He prayeth to be ryght spedely deliuered 2 He desireth the shame of his enemies 4 And the ioyfull comfort of all those that seke the Lord. ¶ To him that excelleth A Psalme of Dauid to put in remembrance 1 O * God hast thee to deliuer me make haste to helpe me ô Lord. 2 Let them be confounded aÌd put to shame that seke my soule let them be turned back ward aÌd put to rebuke that desire mine hurt 3 Let them be turned backe for a rewarde of their shame whiche said Aha aha 4 But let all those that seke thee be ioyful aÌd glad in thee and let all that loue thy saluacion saie alwayes God be praised 5 Nowe I am poore and nedie ô God make haste to me thou art mine helper and my delinerer ô Lord make no tarying PSAL. LXXI 1 He prayeth in fayth established by the worde of the promes 5 And confirmed by the ãâã of God from hys youth 10 He complaineth of the crueltie of the ennemies 17 And desireth GOD to continue hys graces towarde hym 12 Promising to be mindefull and thanke full for the same 1 IN * thee ô Lorde I trust let me neuer be ashamed 2 Rescue me and deliuer me in thy righteous nes incline thine eare vnto me and ãâã me 3 Be thou my strong rocke whereunto I may alwaye resorte thou haste giuen commandement to saue me for thou art my rocke and my fortresse 4 Deliuer me ô my GOD out of the hande of the wicked out of the hand of the euill and cruel man 5 For thou art mine hope o Lord God euen my trust from my youth 6 Vppon thee haue I bene stayed frome the wombe thou art he that toke me out of my mothers bowels my prayse shal be alwayes of thee 7 I am become as it were a monstre vnto manie but thou art my sure trust 8 Let my mouth be filled with thy praise aÌd with thy glorie euerie day 9 Cast me not of in the time of age forsake me not when my strength faileth 10 For mine enemies speake of me and they that laie waite for my ãâã take their coun sel together 11 Saying God hath forsaken him pursue aÌd take him for their is none to deliuer him 12 Go not farre from me ô God my God hast thee to helpe me 13 LettheÌ be confouÌd ed and consumed that are against my soule let theÌ be couered with reprofe and confusion that seke mine hurt 14 But I wil waite continually and wil prayse thee more and more 15 My mouthe shall daily rehearse thy righteousnes and thy saluacion for I knowe not the nomber 16 I will go forwarde in the strength of the Lorde God and will make mention of thy righteousnes euen of thine onely 17 O GOD thou hast taught me frome my youth euen vntil nowe therefore wil I tell of thy wonderous workes 18 Yea euen vnto mine olde age and graye head ô God forsake me not vntill I haue de clared thine arme vnto this generatioÌ aÌd thy power to all them that shal come 19 And thy ryghteousnes ô God I will exalt on high forthou hast done great things ô God who is like vnto thee 20 Whiche hast shewed me great troubles and aduersities but thou wilt returne and reuiue me and wilt come againe and take me vp ãâã the depth of the earth 21 Thou wilt increase mine honour and retur ne and comfort me 22 Therefore wil I praise thee for thy faith fulnes o God vpon instrument and viole vnto thee will sing vpon the harpe o holie one of Israél 23 My lips wil reioyce when I sing vnto thee and my soule which thou hast deliuered 24 My tongue also shal talke of thy righteousnes daily for they are confounded and broght vnto shame that seke mine hurt PSAL. LXXII 1 He prayeth for the prosperous estate of the kingdome of Salomon who was the figure of Christ. 4 Vnderwhome shal be ãâã peace and ãâã 10 Vnto whome all Kings and all nations shall do ãâã 17 Whos 's name and power shall indure for euer and in whome all nations shal be blessed ¶ A Psalme of Salomon 1 GIue thy iudgementes to the Kynge o God and thy righteousnes to the Kings sonne 2 Then shal he iudge thy people in righteous nes and thy poore with equitie 3 The mountaines and
Lord she shal be praised 31 Giue her of the frute of her hands and let her owne workes praise her in the gates ECCLESIASTES OR THE PREACHER THE ARGVMENT SAlomón as a preacher and one that desired to instruct all in the way of saluaction describeth the deceiuable vanities of this worl de that man shulde not be addicted to anie thing vnder the sunne but rather inflamed with the desire of the heauenlie life therefore he confuteth their opinions which set their felicitie ether in knowledge or in pleasures or in dignitie and riches shewing that mans true felicitie consisteth in that that he is vnited with God and shal inioye his presence so that all other things must be ãâã saue in as muche as thei further vs to ãâã to this heauenlie treasure which is sure and permanent and can not be founde in anie other saue in God alone CHAP. I. 2 All things in this worlde are ful of vanitie and of none in durance 13 All mans wisdome is but folie and grief 1 THe wordes of the Prea cher the sonne of Dauid King in Ierusalém 2 Vanitie of vanities saith the Preacher vani tie of vanities all is vanitie 3 What remaineth vnto man in all his trauail which he suffreth vnder the sunne 4 One generacion passeth and another ge neracion succedeth but the earth remaineth for euer 5 The sunne riseth and the sunne goeth downe and draweth to his place where he riseth 6 The winde goeth toward the South coÌpasseth to ward the North the winde goeth round about and returneth by his circuites 7 * All the riuers go into the sea yet the sea is not ful for the riuers go vnto the place whence thei returne and go 8 All things are full of labour man can not vtter it the eye is not satisfied with seing ãâã the eare filled with hearing 9 What is that hathe bene that that shal be and what is it that hathe bene done that which shal be done there is no new thing vnder the sunne 10 Is there anie thing where of one may say Beholde this it is newe it hathe bene alreadie in the olde time that was before vs. 11 There is no memorie of the former nether shal there be a remembraÌce of the later that shal be with them that shal come after 12 ¶ I the Preacher haue bene King ouer Israél in Ierusalém 13 And I haue giuen mine heart to search and finde out wisdome by al things that are done vnder the heauen this sore trauail hathe God giuen to the sonnes of men to humble them thereby 14 I haue considered all the workes that are done vnder the sunne and beholde all is va nitie and vexacion of the spirit 15 That which is croked can none make straight and that which faileth can not be nombred 16 I thoght in mine heart and said Beholde I am become great and excel in wisdome all them that haue bene before me in Ierusalém and mine heart hathe sene muche wisdome and knowledge 17 And I gaue mine heart to knowe wisdome and knowledge madnes and folishnes I knewe also that this is a vexacion of the spirit 18 For in the multitude of wisdome is muche grief and he that encreaseth knowledge encreaseth sorowe CHAP. II. Pleasures sumptuous buyldings riches and possessions are but vanitie 14 The wise and the foole haue bothe one end touching the ãâã death 1 I Said in mine heart Go to now I wil proue thee with ioye therefore take thou pleasure in pleasant things and beh olde this also is vanitie 2 I said of laughter Thou art mad and of ioye What is this that thou doest 3 I soght in mine heart to giue my self to wine and to lead mine heart in wisdome and to take holde of folie til I might se where is that goodnes of the children of men which they enioye vnder the sunne the whole nomber of the daies of their life 4 I haue made my great workes I haue buylt me houses I haue planted me vineyards 5 I haue made me gardens and orchardes planted in them trees of all frute 6 I haue made me cisternes of water to watter there with the woods that growe with trees 7 I haue gotten seruants and maids and had childreÌ borne in the house also I had great possession of beues and shepe aboue all that were before me in Ierusalém 8 I haue gathered vnto me also siluer and golde and the chief treasures of Kings and prouinces I haue prouided me men singers and women singers and the delites of the sonnes of men as a woman taken captiue aÌd women taken captiues 9 And I was great encreased aboue all that were before me in IerusaleÌ also my wisdome remained with me 10 And what soeuer mine eyes desired I withhelde it not from them I withdrew not mine heart froÌ anie ioye for mine heart reioyced in all my labour and this was my portion of all my trauail 11 Then I loked on all my workes that mine hands had wroght and on the trauail that I had labored to do and beholde all is vanitie and vexacion of the spirit and there is no profite vnderthe sunne 12 ¶ And I turned to beholde wisdome and madnes and folie for who is the man that wil come after the King in things which me now haue ãâã 13 TheÌ I sawe that there is profite in wisdome more then infolie as the light is more excellent then darkenes 14 * For the wise mans eyes are in his head but the foole walketh in darkenes yet I kno we also that the same condition falleth to them all 15 Then I thogh in mine heart It befalleth vnto me as it befalleth to the foole Why there fore do I then labour to be more wise And I said in mine heart that this also is vanitie 16 For there shal be no remembrance of the wise nor of the foole for euer for that that now is in the daies to come shal all be forgotten And how dyeth the wise man as doeth the foole 17 Therefore I hated life for the worke that is wroght vnder the sunne is ãâã vnto me for all is vanitie vexacion of the spirit 18 I hated also all my labour wherein I had trauailed vnder the sunne which I shal leaue to the man that shal be after me 19 And who knoweth whether he shal be wise or foolish yet shal he haue rule ouer all my labour where in I haue trauailed and wherein I haue shewed my self wise vnder the sunne This is also vanitie 20 Therefore I went about to make mine heart abhorre all the labour wherein I had trauailed vnder the sunne 21 For there is a man whose trauail is in wisdome and in knowledge and in equitie yet to a man that hathe not trauailed herein shal he giue his portion
vpon the halfe thereof he eateth flesh he rosteth the roste and is satisfied also he warmeth hym selfe and saith Aha I am warme I haue bene at the fyre 17 And the residue thereof he maketh a God euen his idole he boweth vnto it and worshipeth and praieth vnto it and saith Deliuer me for thou art my god 18 They haue not knoweÌ nor vnderstand for God hath shut their eyes that thei caÌnot se and their hearts that they caÌ not vnderstad 19 And none considereth in his heart ãâã is there knowledge nor vnderstanding to say I haue burnt halfe of it euen in the fyre and haue baked bread also vpon the coles thereof I haue rosted flesh and eaten it and shal I make the residue ãâã of an abominacion shal I bowe to the ãâã of a tre 20 He fedeth of ashes a seduced heart hathe deceyued hym that he can not deliuer hys soule nor say Is their not a lye in my ryght hand 21 Remembre these ô IaakoÌb and Israél for thou art my seruat I haue ãâã thee thou art my seruant ô Israél forget me not 22 I haue put awaye thy transgressions lyke a cloude ãâã thy sinnes as a mist turne vnto me for I haue redemed thee 23 Reioyce ye heauens for the Lorde hathe done it shoute ye lower partes of the earth brast forthe into prayses ye mountaines ô forest and euerie tre therein for the Lorde hathe redemed IaakoÌb and wil be glorified in Israél 24 Thus sayth the Lorde thy redemer and he that formed thee from the wombe I am the Lord that made all things that spred out the heauens alone and stretched out the earth by my selfe 25 I destroye the tokens of the soeth sayers and make them that coniecture fooles and turne the wise men back warde and make their knowledge foolishnes 26 ¶ He confirmeth the worde of his seruant and performeth the counsell of his messengers saying to Ierusalém Thou shalt be inhabited and to the cities of Iudáh ye shal be buylt vp and I will repaire the decayed places thereof 27 He saith to the depe Be drye aÌd I wil drye vp thy floods 28 He saith to Cyrus Thou art my shepherd and he shal reforme all my desire saying also to Ierusalém Thou shalt be buylt and to the Temple Thy fundacion shal be surely layed CHAP. XLV 1 The deliuerance of the people by Cyrus 9 God is iust in all his workes 20 The calling of the Gentiles 1 THus sayth the Lorde vnto Cyrus hys anointed whose ryght hand I haue holden to subdue nations before him therefore will I weaken the loynes of Kings and open the dores before hym and the gates shal not be shut 2 I wil go before thee and make the croked streight I will breake the brasen dores and burst the yron barres 3 And I will giue thee the treasures of darkenes and the things hid in secret places that thou maist knowe that I am the LORDE which call thee by thy name euen the God of Israél 4 For Iaakob my seruaÌts sake and Israél mine elect I wil euen call thee by thy name and name thee thogh thou hast not knoweÌ me 5 I am the Lord and there is none other there is no God besides me I girded thee thogh thou ãâã not knowen me 6 That they maye knowe from the rysing of the sunne and frome the West that there is none besides me I am the Lord and there is none other 7 I forme the lyght and creat darkenes I make peace and creat euill I the Lord do all these things 8 Ye heauens send the dewe from aboue and let the cloudes drop downe ryghteousnes let the earth open and let saluacion and iustice growe forthe let it bring them forthe together I the Lord haue created him 9 Wo be vnto hym that striueth with his maker the potsherd with the potsherds of the earth shall the claie saie to hym that facioneth it What makest thou or thy worke it hathe none hands 10 Wo vnto hym that sayth to hys father What hast thou begotteÌ or to his mother What hast thou broght forthe 11 Thus saith the Lorde the holy one of Israél and his maker Aske me of thyngs to come concernyng my sonnes and concernyng the workes of mine hands commande you me 12 I haue made the earth and created man vppon it I whose handes haue spred out the heauens I haue euen commanded all their armie 13 I haue raised him vp in righteousnes and I wil direct all his waies he shal buylde my citie and he shall let go my captiues not for price nor reward saith the Lord of hostes 14 Thus saith the Lord The ãâã of Egypt and the march and I se of Ethiopia and of the Sabeans meÌ of stature shal come vnto thee and they shal be thine they shall followe thee and shal go in chaines they shall fall downe before thee and make supplication vnto thee saying Surely God is in thee and there is none other God besides 15 Verely thou ô God hidest thy self ô God the Sauiour of Israél 16 All they shal be ashamed and also confounded they shal go to confusion together that are the makers of images 17 But Israél shal be saued in the Lord wyth an euerlastyng saluacioÌ shal not be ashamed nor confounded worlde without end 18 For thus sayth the Lorde that created heauen God him selfe that formeth the earth and made it he that prepared it he created it not in vaine he formed it to be inhabited I am the Lord and there is none other 19 I haue not spoken in secrete nether in a place of darkenes in the earth I said not in vaine vnto the sede of Iaakôb Seke you me I the Lord do speake ryghteousnes and declare righteous things 20 Assemble your selues and come drawe nere together ye abiect of the Gentiles they haue no knowledge that set vp the wood of their idole and praye vnto a God that can not saue them 21 Tel ye and bring them and let them take counsel together who hathe declared this frome the beginnyng or hathe tolde it of olde Haue not I the Lord aÌd there is none other God beside me aiust God and a Sauiour there is none beside me 22 Loke vnto me and ye shal be saued al the ends of the earth shal be saued for I am God and there is none other 23 I haue sworne by my selfe the worde is gone out of my mouthe in ryghteousnes and shal not returne That euerie knee shal bowe vnto me and euerie tongue shal swea re by me 24 Surely he shall saye In the Lorde haue I ryghteousnes and strength he shall come vnto hym and all that prouoke him shal be ashamed 25 The whole sede of Israél shal be iustified and glorie in the Lord. CHAP.
it And he said This is an ãâã that goeth forthe He said ãâã This is the sight of them through all the earth 7 And behold there was lift vp a talent of lead and this is a woman that sitteth in the middes of the Epháh 8 And he said This is wickednes he cast it into the middes of the Epháh he cast the weight of lead vpon the mouth therof 9 TheÌ lift I vp mine eies loked behold there came out two women the winde was in their wings for thei had wings like the wings of a storke and they lift vp the Epháh betwene the earth and the heauen 10 Then said I to the Angel that talked with me Whither do these beare the Epháh 11 And he said vnto me To buyld it an house in the land of Shinár and it shal be established and set there vpoÌ her owne place CHAP. VI. By the foure ãâã he describeth the foure monarchies 1 A Caine I turned and life mine eyes and loked and beholde there came there foure charettes out from betwene two mountaines the mountaines were mouÌtaines of brasse 2 In the first charet were red horses and in the seconde charet blacke horses 3 And in the thirde charet white horses and in the fourte charet horses of diuers colours and reddish 4 Then I answered and said vnto the Angel that talked with me What are these my Lord 5 And the Angel answered and said vnto me These are the foure spirits of the heauen which go for the from standing with the Lord of all the earth 6 That with the blacke horse went for the into the land of the North and the white went out after them and they of diuers co lours went for the to warde the South countrey 7 And the reddish went out and required to go and passe through the worlde and he said Go passe through the worlde So they went thorowout the worlde 8 Then cryed he vpon me and spake vnto me saying Beholde these that go toward the North countrey haue pacified my spirit in the North countrey 9 And the worde of the Lord came vnto me saying 10 Take of them of the captiuitie euen of Heldai and of Tobiiah and Iedaiah which are come from Babél and come thou the same day go vnto the house of Ioshiáh the sonne of Zephaniáh 11 Take euen siluer and golde and make crownes and set them vpon the head of Iehoshúa the sonne of Iehozadak the hie Priest 12 And speake vnto him saying Thus speaketh the Lord of hostes and saith Beholde the man whose name is the Branche and he shal growe vp out of his place and he shal buylde the Temple of the Lord. 13 Euen he shal buylde the TeÌple of the Lord and he shal be are the glorie and shal sit and rule vpon his throne and he shal be a Priest vpon his throne and the counsel of peace shal be betwene them bothe 14 And the crownes shal be to Helém and to ãâã and to Iedaiah and to Hen the sonne of Zephaniah for a memorial in the Temple of the Lord. 15 And thei that are farre of shal come and buylde in the Temple of the Lord and ye shal knowe that the Lord of hostes hathe sent me vnto you And thys shall come to passe if ye will obey the voyce of the Lord your God CHAP. VII 5 The true fasting ãâã The rebellion of the people is the cause of their affliction 1 ANd in the fourth yere of King Darius the worde of the Lord came vnto Zechariáh in the fourth day of the ninth moneth euen in Chisleu 2 For thei had sent vnto the house of God Sharézer and Regem mélech and their men to praye before the Lord. 3 And to speake vnto the Priestes whiche were in the House of the Lord of hostes to the Prophetes saying Shuld I wepe in the fifte moneth and separate my self as I haue done these so manie yeres 4 Then came the worde of the Lord of hostes vnto me saying 5 Speake vnto all the people of the land to the Priests and say When ye fasted and mourned in the fifte and seuenth moneth euen these seuentie yeres did ye fast vnto me do I approue it 6 And when ye did eate and when ye did drinke did ye not eat for your selues and drinke for your selues 7 Shulde ye not heare the wordes whiche the Lord hathe cryed by the ministerie of the former Prophetes when Ierusalém was inhabited and in prosperitie the cities thereof rounde about her when the South and the plaine was inhabited 8 And the worde of the Lord came vnto Zechariáh saying 9 Thus speaketh the Lord of hostes saying Execute ãâã iudgement and she we mercie and compassion euerie man to his brother 10 And oppresse not the widowe nor the fatherles the stranger nor the poore and let none of you imagine euil against his brother in your heart 11 But they refused to hearken and pulled away the shulder and stopped their eares that they shulde not heare 12 Yea thei made their hearts as an adamaÌt stone lest they shulde heare the Lawe and the wordes which the Lord of hostes sent in his Spirit by the ministerie of the former Prophetes therefore came a greate wrath from the Lord of hostes 13 Therefore it is come to passe that as he cryed and they wolde not heare so they cryed and I wold not heare saith the Lord of hostes 14 But I scattered them among all nations whome they knewe not thus the land was desolate after them that no man passeth through nor returned for they laid the pleasant land waste CHAP. VIII 2 Of the returne of the people vnto Ierusalém and of the mercie of God towarde theÌ 16 Of good workes 20 The calling of the Gentiles 1 AGaine the worde of the Lord of hostes came to me saying 2 Thus saith the Lord of hostes I was ielous for Zión with greatielousie and I was ielous for her with great wrath 3 Thus saith the Lord I wil returne vnto Zión and wildwell in the middes of Ierusa lém and Ierusalém shal be called a citie of trueth and the mountaine of the Lord of hostes the holie Mountaine 4 Thus saith the Lord of hostes There shal yet olde men and olde women dwellin the stretes of Ierusalém and euerie man with his staffe in his hand for very age 5 And the stretes of the citie shal be ful of boyes and girles playing in the stretes the reof 6 Thus saith the Lord of hostes Thoght it be vnpossible in the eyes of the remnant of this people in these dayes shulde it therefore be vnpossible in my sight saith the Lord of hostes 7 Thus saith the Lord of hostes Beholde I wil deliuer my
he answered me and said Stand vp vppon thy fete and heare a mightie sounding voyce 14 There shal come as an earth quake but the place where thou staÌdest shal not be moued 15 And therefore when he speaketh be not afrayed for of the end shal be the worde and of the fundacion of the earth shal it be vnder stand 16 Therefore while one speaketh of them it trembleth and is moued for it knoweth that it must be changed at the end 17 And when I had heard it I stode vp vpoÌ my fete and hearkened and beholde there was a voyce that spake and the sounde of it was like the sounde of many waters 18 And it said Beholde the dayes come that I wil come and in quire of them that dwel vpoÌ the earth 19 And when I beginne to inquire of theeÌ who by their vnrighteousnes haue hurt others and when the affliction of Sion shal be fulfilled 20 And the worlde that shal vanish away shal be sealed then wil I shewe these signes the bokes shal be opened before the heauen they shal se all it together 21 And the children of a yere olde shal speake with their voices the women with child shal bring forthe vntimelie childreÌ of thre or fou re moneths olde and they shal liue that are raised vp 22 Then suddenly shal the sowen places appea re as the vnsowne and the sul store houses shal suddenly be founde emptie 23 And the trumpet shal sounde and all they that heare it shal be suddenly afrayed 24 At that time shal friends fight with friends as with enemies and the earth shal feare with them the springs of the welles shal stand stil and in thre houres they shal not renne 25 Whosoeuer remaineth from all these things that I haue tolde thee shal be saued and se my saluacion the end of your worlde 26 And the men that are receiued shalse it thei that haue not tasted death from their birth and the heart of the inhabitants shal be chaÌged and turned to another meaning 27 For euil shal be put out and disceate shal be quenched 28 But faith shal flourish corruption shal be ouercome and the trueth which hathe bene so long without frute shal come forthe 29 ¶ And when he talked with me beholde I loked alitle vpoÌ him before whome I stode 30 And these wordes said he vnto me I am come to she we thee the time of the night to come 31 If thou wilt pray againe and fast seuen daies more I wil tel thee more things and greater then these which I haue heard in the day 32 For thy voyce is heard before the Highest surely the mightie hathe sene thy righteous dealing he hathe sene also thy chastitie whi che thou hast kept since thy youth 33 Therefore hathe he sent me to shewe thee all these things and to say vnto thee Be of good comfort and feare not 34 And haste not in the vaine consideration of the first times nor make haste to the latter times 35 And after this I wepte againe and fasted seuen dayes in like maner that I might fulfil the thre wekes which he had appointed me 36 And in the eight night was mine heart vexed within me againe and I began to speake before the moste High 37 For my spirit was greatly set on fyer my soule was in distresse 38 And I said ô Lord thou speakest expresly in the first creation euen the first day and coÌman dedst * that the heauen and the earth shulde be made and the worke followed thy worde 39 And theÌ was there the spirit and the darknes was on euerie side with silence there was no mans voyce as yet created of thee 40 Then commandedst thou a bright light to come forthe out of thy treasures that it might giue light to thy worke 41 VpoÌ the second day thou createdst the hea uenlie ayre and commandedst it that going betwene it shulde make a diuision betwene the waters that the one parte might remaine aboue and the other beneth 42 Vpon the third day thou coÌmandedst that the waters shulde be gathered together in the seuenth parte of the earth six partes didest thou drye and kept them to the intent that of these there shuld be that shulde serue thee being sowen of God and tilled 43 Assone as thy worde went forthe the wor ke was in continently made 44 For immediatly great and innumerable fau te did spring vp and manie diuerse pleasures for the taste and floures of vnchangeable co lour and odours of a moste wondersul smel and these things were created the third day 45 * Vpon the fourth daythou createdst the light of the sunne and of the moone and the order of the startes 46 And gauest them a charge to do * seruice euen vnto man that was for to be made 47 And vpon the fift day thou saidest vnto the seuenth parte * where the waters were gathe red that it shulde bring forthe beasts as foules and fishes and it was so 48 For the domme waters and without life broght forthe liuing things at the commandemeÌt of God that the nations might praise thy wonderous workes 49 TheÌ didest thou prepare two liuing things the one thou calledst Behemoth the other thou calledst Leuiathan 50 And didest separate the one from the other for the seuenth parte where the water was gathered colde not holde them 51 Vnto Behemoth thou gauest one parte whi che was dryed vp the third day that he shuld dwell in the same parte wherein are a thousand hilles 52 But vnto Leuiathan thou gauest the seuenth parte that is wett and hast prepared him to deuoure what thou wilt and when thou wilt 53 Vpon the sixt day thou gauest commandemeÌt vnto the earth that before thee it shulde bring forthe beasts catel and creping things 54 And besides this Adam whome thou madest lord ouer all the workes which thou hast created of him come we all and the people also whome thou hast chosen 55 All this haue I spoken before thee ô Lord because thou hast created the world for our sakes 56 As for the other people which also come of Adam thou hast declared them that they are nothing before thee but be like vnto spitle and hast compared their riches vnto a drop that falleth from a vessel 57 And now ô Lord beholde these heathen which haue bene reputed as nothing haue begonne to be lords ouer vs and to deuoure vs. 58 And we thy people whome thou hast called the first borne the onely begotten and thy feruent louer are giuen into their hands 59 If the worlde then be created for our sakes why haue we not the inheritance thereof in possession or how long shal we suffer these things CHAP. VII 5 Without tribulation none can come to felicitie 1 God ad uertiseth all in time 28 The coming and death of Christ 32 The resurrection and last iudgemeÌt 43 After the whiche all corruption shal cease 48 All fell in
he had zeale in the feare of the Lord and stode vp with good courage of heart when the people were turned backe and made reconciliation for ãâã 24 Therefore was there a couenant of peace made with him that he shulde be the chief of the Sanctuarie and of his people and that he and his posteritie shulde haue the dignitie of the priesthode for euer 25 And according to the couenant made with Dauid that the inheritance of the king do me shulde remaine to his sonne of the tribe of Iuda so the heritage of Aaron shuld be to the onelie sonne of his sonne and to his sede God giue vs wisdome in our heart to iudge his people in righteousnes that the good things that they haue be not abolished and that their glorie may endure for their posteritie CHAP. XLVI The praise of Iosue Caleb and Samuel 1 IEsus * the sonne of Naue was valiant in the warres was the successour of Moy ses in prophecies who according vnto his name was a great sauiour of the elect of God to take vengeaÌce of the enemies that rose vp against them and to set Israél in their in heritance 2 * What glorie gate he when he lift vp his hand and drewe out his sworde against the cities 3 Who was there before him like to him for he foght the battels of the Lord. 4 * Stode not the sunne stil by his meanes and one day was as long astwo 5 He called vnto the moste high Gouernour when the enemies preased vpoÌ him on eue rie side the mightie Lord heard him with the haile stones and with ãâã power 6 He rushed in vpoÌ the nacions in battel and in the * going downe of Bethoron he destroied the aduersaries that they might knowe his weapons and that he foght in the sight of the Lord for he followed the Almightie 7 * In the time of Moyses also he did a good worke he and Caleb the sonne of Iephu ne stode against the enemie and with helde the people from sinne and appeased the wicked murmuring 8 * And of six hundreth thousand people of fote they two were preserued to bring theÌ into the heritage euen into the land that floweth with milke and honey 9 * The Lord gaue strength also vnto Caleb which remained with him vnto his olde age so that he went vp into the high places of the land and his sede obteined it for an heritage 10 That all the children of Israél might se that it is good to follow the Lord. 11 Concerning the Iudges euerie one by name whose heart weÌt not a whoring nor departed from the Lord their memorie be blessed 12 Let * their bones florish out of their place and their name by succession remaine to them that are moste famous of their chil dren 13 ¶ Samuel the Prophet of the Lord beloued of his Lord * ordeined Kings and anointed the princes ouer his people 14 By the Lawe of the Lord he iudged the coÌ gregacion and the Lord hast respect vnto Iacob 15 This Prophete was approued for his faith fulnes and he was knowen faithful in his wordes and visions 16 * He called vpoÌ the Lord almightie when his enemies preased vpon him on euerie side when he offred the sucking lambe 17 And the Lord thondred from heauen made his voyce to be heard with a great noyce 18 So he discomfited the princes of the Tyrians and all the rulers of the Philistims 19 * And before his long ãâã he made protestacion in the sight of the Lord and his anointed that he toke no substance of any man no not so muche as a shooe and no man colde accuse him 20 * After his slepe also he tolde of the Kings death and from the earth lift he vp his voy ce and prophecied that the wickednes of the people shulde perish CHAP. XLVII The praise of Nathan Dauid and Salomon 1 AFter him rose vp * Nathan to prophe cie in the time of Dauid 2 For as the fat is taken away from the peace offring so was Dauid chosen out of the children of Israél 3 * He plaied with the lions as with kiddes and with beares as with lambes 4 * Slewe he not a gyante when he was yet but yong and toke away the rebuke from the people when he lift vp his hand with the stone in the sling to beat downe the pride of Goliah 5 For he called vpon the moste high Lord which gaue him streÌgth in his right hand to slay that mightie warriour that he might set vp the horne of his people againe 6 * So he gaue him the praise of ten thousand and honored him with great praises and gaue him a crowne of glorie 7 * For he destroied the enemies on euerie side and rooted out the Philistims his aduersaries and brake their horne in sunder vnto this day 8 In all his workes he praised the Holy one and the moste High with honorable wordes with his whole heart he sung songs and loued him that made him 9 * He set singers also before the altar and according to their tune he made swete songs that they might praise God daily with songs 10 He ordeined to kepe the feast daies comely and appointed the times perfitely that they might praise the holy Name of God and make the TeÌple to sounde in the morning 11 * The Lord toke away his sinnes and exalted his horne for euer he gaue him the couenant of the kingdome and the throne of glorie in Israél 12 After him rose vp a wise sonne who by him dwelt in a large possession 13 * Salomon reigned in a peaceable time and was glorious for God made all quiet rounde about that he might buyld an house in his Name and prepare the Sanctuarie for euer 14 * How wise wast thou in thy youth wast filled with vnderstaÌding as with a flood 15 Thy minde couered the whole earth and hathe filled it with graue and darke senten ces 16 Thy Name went abroade in the yles and for thy peace thou wast beloued 17 * The countreie marueiled at thee for thy songs and prouerbes and similitudes and in terpretations 18 By the Name of the Lord God which is called the God of Israél thou hast * gathered golde as tinne and hast had as muche siluer as lead 19 * Thou didest bowe thy loines to women and wast ouercome by thy bodie 20 Thou didest staine thine honour and hast defiled thy posteritie hast broght wrath vpon thy children and hast felt soro we for thy folie 21 * So the kingdome was deuided and Ephraim begaÌ to be a rebellious kingdome 22 * Neuertheles the Lord left not of his mer cie nether was he destroied for his workes nether did he abolish the posteritie of his elect nor toke a
all in our innocencie the heauen and earth shal testifie for vs that ye destroy vs wrongfully 38 Thus thei gaue theÌ the battel vpon the Sabbath and slewe bothe men and cattel their wiues and their children to the nomber of a thousand people 39 ¶ When Mattathias and his friends vnderstode this thei mourned for them greatly 40 And said one to another If we all do as our brethreÌ haue done and fight not against the heathen for our liues and for our Lawes theÌ shal thei incontinently destroy vs out of the earth 41 Therefore they concluded at the same time saying Whosoeuer shal come to make battel with vs vpon the Sabbath daye we wil fight against him that we dye not all as our brethren that were murthered in the secret places 42 Then came vnto them the assemblie of the Asideans which were of the strongest men of Israél all suche as were wel minded toward the Law 43 And all they that were fled for persecucion ioyned them selues vnto them and were an helpe vnto them 44 So they gathered a power and smote the wicked men in their wrath and thevngodlie in their angre but the rest fled vnto the heathen and escaped 45 Then Mattathias and his friends weÌt about and destroyed the altars 46 And circumcised the children by force that were vn circumcised as manie as they fouÌde within the coasts of Israél 47 And they pursued after the proude men this acte prospered in their hands 48 So they recouered the Law of the hand of the Gentiles and out of the hand of Kings and gaue not place to the wicked 49 Now when the time drewe nere that Mattathias shulde dye he said vnto his sonnes Now is pride and persecucion increased the time of destruction and the wrath of indignacion 50 Now therefore my sonnes be ye zealous of the Law and giue your liues for the couenant of our fathers 51 Call to remembrance what actes our Fathers did in their time so shall ye receyue great honour and an euerlasting name 52 * Was not Abraham founde faithful in teÌtacion and it was imputed vnto hym for righteousnes 53 * Ioseph in the time of his trouble kept the commandement and was made the Lord of Egypt 54 * Phinees our father because he was zealous and feruent obteined the couenaÌt of the euerlasting priesthode 55 * Iesus for fulfilling the worde was made the gouernour of Israel 56 * Caleb because he bare witnes before the congregacion receiued the heritage of the land 57 * Dauid because of hys mercie obteyned the throne of the kingdome for euermore 58 * Elias because he was zealous and ferueÌt in the Law was taken vp euen vnto heaueÌ 59 * Ananias Azarias and Misael by theyr faith were deliuered out of the flame 60 * Daniel because of his innocencie was deliuered from the mouth of the lyons 61 And thus ye maye consider thorowe out all ages that whosoeuer put their truste in him shal not want strength 62 Feare not ye then the wordes of a sinfull maÌ for his glorie is but dongue wormes 63 To day is he set vp and to morow he shall not be found for he is turned into his dust and his purpose perisheth 64 Wherefore my sonnes take good hearts and shewe your selues men for the Law for by it shal you obteine glorie 65 And beholde I knowe that your brother Simon is a man of counsell gyue eare vnto him alway he shal be a father vnto you 66 And Iudas Maccabeus hathe bene mightie and strong euen from his youth vp let him be your captaine and fight you the battel for the people 67 Thus shal ye bring vnto you all those that obserue the Law and shal aduenge the iniuries of your people 68 Recompense fully the heathen and giue your selues to the commandement of the Law 69 So he blessed them and was laied with his fathers 70 And dyed in the hundreth fortye and six yere and his sonnes buryed him in his Fathers sepulchre at Modin and all Israel made great lamentacion for him CHAP. III. 1 Iudas is made ruler ouer the Iewes 11 He killeth Apollonius and Seron the princes of Syria 44 The considence of Iudas towarde God 55 Iudas determineth to fight against Lysias whome Antiochus had made captaine ouer his hoste 1 THen Iudas his sonne called Maccabeus rose vp in his place 2 And all his brethren helped him and all they that helde with his father and foght with courage the battel of Israel 3 So he gate his people great honour he put on a brestplate as a gyant and armed him self and set the battel in array and defended the campe with the sworde 4 In his actes he was like a lyon and as a lyons whelpe roaring after the pray 5 For he pursued the wicked and soght theÌ out and burnt vp those that vexed his people 6 So that the wicked fled for feare of him all the workers of iniquitie were put to trouble saluacion prospered in his hand 7 And he grieued diuers Kings but Iacob reioyced by his actes and his memorial is blessed for euer 8 He went also thorowe the cities of Iuda and destroyed the wicked out of them and turned away the wrath from Israel 9 So was he renoumed vnto the ends of the earth he assembled together those that were readie to perish 10 ¶ But Apollonius gathered the Gentiles and a great hoste out of Samaria to fight against Israel 11 Whiche when Iudas perceiued he went forthe to mete him and smote him and slue him so that many fel downe slaine and the rest fled 12 So Iudas toke their spoiles and toke also Apollonius sworde and foght with it all his life long 13 ¶ Now wheÌ Seron a prince of the armie of Syria ãâã that Iudas had gathered vnto him the congregacion and Churche of the faithfull and went forthe to the warre 14 He said I will get me a name and will be glorious in the realme for I will go sight with Iudas theÌ that are with him which haue despised the Kings commandement 15 So he made him readie to go vp and there went with him a mightie hoste of the vngodlie to helpe him and to be aduenged of the children of Israel 16 And wheÌ he came nere to the going vp of Bethoron Iudas went forthe to met him with a smale companie 17 But when they sawe the armie coming against them they said to Iudas How are we able being so fewe to fight agaiÌst so great a multitude and so strong seyng we be so wearie and haue fasted all this day 18 Then said Iudas It is an easie thing for many to be shut vp in the hands of fewe there is no difference before the God of heauen to deliuer by a great multitude or by a smale companie 19 For the victorie of the battel staÌdeth not in the multitude of the hoste but the streÌgth cometh from
Peter and Iohn and Iames and went vp into a mountaine to pray 29 And as he prayed the facion of his countenarice was chaÌged his garmeÌt was white and glistered 30 And beholde two men talked with him which were Moses and Elias 31 Which appeared in glorie and tolde of his departing which he shulde accomplish at Ierusalem 32 But Peter and they that were with him were heauie with slepe and when they awooke they sawe his glorie the two men standing with him 33 And it came to passe as they departed from him Peter said vnto Iesus Master it is good for vs to be here let vs therefore make thre tabernacles one for thee and one for Moses and one for Elias and wist not what he said 34 While he thus spake there came a cloude and ouershadowed them and they feared when these were entring into the cloude 35 * And there came a voyce out of the cloude saying This is my beloued Sonne heare him 36 And when the voyce was past Iesus was founde alone and they kept it close and tol de no maÌ in those dayes any of those things which they had sene 37 ¶ And it came to passe on the next day as they came downe from the mountaine muche people met him 38 * And beholde a man of the coÌpanie cryed out saying Master I beseche thee beholde my sonne for he is all that I haue 39 And lo a spirit taketh him and suddenly he cryeth and he teareth him that he fometh and with muche paine departeth from him when he hathe bruised him 40 Now I haue besoght thy disciples to cast him out but they colde not 41 Then Iesus answered and said O generacion faithles and croked how long now shall be with you and suffer you bring thy sonne hither 42 And whiles he was yet comming the deuil rent him and ãâã him aÌd Iesus rebuk ed the vncleane spirit and healed the childe and ãâã liuered him to his father 43 ¶ And thei were all amased at the mightie power of God and while thei all wondred at all things which Iesus did he said vnto his disciples 44 Marke these wordes diligently for it shal come to passe that the Sonne of man shal be deliuered into the hands of men 45 But they vnderstode not that worde for it was hid from them so that they colde not perceiue it and they feared to aske him of that worde 46 ¶ * Then there arose a disputacion among them which of them shulde be the greatest 47 When Iesus sawe the thoghts of their hearts he toke a litle childe and set him by him 48 And said vnto them Whosoeuer receiueth this litle childe in my Name receiueth me and whosoeuer shal receiue me receiueth him that sent me for he that is least among you all he shal be great 49 ¶ * And Iohn answered and said Master we sawe one casting out deuils in thy Name and we forbade him becausehe followeth thee not with vs. 50 Then Iesus said vnto him Forbid ye him not for he that is not against vs is with vs. 51 ¶ And it came to passe wheÌ the dayes were accomplished that he shulde be receiued vp he setteled him self fully to go to Ierusalem 52 And sent messengers before him and they went and entred into a towne of the Samaritans to prepare him lodging 53 But they wolde not receiue him because his behauiour was as thogh he wolde go to Ierusalem 54 And when his disciples Iames and Iohn sawe it they said Lord wilt thou that we coÌmande that fyre come downe from heauen and consume them euen as * Elias did 55 But Iesus turned about and rebuked them said Ye knowe not of what spirit ye are 56 * For the Sonne of man is not come to destroye mens liues but to saue theÌ Then they ãâã to another towne 57 ¶ And it came to passe that as they went in the way a certeine man said vnto him I wil followe thee Lord whethersoeuer thou goest 58 And Iesus said vnto him The foxes haue holes and the birdes of the heauen haue nestes but the Sonne of man hathe not whereon to laie his head 59 But he said vnto another Followe me And the same said Lord suffer me first to go and burye my father 60 And Iesus said vnto him Let the dead burye their dead but go thou and preache the kingdome of God 61 Then another said I wil followethee Lord but let me first go bid them fare wel which are at mine house 62 And Iesus said vnto him No man that putteth his hand to the plough and loketh backe is apte to the kingdome of God CHAP. X. 1 He sendeth the seuentie before him to preache and giueth them a charge how to behaue them selues 13 He threateneth the obstinate 21 He giueth thankes to his heaueÌhe Father 25 He answereth the Scribe that teÌpted him 33 And by the example of the ãâã sheweth who is a mans neighbour 38 Martha receiueth the Lord into her house 40 Marie is feruent in hearing his worde 1 AFter* these things the Lord appointed other seuentie also aÌd sent them two two before him into euerie citie and place whether he him self shulde come 2 And he said vnto them * The haruest is great but the laborers are fewe pray therefore the Lord of the haruest to send forthe laborers into his haruest 3 * Go your waies beholde I send you forthe as lambs among wolues 4 Beare no bagge nether scryp nor shoes * aÌd salute no man by the ãâã 5 * And into what soeuer houseye enter first say Peace be to this house 6 And if the sonne of peace be there your peace shal rest vpon him if not it shal turne to you againe 7 And in that house tarie stil eating and drinking suche things as by them shal be set before you * for the laborer is worthie of his wages Go not from house to house 8 But into what soeuer citie ye shal enter if they receiue you eat suche things as are set before you 9 And heale the sicke that are there and say vnto them The kingdome of God is come nere vnto you 10 But into whatsoeuer citie ye shal enter if they wil not receiue you go your waies out into the stretes of the same and say 11 Euen the verie * dust which cleaueth on vs of your citie we wipe of against you not with standing know this that they kingdome of God was come nere vnto you 12 For I say to you that it shal be easier in that day for them of Sodom then for that citie 13 * Wo be to thee Chorazin wo be to thee Beth-saida for if the miracles had bene done in Tyrus and Sidon which haue bene done in you
Iesus of Nazaret the sonne of Ioseph 46 Then Nathanael said vnto him Can there any good thing come out of Nazaret Philippe said to him Come and se. 47 Iesus sawe Nathanael coming to him and said of him Beholde in dede an Israelite in whome is no guile 48 Nathanael said vnto him Whence knewest thou me Iesus answered and said vnto him Before that Philippe called thee when thou wast vnder the figge tre I sawe thee 49 Nathanael answered said vnto him Rabbi thou art the Sonne of God thou art the King of Israel 50 Iesus answered and said vnto him Because I said vnto thee I sawe thee vnder the figge tre beleuest thou thou shalt se greater things then these 51 And he said vnto him Verely verely I say vnto you hereafter shal ye se heauen open and the Angels of God * ascending and descending vpon the Sonne of man CHAP. II. 8 Christ turneth the water into wine 14 He driueth the byers and sellers out of the Temple 19 He forewarneth his death and resurrection 23 He conuerteth many and distrusteth man 1 ANd the thirde day was there a mariage in Cana a towne of Galile and the mother of Iesus was there 2 And Iesus was called also and his disciples vnto the mariage 3 Now wheÌ the wine failed the mother of Iesus said vnto him They haue no wine 4 Iesus said vnto her Woman what haue I to do with thee mine houre is not yet come 5 His mother said vnto the seruants Whatsoeuer he saith vnto you do it 6 And there were set there six waterpottes of stone after the maner of the purifying of the Iewes conteining two or thre firkins a piece 7 And Iesus said vnto theÌ Fil the waterpottes with water Then they filled them vpto the brim 8 Then he said vnto them Drawe out now beare vnto the gouernour of the feast So they bare it 9 Now when the gouernour of the feast had tasted the water that was made wine for he knewe not whence it was but the seruants whiche drewe the water knewe the gouernour of the feast called the bridegrome 10 And said vnto him All men at the beginning set forthe good wine when men haue wel drunke then that which is worse but thou hast kept backe the good wine vntil now 11 This beginning of miracles did Iesus in Cana at owne of Galile and shewed for the his glorie and his disciples beleued on him 12 After that he went downe into Capernaum he and his mother and his brethren and his disciples but they continued not manie dayes there 13 For the Iewes Passeouer was at hand There fore Iesus went vp to Ierusalem 14 * And he founde in the Temple those that solde oxen and shepe and doues and changers of money sitting there 15 Then he made a scourge of smale cordes draue them all out of the Temple with the shepe and oxen and powred out the changers money and ouerthrewe the tables 16 And said vnto them that solde doues Take these things hence make not my Fathers house an house of marchandise 17 And his disciples remembred that it was written * The zeale of thine house hathe eaten me vp 18 Then answered the Iewes and said vnto him What signe shewest thou vnto vs that thou doest these things 19 Iesus answered and said vnto them * Destroye this teÌple and in thre dayes I wil raise it vp againe 20 Then said the Iewes Fortie and six yeres was this Temple a buylding and wilt thou reare it vp in thre dayes 21 But he spake of the temple of his bodie 22 Assone therefore as he was risen from the dead his disciples remembred that he thus said vnto them and they beleued the Scriptu re and the worde which Iesus had said 23 Now when he was at Ierusalem at the Passeouer in the feast many beleued in his Name wheÌ they sawe his miracles which he did 24 But Iesus did not commit him self vnto theÌ because he knewe them all 25 And had no nede that any shulde testifie of man for he knewe what was in man CHAP. III. 3 Christ instructeth Nichodemus in the regeneratioÌ 15 Of faith 16 Of the loue of God towards the worde 23 The doctrine and baptisme of Iohn 28 And the witnes that he beareth of Christ. 1 THere was now a man of the Pharises named Nicodemus a ruler of the Iewes 2 He came to Iesus by night and said vnto him Rabbi we knowe that thou art a teacher come from God for no man colde do these miracles that thou doest except God were with him 3 Iesus answered and said vnto him Verely verely I say vnto thee except a man be borne againe he can not se the kingdome of God 4 Nichodemus said vnto him How can a man be borne which is olde can he enter into his mothers wombe againe and be borne 5 Iesus answered Verely verely I say vnto thee except that a man be borne of water and of the Spirit he can not enter into the kingdome of God 6 That which is borne of the flesh is flesh and that that is borne of the Spirit is spirit 7 Marueile not that I said to thee Ye must be borne againe 8 The winde bloweth where it listeth and thou he arest the souÌde there of but canst not tel whence it cometh and whether it goeth so is euerie man that is borne of the Spirit 9 Nicodemus answered said vnto him How can these things be 10 Iesus answered and said vnto him Art thou a teacher of Israel and knowest no these things 11 Verely verely I say vnto thee we speake that we knewe testifie that we haue sene but ye receiue not our witnes 12 If when I tel you earthlie things ye beleue not how shulde ye beleue if I shal tell you of heauenlie things 13 For no man ascendeth vp to heauen but he that hathe descended from heauen the SoÌne of man which is in heauen 14 * And as Moses lift vp the serpent in the wil dernes so must the SoÌne of man be lift vp 15 That whosoeuer beleueth in him shuld not perish but haue eternal life 16 * For God so loued the worlde that he hath giuen his onely begotten SoÌne that whosoeuer beleueth in him shulde not perish but haue euerlasting life 17 * For God sent not his SoÌne into the worlde that he shulde condemne the worlde but that the worlde through him might be saued 18 He that beleueth in him shal not be condem ned but he that beleueth not is condemned already because he beleueth not in the Name of the onely begotten Sonne of God 19 * And this in the condemnation that light is come into the worlde and men loued darkenes rather then light because their dedes were euil 20 For
there two dayes 41 And manie mo beleued because of his owne worde 42 And thei said vnto the woman Now we beleue not because of thy saying for we haue heard him our selues and knowe that this is in dede the Christ the Sauiour of the worlde 43 ¶ So two dayes after he departed thence and went into Galile 44 For Iesus him self had* testified that a Prophet hathe none honour in his owne conntrey 45 Then when he was come into Galile the Galileans receiued him which had sene all the things that he did at Ierusalem at the feast for they went also vnto the feast 46 And Iesus came againe into* Cana a towne of Galile where he had made of water wine And there was a certeine ruler whose sonne was sicke at Capernaum 47 When he heard that Iesus was come out of Iudea into Galile he went vnto him and besoght him that he wolde go downe heale his sonne for he was euen ready to dye 48 Then said Iesus vnto him Except ye se signes and wonders ye wil not beleue 49 The ruler said vnto him Sir go downe before my sonne dye 50 Iesus said vnto him Go thy way thy sonne liueth and the man beleued the worde that Iesus had spoken vnto him and went his way 51 And as he was now going downe his seruants met him saying Thy sonne liueth 52 Then enquired he of them the houre when he began to amende And they said vnto him Y esterday the seuenth houre the feuer left him 53 Then the father knewe that it was the same houre in the which Iesus had said vnto him Thy sonne liueth And he beleued and all his houshold 54 This seconde miracle did Iesus againe after he was come out of Iudea into Galile CHAP. V. 8 He healeth the man that was sicke eight and thirtie yeres 10 The Iewes accuse him 19. Christ answereth for him self and reproueth them 32 Shewing by the testimo nie of his Father 33. Of Iohn 36 Of his workes 39 And of the Scriptures who he is 1 AFter* that there was a feast of the Iewes and Iesus went vp to Ierusalem 2 And there is at Ierusalem by the place of the shepe a poole called in Ebrewe Bethesda hauing fiue porches 3 In the which lay a great multitude of sicke folke of blinde halte and withered waiting for the mouing of the water 4 For an Angel went downe at a certeine season into the poole and troubled the water whosoeuer then first after the stirring of the water stepped in was made whole of what soeuer disease he had 5 And a certeine man was there which had be ne diseased eight and thirtie yeres 6 When Iesus sawe him lie and knewe that he now loÌg time had bene diseased he said vnto him Wilt thou be made whole 7 The sicke man answered him Sir I haue no man when the water is troubled to put me into the poole but while I am comming another steppeth downe before me 8 Iesus said vnto him Rise take vp thy bed and walke 9 And immediatly the man was made whole and toke vp his bed and walked the same day was the Sabbath 10 The Iewes therefore said to him that was made whole It is the Sabbath day * it is not lawful forthee to carie thy bed 11 He answered them He that made me whole he said vnto me Take vp thy hed and walke 12 Then asked they him What man is that whiche said vnto thee Take vp thy bed and walke 13 And he that was healed knewe not who it was for Iesus had conueyed him self away from the multitude that was in that place 14 And after that Iesus founde him in the TeÌple and said vnto him Beholde thou art ãâã whole sinne no more lest a worse thing come vnto thee 15 ¶ The man departed and tolde the Iewes that it was Iesus which had made him whole 16 And therefore the Iewes did persecute Iesus soght to slay him because he had done these things on the Sabbath day 17 But Iesus answered them My Father worketh hitherto and I worke 18 Therefore the Iewes soght the more to kil him not onely because he had broken the Sabbath but said also that God was his Father and made him self equal with God 19 Then answered Iesus and said vnto them Verely verely I say vnto you The Sonne can do nothing of him self saue that he seeth the Father do for whatsoeuer things he doeth the same things doeth the Sonne also 20 For the Father loueth the Sonne and sheweth him all things whatsoeuer he him self doeth and he wil shewe him greater workes then these that ye shulde marueile 21 For likewise as the Father raiseth vp the dead and quickeneth them so the Sonne quickencth whome he wil. 22 For the Father iudgeth no man but hathe committed all iudgement vnto the Sonne 23 Because that almen shulde honour the Son ne as they honour the Father he that honoreth not the Sonne the same honoreth not the Father which hathe sent him 24 Verely verely I say vnto you he that heareth my word and beleueth in hym that sent me hathe euerlasting life and shal not come into condemnacion but hathe passed frome death vnto life 25 Verely verely I saye vnto you the houre shall come and nowe is when the dead shall heare the voyce of the Sonne of GOD and they that heare it shal liue 26 For as the Father hathe life in him self so like wise hathe he giuen to the Sonne to haue life in him self 27 And hathe giuen him power also to execute iudgement in that he is the Sonne of man 28 Marueile not at thys forthe houre shall come in the which all that are in the graues shal heare his voyce 29 And they shall come forthe * that haue done good vnto the resurrection of ãâã but they that haue done euill vnto the resurrection of condemnacion 30 I can do nothyng of mine owne selfe as I heare I iudge and my indgement is iust because I seke not mine owne wil but the will of the Father who hathe sent me 31 If I * shulde beare witnes of my life my witnes were not true 32 There is another that beareth witnes of me and I knowe that the witnes whiche he beareth of me is true 33 * Ye sent vnto Iohn and he bare witnes vnto the trueth 34 But I receyue not the recorde of man neuertheles these thyngs I saye that ye might be saued 35 He was a burnyng and a shinyng candle and ye wolde for a season haue ãâã in his light 36 But I haue greater witnes then the witnes of Iohn for the workes whiche the Father that hathe giuen me to finish the same workes that I do beare witnes of me that the Father sent me 37 And the * Father hym selfe whiche hathe sent me
wast yong thou girdedst thy selfe and walkedst whither thou woldest but when thou shalt be olde thou shalt stretch forthe thine haÌds another shal girde thee lead thee THE DESCRIPTION OF THE COVNTREIS AND PLACES MENCIONED IN THE ACTES OF THE APOSTLES FROM Italie on the VVest parte vnto the Medes and Persians tovvardes the East conteining about 2200. mile in length The vvhich description serueth for the peregrination of S. Paul and other of the Apostles and for the vnderstanding of manie things conteined in this boke The names of the yles and countreis mencioned in this mappe Achaia Arabia the deserte Arabia the stonie Armenia Asia the lesse By thinia Cappadocia Chios yle Cilicia Chaldea Clauda yle Coos yle Creta or Candia yle Cyprus Galatia Grecia ãâã Illyria or Sclauonie Iudea ãâã boysyle Lycaonia Lycia Maliayle Macedonia Mysia Media Pamphilia Persia. Ponthus Phenicia Pisidia Phrygia Rhodesyle Samos yle Samothraciayle Siciliayle Syria The Tovvnes specified in this mappe and their situation vvith the obseruation of the length and breadth Amphipolis 50. 0. 41. 30. Antiochia of Syria 70. ãâã 37. 20. Antiochia of Pisidia 62 30. 39. 0. Appollonia 49. 30. 40. 30. Assos 56. 0. 40. 15. Athenes 52. 45. 37. 15. Attalia 62. 15. 36. 30. Babylon 79. 0. 35. 0. Beroe 48. 45. 39. 50. Cenchrea hauen 51. 20. 37. 0. Cesarea Straton 66. 16. 32. 25. Charram 73. 55. 37. 10. Corinthus 51. 15. 36. 55. Damascus 68. 55. 33. 0. Derbe 64. 20. 38. 15. Ephesus 57. 40. 37. 40. Fayre hauens 56. 46. 35. 10. Gaza 65. 10. 31. 40. Gnidum 57. 10. 35. 30. Iconium 64. 30. 38. 45. Ierusalem 66. 0. 31. 55. Ioppe 66. 40. 31. 55. Laodicea 68. 30. 35. 5. Lystri 64. 0. 39. 0. Miletum 58. 0. 37. 0. Myra 61. 36. 40. 0. Mytilene 55. 0. 35. 0. Neapolis 51. 15. 41. 40. Paphos in Cyprus 65. 0. 36. 0. Patara 60. 30. 36. 0. Perge 62. 15. 36. 56. Phenix an hauen 53. 45. 34. 20. Philip 50. 45. 41. 46. Ptolemais 66. 50. 32. 58. Puteoli 39. 50. 41. 0. Rhegium 40. 0. 39. 0. Rome 56. 40. 41. 40. Salamine yle of Cyprus 66. 40. 35. 30. Samaria 66. 20. 32. 19. Seleucia 68. 35. 25. 40. Sidon 67. 15. 33. 30. Syracuse 39. 30. 37. 15. Tarsus 67. 40. 36. 50. Thessalonica 49. 50. 40. 30. Troas 55. 0. 41. 0. Tyrus 67. 3. 33. 20. NORTH WEST EAST SOVTH whither thou woldest not 19 And this spake he signifying by what death he shulde glorifie God And when he had said this he said to him Followe me 20 Then Peter turned about and sawe the disciple whome IESVS loued following which had also * leaned on his brest at supper had said Lord which is he that betrayeth thee 21 When Peter therefore sawe him he said to Iesus Lord what shal this man do 22 Iesus said vnto him If I wil that he tarie til I come what is it to thee folowe thou me 23 Then went this worde abrode among the brethren that this disciple shulde not dye Yet Iesus said not to him He shal not dye but if I wil that he tarie til I come what is it to thee 24 This is that disciple which testifieth of these things wrote these things and we knowe that his testimonie is true 25 * Now there are also manie other things which Iesus did the which if they shulde be writteÌ euerie one I suppose the world colde not conteine the bokes that shulde be written Amen THE ACTES OF THE holie Apostles vvritten by Luke the Euangeliste THE ARGVMENT CHrist after his ascension performed his promes to his Apostles and sent them the holie Gost declaring thereby that he was not onely mindeful of his Church but wolde be the head and mainteiner thereof for euer Wherein also his mightie power appeareth who notwithstanding that Satan and the worlde resisted neuer so muche against this noble worke yet by a fewe simple men of no reputation replenished all the worlde with the sounde of his Gospel And here in the beginning of the Church and the increase thereof we may plainely perceiue the practise and malice whiche Satan continually vseth to suppresse and ouerthrowe the Gospel he raiseth conspiracies tumultes commotions persecutions sclaÌders and all kinde of crueltie Againe we shal here beholde the prouidence of God who ouerthroweth his enemies enterprises deliuereth his Church from the rage of tyrants strengtheneth and incourageth his most valiantly and constantly to followe their captaine Christ leauing as it were by this historie a perpetual memorie to the Church that the crosse is so ioyned with the Gospel that they are felowes inseparable and that the end of one affliction is but the beginning of another Yet neuertheles God turneth the troubles persecutions imprisonings and tentations of his to a good yssue giuing them as it were in sorowe ioye in bandes fredome in prison ãâã in trouble quietnes in death life Finally this boke coÌteineth manie excellent sermons of the Apostles and discipies as touching the death resurrection and ascension of Christ. The mercie of God Of the grace and remision of sinne through Iesus Christ. Of the blessed immortalitie An exhortatioÌ to the ministers of Christs flocke Of repentance and feare of God with other principal points of our faith so that this onelie historie in a maner may be sufficient to instruct a man in all true doctrine and religion CHAP. I. 7 The wordes of Christ his Angels to the Apostles 9 His ascension 14 Wherein the Apostles are occupied til the holie Gost be sent 26 And of the election of Matthias 1 Haue made the former treatise ô Theo philê° of all that Iesus begaÌto do teach Vntil the day that he was taken vp after that he through the holie Gost had giueÌ coÌmandements vn to the Apostles whome he had chosen 2 3 To whome also he presented him self aliue after that he had suffered by manie infallible tokens being sene of them by the space of fourtie dayes and speaking of those things which apperteine to the kingdom of God 4 And when he had gathered theÌ together he commanded them that they shulde not departe froÌ Ierusalem but wait for the promes of the Father * which said he ye haue heard of me 5 * For Iohn in dede baptized with water but ye shal be baptized with the holie Gost within these fewes dayes 6 When they therefore were come together they asked of him saying Lord wilt thou at this time restore the kingdome to Israel 7 And he said vnto them It is not for you to knowe the times or the seasons whiche the Father hathe put in his one power 8 But ye shal receiue power of the holie Gost when he shal come on you and ye shal be witnesses vnto me bothe in Ierusalem and in all Iudea and in Samaria and vnto the vtter most parte of the earth 9 * And when
these things 12 Thus by the hands of the Apostles were many signes and wonders shewed amoÌg the people and they were all with one accorde in Solomons porche 13 And of the other durst no man ioyne him self to them neuertheles the people magnified them 14 Also the nombre of them that beleued in the Lord bothe of men and women grewe more and more 15 In so muche that thei broght the sicke into the stretes and laid them on beddes and cou ches that at the least way the shadowe of Pe ter when he came by might shadowe some of them 16 There came also a multitude out of the cities rounde about vnto Ierusalem bringing sicke folkes theÌ which were vexed with vncleane spirits who were all healed 17 ¶ Then the chief Priest rose vp and all they that were with him whiche was the secte of the Sadduces and were ful of indignation 18 And laid hands on the Apostles and put theÌ in the commune prison 19 But the Angel of the Lord by night opened the prison dores and broght them forthe said 20 Go your way and stand in the Temple and speake to the people all the wordes of this life 21 So when they heard it they entred into the Temple early in the morning aÌd taught And the chief Priest came and they that were with him and called the Council together and all the Elders of the children of Israel and sent to the prison to cause them to be broght 22 But when the officers came and sounde them not in the prison they returned and tolde it 23 Saying Certeinly we founde the prison shut as sure as was possible and the kepers standing without before the dores but when we had opened we founde no man within 24 Then wheÌ the chief Priest and the captaine of the Temple and the hie Priests heard these things they douted of theÌ whereunto this wolde growe 25 Then came one and shewed theÌ saying Beholde the men that ye put in prison are stan ding in the Temple and teache the people 26 Then went the captaine with the officers broght them without violence for they feared the people lest they shulde haue bene stoned 27 And when they had broght them they set them before the Council the chief Priest asked them 28 Saying Did not we straitely commande you that ye shulde not teache in this Name and beholde ye haue filled Ierusalem with your doctrine ye wolde bring this maÌs blood vpon vs. 29 Then Peter and the Apostles answered and said We ought rather to obey God then men 30 The * God of our Fathers hathe raised vp Iesus whome ye ãâã and hanged on a tre 31 Him hathe God lift vp ãâã his right hand to be a Prince and a Sauiour to giue repen tance to Israel and forgiuenes of sinnes 32 And we are his witnesses concerning these things which we say yea and the ãâã Gost whome God hathe giuen to them that obey him 33 Now when they heard it they brast for anger and consulted to slay them 34 Then stode there vp in the CouÌcil a certeine Pharise named Gamaliel a doctour of the Law honored of all the people and commaÌded to put the Apostles forthe a litle space 35 And said vnto them Men of Israel take hede to your selues what ye enteÌd to do touching these men 36 For before these times rose vp Theudas boasting him self to whome resorted a nom ber of meÌ about a foure hundreth who was slayne and thei all which obeied him were scattered and broght to noght 37 After this man arose vp Iudas of Galile in the dayes of the tribute drew away much people after him he also perished all that obeied him were scattered abroad 38 And now I say vnto you refraine your selues from these men and let them alone for if this counsel or this worke be of men it wil come to noght 39 But if it be of God ye caÌ not destroie it lest ye be founde euen fighters against God 40 And to him they agreed and called the Apo stles and when thei had beaten them they commanded that they shulde not speake in the Name of Iesus and let them go 41 So they departed from the Council reioycing that they were counted worthie to suffer rebuke for his Name 42 And daiely in the Temple and from house to house they ceased not to teache and prea che Iesus Christ. CHAP. VI. 3 Seuen deacons are ordeined in the Church 8. The graces and miracles of Steuen whome they accused falsely 1 ANd in those daies as the nomber of the disciples grewe there arose a murmuring of the Grecians towardes the Hebrewes because their widdowes were neglected in the daielie ministring 2 Then the twelue called the multitude of the disciples together and said It is not mete that we shulde leaue the worde of God to serue the tables 3 Wherefore brethren loke ye out among you seuen men of honest reporte and ful of the holie Gost aÌd of wisdome which we may appoint to this busines 4 And we wil giue our selues continually to prayer aÌd to the ministracion of the worde 5 And the saying pleased the whole multitude and they chose Steuen a man ful of faith and of the holie Gost and * Philippe and Prochorus and Nicanor and Timon and Parmenas and Nicolas a proselyte of Antio chia 6 Which they set before the Apostles and they praied and laid their hands on them 7 And the worde of God increased and the nomber of the disciples was multiplied in Ierusalem greatly and a great companie of the Priests were obedient to the faith 8 ¶ Now Steuen ful of faith and power did great wonders and miracles among the people 9 Then there arose certeine of the ãâã which are called Libertines CyreniaÌs and of Alexandria and of them of Cilicia aÌd of ãâã and disputed with Steuen 10 But they were not able to resist the wisdome and the Spirit by the which he spake 11 Then they suborned men which said We haue heard him speake blasphemous wordes against Moses and God 12 Thus they moued the people aÌd the Elders and the Scribes running vpon him caught him and broght him to the Council 13 And set forthe false witnesses which said This man ceaseth not to speake blasphemous wordes against this holie place and the Law 14 For we haue heard him say that this Iesus of Nazaret shal destroye this place and shal change the ordinances which Moses gaue vs. 15 And as all that sate in the Council loked stedfastly on him they sawe his face as it had bene the face of Angel CHAP. VII Steuen maketh answer by the Scriptures to his accusers 51. He rebuketh the hardnecked Iewes 57 And is stoned to death 58 Saul kepeth the tourmentours clothes 1 THen said the chief
to the Gentiles 18 The Church approueth it 21 The Church increaseth 22 Barnabas and Paul preache at Antiochia 28 Agabus prophecieth ãâã to come 29 And the remedie 1 NOw the Apostles and the brethren that were in Iudea heard that the Gentiles had also receiued the worde of God 2 And when Peter was come vp to Ierusalem they of the circumcision contended against him 3 Saying Thou wentest in to men vncircumcised and hast eaten with them 4 Then Peter began and expouÌded the thing in order to them them saying 5 I was in the citie of Ioppa praying and in a trance I sawe this vision A certeine vessel coÌming downe as it had bene a great shete let downe froÌ heauen by the foure corners and it came to me 6 Toward the which wheÌ I had fastened mine eyes I coÌsiderest and sawe fowre foted beastes of the earth and wilde beastes and creping things and foules of the heauen 7 Also I heard a voyce saying vnto me Arise Peter slay and eat 8 And I said God forbid Lord for nothing pol luted or vncleane hathe at anie time entred into my mouth 9 But the voyce answered me the second time from heauen The things that God hathe purified pollute thou not 10 And this was done thre times and all were taken vp againe into heauen 11 Then beholde immediatly there were thre men already come vnto the house where I was sent from Cesarea vnto me 12 And the Spirit said vnto me that I shulde go with theÌ without douting moreouer these six brethren came with me and we entred in to the mans house 13 And he shewed vs how he had sene an Angel in his house which stode and said to him SeÌd men to Ioppa and call for Simon whose surname is Peter 14 He shal speake wordes vnto thee whereby bothe thou and all thine house shal be saued 15 And as I began to speake the holie Gost fel on them * euen as vpon vs at the beginning 16 Then I remembred the worde of the Lord how he said * Iohn baptized with water but ye shal be baptized with the holie Gost. 17 For as muche then as God gaue them a like gift as he did vnto vs when we beleued in the Lord Iesus Christ who was I that I colde let God 18 When they heard these things they helde their peace and glorified God saying Then hathe God also to the Gentiles granted repentance vnto life 19 ¶ And thei which were * scattred abroade because of the afflictioÌ that arose about Steuen walked throughout til they came vnto Phenice Cyprus Antiochia preaching the worde to no maÌ but vnto the Iewes only 20 Now some of them were men of Cyprus of Cyrene which when they were come into Antiochia spake vnto the Grecians and preached the Lord Iesus 21 And the hand of the Lord was with theÌ so that a great nomber beleued and turned vnto the Lord. 22 Then tidings of those things came vnto the eares of the Church which was in Ierusalem and they sent forthe Barnabas that he shulde go into Antio chia 23 Who wheÌ he was come had sene the gra ce of God was glad and exhorted all that with purpose of heart they wolde cleaue vnto the Lord. 24 For he was a good man and ful of the holie Gost and faith and muche people ioyned them selues vnto the Lord. 25 ¶ Then departed Barnabas to Tarsus to seke Saul 26 And when he had founde him he broght him vnto Antiochia and it came to passe that a whole yere they were conuersant with the Church taught much people inso much that the disciples were first called Christians in Antiochia 27 In those dayes also came Prophetes froÌ Ieru salem vnto Antiochia 28 And there stode vp one of them named Aga bus and signified by the Spirit that there shulde be great famine throughout all the world which also came to passe vnder Clau dius Cesar. 29 Then the disciples euerie man according to his habilitie purposed to send succour vnto the brethren which dwelt in Iudea 30 Which thing they also did sentit to the Elders by the hands of Barnabas and Saul CHAP. XII 1 Herode persecuteth the Christians 2 He killeth Iames 4 And putteth Peter in prison 7 Whome the Lord de liuereth by an Angel 21 The horrible death of Herode 24 The Gospel ãâã 25 Barnabas Saul returning to Antiochia take Iohn Marke with them 1 NOw about that time Herode the King stretched forthe his hands to vexe certeine of the Church 2 And he killed Iames the brother of Iohn with the sworde 3 And when he sawe that it pleased the Iewes he proceded further to take Peter also then were the dayes of vnleauened bread 4 And when he had caught hym he put hym in prison and deliuered hym to foure quaternions of souldiers to be kept intendyng after the Passeouer to bryng hym forthe to the people 5 So Peter was kept in prison but earnest prayer was made of the Churche vnto ãâã for hym 6 And when Herode wolde haue broght hym out vnto the people the same uight slept Peter betwene two souldiers bounde wyth two chaines and the kepers before the dore kept the prison 7 * And beholde the Angel of the Lord came vpon them and a lyght shined in the house and he smote Peter on the side and raysed him vp saying Arise quickely And his chaines fel of from his hands 8 And the Angel said vnto him Girde thyself and binde on thy sandales And so he dyd Then he said vnto him Cast thy garment about thee and followe me 9 So Peter came out and followed hym and knew not that it was true which was done by the Angel but thoght he had sene a visioÌ 10 Now when they were past the first and the seconde watche they came vnto the yron gate that leadeth vnto the citie whiche ope ned to them by his owne accorde and they went out and passed through one strete and by and by the Angel departed from him 11 ¶ And when Peter was come to him self he said Now I know for a trueth that the Lord hath sent his Angell and hathe deliuered me out of the hand of Herode and from all the waiting for of the people of the Iewes 12 And as he considered the thing he came to the house of Marie the mother of Iohn whose surname was Marke where manie were gathered together and prayed 13 And when Peter knocked at the entrie dore a mayde came forthe to hearken named Rhode 14 But when she knewe Peters voyce she opened not the entrie dore for gladnes but ran in and tolde how Peter stode before the entrie 15 But they said vnto her Thou art ãâã Yet she affirmed it constantly that it was so TheÌ said they It is his Angel
of Iohn Marke 1 THen came downe certeine from Iudea and taught the brethren saying * Except ye be circumcised after the maner of Moses ye can not be saued 2 And when there was great dissention disputation by Paul and Barnabas against them they ordeined that Paul and Barnabas and certeine other of them shulde go vp to Ieru salem vnto the Apostles Elders about this question 3 Thus being sent forthe by the Church they passed through Phenice and Samaria declaring the conuersion of the GeÌtiles and they broght great ioye vnto all the brethren 4 And when they were come to IerusaleÌ they were receiued of the Church of the Apostles aÌd Elders they declared what things God had done by them 5 But said they certeine of the secte of the Pharises which did beleue rose vp saying that it was nedeful to circumcise theÌ and to coÌmande them to kepe the Law of Moses 6 Then the Apostles Elders came together to loke to this matter 7 And when there had bene great disputation Peter rose vp and said vnto them * Ye men and brethren ye knowe that a good while ago among vs God chose out me that the Gentiles by my mouth shuld heare the word of the Gospel and beleue 8 And God which knoweth the hearts bare them witnes in giuing vnto them the holie Gost euen as he did vnto vs. 9 And he put no difference betwene vs and theÌ after that by faith he had*purified their hearts 10 Now therefore why temptye God to*lay a yoke on the disciples neckes whiche nether our fathers nor we were able to beare 11 But we beleue through the grace of the Lord Iesus Christ to be saued euen as they do 12 Then all the multitude kept silence heard Barnabas and Paul which tolde what signes and wondres God had done among the GeÌtiles by them 13 And when they helde their peace Iames answered saying Men brethren hearken vnto me 14 * Simeon hathe declared how God first did visite the ãâã to take of them a people vnto his Name 15 And to this agre the wordes of the Prophetes as it is written 16 * After this I wil returne and wil buylde againe the tabernacle of Dauid which is fallen downe the ruines thereof wil I buylde againe and I wil set it vp 17 That the residue of men might seke after the Lord and all the Gentiles vpoÌ whome my Name is called saith the Lord whiche doeth all these things 18 From the beginning of the worlde God knoweth all his workes 19 Wherefore my sentence is that we trouble not them of the Gentiles that are turned to God 20 But that we write vnto them that they absteine them selues from filthines of idoles and fornication and that that is strangled and from blood 21 For Moses of olde time hathe in euerie citie them that preache him seing he is red in the Synagogues euerie Sabbath day 22 Then it semed good to the Apostles and Elders with the whole Church to send chosen men of their owne companie to Antiochia with Paul Barnabas to wit Iudas whose surname was Barsabas and Silas which were chief men among the brethren 23 And wrote letters by them after this maner THE APOSTLES AND the Elders the brethren vnto the brethren which are of the Gentiles in Antiochia and in Syria in Cilicia send greting 24 Forasmuche as we haue heard that certeine which departed from vs haue troubled you with wordes cumbred your mindes saying Ye must be circuÌcised and kepe the Law to whome we gaue no suche coÌmandement 25 It semed therefore good to vs wheÌ we were come together with one accorde to send chosen men vnto you with our beloued Bar nabas and Paul 26 Men that haue giuen vp their liues for the Name of our Lord Iesus Christ. 27 We haue therefore sent Iudas and Silas whiche shal also tell you the same things by mouth 28 For it semed good to the holie Gost and to vs to lay no more burden vpon you then these necessarie things 29 That is that ye absteine from things offered to idoles and blood and that that is strangled and from fornication froÌ which if ye kepe your selues ye shal do wel Fare ye wel 30 Now when they were departed they came to Antiochia after that they had asseÌbled the multitude they deliuered the epistle 31 And when they had red it they reioyced for the consolation 32 And Iudas and Silas being Prophetes exhorted the brethren with manie wordes strengthened them 33 And after they had taried there a space they were let go in peace of the brethren vnto the Apostles 34 Notwithstanding Silas thoght good to abide there stil 35 Paul also and Barnabas continued in Antiochia teaching and preaching with manie other the worde of the Lord. 36 ¶ But after certeine dayes Paul said vnto Barnabas Let vs returne and visite our brethren in euerie citie where we haue preached the worde of the Lord and se how thei do 37 And Barnabas counseled to take with theÌ Iohn called Marke 38 But Paul thoght it not mete to take him vnto their companie which departed from them from Pamphilia and went not with them to the worke 39 Then were they so stirred that they departed a sunder one from the other so that Barnabas toke Marke and sailed vnto Cyprus 40 And Paul chose Silas and departed being commended of the brethren vnto the grace of God 41 And he went through Syria and Cilicia stablishing the Churches CHAP. XVI 1 when Paul had circumcised Timothie he toke him with him 7 The' Spirit calleth them from one countrey to another ãâã Lydia is conuerted 28 Paul and Silas imprisoned conuert the iayler 37 And are deliuered as Romaines 1 THen came he to Derbe to Lystra and beholde a certeine disciple was there named*Timotheus a womans sonne which was a Iewesse and beleued but his father was a Grecian 2 Of whome the brethren which were at Lystra and Iconium reported wel 3 Therefore Paul wolde that he shulde go forthe with him and toke and circumcised him because of the Iewes which were in those quarters for they knew all that his father was a Grecian 4 And as they went through the cities they deliuered them the decrees to kepe ordeined of the Apostles and Elders which were at Ierusalem 5 And so were the Churches stablished in the faith and encreased in nombre daily 6 ¶ Now when they had gone through out Phrygia and the region of Galacia they were forbidden of the holie Gost to preache the worde in Asia 7 Then came they to Mysia and soght to go into Bithynia but the Spirit fuffred them not 8 Therefore they passed through Mysia and came downe to Troas 9 Where a visioÌ appeared to
Paul in the night There stode a man of Macedonia prayed him saying Come into Macedonia and helpe vs. 10 And after he had sene the vision immediatly we prepared to go into Macedonia being assured that the Lord had called vs to preache the Gospel vnto them 11 Then went we forthe from Troas and with a straight course came to Samothracia and the next day to Neapolis 12 ¶ And from thence to Philippi which is the chief citie in the partes of Macedonia and whose inhabitants came from Rome to dwell there and we were in that citie abiding certeine dayes 13 And on the Sabbath day we went out of the citie besides a riuer where they were wont to pray and we sate downe and spake vnto the ãâã which were come together 14 And a certeine ãâã named Lydia a seller of purple of the citie of the Thyatirians which worshipped God heard vs ãâã heart the Lord opened that she attended vn to the things which Paul spake 15 And when she was baptized and her housholde she besoght vs saying If ye haue iudged me to be faithful to the Lord come into ãâã house and abide there and she constrained vs. 16 And it came to passe that as we went to prayer a certeine maide hauing * a spirit of diuination met vs which gate her masters muche vantage with diuining 17 She followed Paul and vs and cryed saying These men are the seruants of the moste high God which shewe vnto vs the way of saluacion 18 And this did she manie dayes But Paul being grieued turned about and said to the spirit I commande thee in the Name of Iesus Christ that thou come out of her And he came out the same houre 19 Now when her masters sawe that the hope of their gaine was gone they caught Paul Silas and drewe them into the market place vnto the magistrates 20 And broght them to the ãâã saying These men which are Iewes trouble our citie 21 And preache ordinances which are not lawful for vs to receiue nether to obserue seing we are Romaines 22 The people also rose vp together against them and the gouernours rent their clothes and * commanded them to be beaten with roddes 23 And when they had beateÌ them sore they cast them into prison commanding the iailer to kepe them surely 24 Who hauing receiued suche commandement cast them into the inner prison and made their fete fast in the stockes 25 Now at midnight Paul Silas prayed and sainge a psalme vnto God and the prisoners heard them 26 And suddeÌly there was a great earthquake so that the fundation os the prison was shaken and by and by all the dores opened and euerie mans bandes were losed 27 Then the keper of the prison waked out of his slepe and when he sawe the prison dores open he drewe out his sworde and wolde haue killed him self supposing the prisoners had bene fled 28 But Paul cryed with a loude voyce saying Dothy self no harme for we are all here 29 Then he called for a light and leaped in and came trembling and fel downe before Paul and Silas 30 And broght them out and said Syrs what must I do to be saued 31 And they said Beleue in the Lord Iesus Christ and thou shalt be saued and thine housholde 32 And they preached vnto him the worde of the Lord and to all that were in his house 33 Afterwarde he toke them the same houre of the night and washed their stripes and was baptized with all that beloÌged vnto him straight way 34 And when he had broght them into his house he set meat before them and reioyced that he with all his housholde beleued in God 35 And when it was day the gouernours sent the sergeants saying Let those men go 36 Then the keper of the prison tolde these wordes vnto Paul saying The gouernours haue sent to lose you now therefore get you hence and go in peace 37 Then said Paul vnto them After that they haue beaten vs openly vncondemned which are Romaines they haue cast vs into prison and now wolde they put vs out ãâã nay verely but let them come and bring vs out 38 And the sergeants tolde these wordes vnto the gouernours who feared when they heard that they were Romaines 39 Then came they and prayed theÌ and broght them out and desired them to departe out of the citie 40 And they went out of the prison aÌd entred into the house of Lydia and when they had sene the brethren they comforted them and departed CHAP. XVII 1 Paul commeth to Thessalonica 4 where some receiue him and others persecute him 11 To searche the Scriptures 17 He disputeth at Athens and the frute of his doctrine 1 NOw as they passed through Amphipolis and Appollonia they came to Thessalonica where was a Synagogue of the Iewes 2 And Paul as his maner was went in vnto theÌ and thre Sabbath dayes disputed with them by the Scriptures 3 Opening and alledging that Christ must haue suffred and risen againe from the dead and this is Iesus Christ whome said he I preache to you 4 And some of them beleued and ioyned in companie with Paul and Silas also os the Gre cians that feared God a great multitude and of the chief women not a fewe 5 But the Iewes which beleued not moued with enuie toke vnto them certeine vagabondes and wicked felowes and when they had assembled the multitude they made a tumulte in the citie and made assaut against the house of Iason and soght to bring them out to the people 6 But when they founde theÌ not they drewe Iason and certeine brethren vnto the heades of the citie crying These are they which ãâã subuerted the state of the worlde and here they are 7 Whome Iason hathe receiued and these all do against the decrees of Cesar saying that there is another King one Iesus 8 Then they troubled the people the heads of the citie when they heard these things 9 Not withstaÌding when they had receiued sufficient assurance of Iason and of the other they let them go 10 And the brethren immediatly sent away Paul and Silas by night vnto Berea which when they were come thither entred into the Synagogue of theÌ Iewes 11 These were also more noble men theÌ they which were at Thessalonica which receiued the worde with all readines and * searched the Scriptures daily whether those things were so 12 Therefore manie of them beleued and of honeste women which were Grecians and men not a fewe 13 ¶ But when the Iewes of Thessalonica knewe that the worde of God was also prea ched of Paul at Berea they came thither also and moued the people 14 But by and by the brethren sent away Paul to go as it were to the sea but Silas and Timotheus abode there stil. 15 And they that did
contentious and disobey the trueth and obey vnrighetousnes shal be indignation and wrath 9 Tribulation and anguish shal be vpon the soule of euerie man that doeth euil of the Iewe first and also of the Grecian 10 But to euerie man that doeth good shal be glorie and honour and peace to the Iewe first and also to the Grecian 11 For there is no* respect of persones with God 12 For as manie as haue sinned without the Law shal perish also without the Law and as manie as haue sinned in the Law shal be iudged by the Law 13 * For the hearers of the Law are not righteous before God but the doers of the Law shal be iustified 14 For when the Gentiles which haue not the Law do by nature the things conteined in the Law they hauing not the Law are a Law vnto themselues 15 Which shewe the effect of the Law written in their hearts their coÌscience also bearing witnes and their thoghts accusing one another or excusing 16 At the day when God shal iudge the secretes of men by Iesus Christ according to my Gospel 17 ¶ Beholde thou art called a Iewe and restest in the Law and* gloriest in God 18 And knowest his wil and alowest the things that are excellent in that thou art instructed by the Law 19 And persuadest thyself that thou art a guide of the blinde a light of them which are in darkenes 20 An instructer of them which lacke discretion a teacher of the vnlearned which hast the forme of knowledge and of the trueth in the Law 21 Thou therefore which teachest another tea chest thou not thy self thou that preachest A man shulde not steale doest thou steale 22 Thou that saist A man shulde not commit adulterie doest thou commit adulterie thou that abhorrest idoles committest thou sacrilege 23 Thou that gloriest in the Law through breaking the Law dishonorest thou God 24 For the Name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles through you * as it is written 25 For circumcision verely is profitable if thou do the Law but if thou be a transgressor of the Law thy circumcision is made vncircumcision 26 Therefore if the vncircumcision kepe the ordinances of the Law shal not his vncircumcision be counted for circumcision 27 And shal not vncircumcision which is by nature if it kepe the Law iudge thee which by the letter and circumcision art atransgressor of the Law 28 For he is not a Iewe which is one outwarde nether is that circumcision which is outwarde in the flesh 29 But he is a Iewe which is one within and the * circumcision is of the heart in the spirit not in the letter whose praise is not of men but of God CHAP. III. 1 Hauing granted some prerogatiue to the Iewes because of Gods fre and stable promes 10 He proueth by the Scriptures bothe Iewes and Gentiles to be sinners 21. 24 And to be ãâã by grace through faith and not by ãâã ãâã And so the Law to be established 1 WHat is then the preferment of the Iewe or what is the profite of circumcision 2 ãâã che euerie maner of way for chiefly be cause vnto them were committed the oracles of God 3 For what thogh some did not beleue shal their * vn belief make the faith of God with out effect 4 God for bid yea let God be * true and * euerie man a liar as it is written * That thou mightest be iustified in thy wordes and ouercome when thou art iudged 5 Now if our vnrighteousnes commende the righteousnes of God what shal we say Is God vnrighteous which punisheth I speake as a man 6 God for bid els how shal God iudge the worlde 7 For if the veritie of God hathe more abunded through my lie vnto his glorie why am I yet condemned as a sinner 8 And as we are blamed and as some affirme that we say why do we not euil that good may come there of whose damnation is iust 9 What then are we more excellent No in no wise for we haue already proued that all bothe Iewes and Gentiles are * vnder sinne 10 As it is written * There is none righteous no not one 11 There is none that vnderstandeth there is none that seketh God 12 They haue all gone out of the way they haue bene made altogether vn profitable there is none that doeth good no not one 13 * Their throte is an open sepulchre they haue vsed their tongues to deceit * the poyson of aspes is vnder their lippes 14 * Whose mouth is ful of cursing and bitternes 15 * Their fete are swift to sheade blood 16 Destruction and calamitie are in their wayes 17 And the way of peace they haue not knowen 18 * The feare of God is not before their eyes 19 * Now we knowe that whatsoeuer the Law saith it saith it to them which are vnder the Law that euerie mouth may be stopped and all the worlde be culpable before God 20 Therefore by the workes of the Law shal no flesh be iustified in his sight for by the Lawe commeth the knowledge of sinne 21 But now is the * righteousnes of God made manifest without the Law hauing witnes of the Law and of the Prophetes 22 To wit the righteousnes of God by the faith of Iesus Christ vnto all and vpon all that beleue 23 For there is no differeÌce for all haue sinned and are de priued of the glorie of God 24 And are iustified frely by his grace through the redemption that is in Christ Iesus 25 Whome God hathe set forthe to be a reconciliation through faith in his blood to declare his righteousnes by the forgiuenes of the sinnes that are passed through the pacience of God 26 To shewe at this time his righteousnes that he might be iuste and a iustifier of him which is of the faith of Iesus 27 Where is then the reioycing It is excluded By what Law of workes Nay but by the Law of faith 28 Therefore we conclude that a man is iustified by faith without the workes of the Law 29 God is he the God of the Iewes onely and not of the Gentiles also Yes euen of the Gentiles also 30 For it is one God who shal iustifie circumcision of faith and vn circuÌcision through faith 31 Do we then make the Law of none effect through faith God for bid yea we establish the Law CHAP IIII. 1. 17 He declareth that iustification is a fre gift euen by them selues of whome the Iewes moste boasted as of Abraham and of Dauid 15 And also by the office of the Law and faith 1 WHat shal we say then that Abraham our Father hathe founde concerning the flesh 2 For if Abraham were iustified by workes he hath
giue no occasion of offence in anie thing that our ministerie shulde not be re prehended 4 But in all things we approue our selues as * the ministers of God in muche patience in afflictions in necessities in distresses 5 In stripes in prisones in tumultes in labours 6 By watchinges by fastinges by puritie by knowledge by long suffering by kindnes by the holie Gost by loue vnfained 7 By the worde of trueth by the power of God by the armour of righteousnes on the right hand an on the lefte 8 By honour and dishonour by euill reporte and good reporte as deceiuers yet true 9 As vnknowen and yet knowen as dying and beholde we liue as chastened and yet not killed 10 As sorowing and yet alway reioycyng as poore and yet make manie riche as hauing nothing and yet possessing all thyngs 11 O corinthians our mouth is open vnto you our heart is made large 12 Ye are not kept straite in vs but ye are kept straite in your owne bowelles 13 Now for the same recompense I speake as to my children Be you also enlarged 14 Be not vnequally yoked with the infideles for what felowship hathe righteousnes with vnrighteousnes and what communion hathe light with darkenes 15 And what concorde hathe Christ with Belial or what parte hathe the beleuer with the infidel 16 And what agrement hathe the Temple of God with idoles * for ye are the Temple of the liuyng God as God hathe said * I will dwell among them and walke there and I will be their God and they shal be my people 17 * Wherefore come out from among them and separate yourselues saith the Lord and touche none vncleane thing and I will receiue you 18 * And I wil be a Father vnto you ye shal be my sonnes and daughters saith the Lord almightie CHAP. VII 1 He exhorteth them by the promise of God to kepe them selues pure 37 Assuring theÌ of his loue 8. 13 And doeth not excuse his ãâã toward their but ãâã therat considering what profite came thereby 10 Of two sortes of sorow 1 SEing then we haue these promises dearely beloued let vs clense our selues from all filthines of the flesh and Spirit and growe vp vnto ful holines in the feare of God 2 Receiue vs we haue done wrong to no man we haue consumed no man we haue defrauded no man 3 I speake it not to your condemnacion for I haue said before that ye are in our hearts to dye and liue together 4 I vse great boldenes of speach towarde you I reioyce greatly in you I am filled with comfort and am exceadyng ioyous in all our tribulacion 5 For when we were come into Macedonia our flesh had no reste but we were troubled on euerie side fightings without and terrours within 6 But God that comforteth the abiect comforted vs at the comming of Titus 7 And not by his comming onely but also by the consolacion where with he was comforted of you wheÌhetolde vs your great desire your mourning your feruent minde to me warde so that I reioyced muche more 8 For thogh I made you sorie with a letter I re pent not thogh I did repent for I perceiue that the same epistle made you sorie thogh it were but for a season 9 I now reioyce notthat ye were sorie but that ye sorowed to repentance for ye sorowed godly so that in nothing ye were hurt by vs. 10 * For godlie sorowe causeth repentance vnto saluacion not to be repented of but the worldlie sorowe causeth death 11 For beholde this thing that ye haue bene godly sorie what great care it hath wroght in you yea what clearing of your selues yea what indignacion yea what feare yea how great disire yea what a zeale yea what punishment in all things ye haue shewed your selues that ye are pure in this matter 12 Wherefore thogh I wrote vnto you I did not it for his cause that had done the wrong nether for his cause that had the iniurie but that our care toward you in the sight of God might appeare vnto you 13 Therefore we were comforted because ye were comforted but rather we reioyced muche more for the ioy of Titus because his spirit was refreshed by you all 14 For if that I haue boasted anie thing to him of you I haue not ãâã ashamed but as I haue spoken vnto you all things in trueth eneÌ so our boasting vnto Titus was true 15 And his in warde affection is more abundant towarde you when he remembreth the obedience of you all and how with feare and trembling ye receiued him 16 I reioyce therefore that I may put my coÌfidence in you in all things CHAP. VIII 1 By the example of the ãâã 9 And Christ he exhorteth them to continue in relieuing the poore Saintes commending their good beginning 23 After he coÌmendeth Titus and his felowes vnto them 1 WE do you also to wit brethren of the grace of God bestowed vpoÌthe Chur ches of Macedonia 2 Because in great tryal of affliction their ioye abunded and their moste extreme pouertie abunded vnto their riche liberalitie 3 For to their power I beare recorde yea beyonde their power they were willing 4 And prayed vs with great instance that we wold receiue the grace and felowship * of the ministring which is towarde the Saintes 5 And this they did not as we loked for but gaue their owne selues first to the Lord and after vnto vs ãâã the wil of God 6 That we shulde exhorte Titus that as he had begonne so he wolde also accomplish the same grace among you also 7 Therefore as ye abunde in euerie thing in faith and worde and knowledge and in all diligence and in your loue towards vs euen so se that ye abunde in this grace also 8 This say I not by commandement but because of the diligence of others therefore proue I the naturalnes of your loue 9 For ãâã knowe the grace of our Lorde Iesus Christ that he being riche for your sakes became poore that ye through his pouertie might be made riche 10 And I shewe my minde herein for this is expedient for you which haue begonne not to do onely but also to wil a yere ago 11 Now therefore performe to do it also that as there was a readines to wil euen so ye maye performe it of that which ye haue 12 For if there be first a willing minde it is accepted according to that a man hathe and not according to that he hathe not 13 Nether is it that other men shulde be eased and you grieued 14 But vpon like condicion at this time your abundance supplieth their lacke that also their abundance may be for your lacke that there may be equalitie 15 As it is wiritten *
couetous persone which is an idolater hathe any inheritance in the kingdom of Christ of God 6 * Let no man deceiue you with vaine wordes for suche things commeth the wrath of God vpon the children of disobedience 7 Be not therefore companions with them 8 For ye were once darkenes but are now light in the Lord walke as childreÌ of light 9 For the frute of the Spirite is in all goodnes and righteousnes and trueth 10 Approuyng that whiche is pleasing to the Lord. 11 And haue no fellowship with the vnfruteful workes of darkenes but euen reproue theÌ rather 12 For it is shame euen to speake of the things whiche are done of them in secret 13 But all thinges when they are reproued of the light are manifest for it is light that ma keth all things manifest 14 Wherefore he saith A wake thou that slepest and stand vp from the dead and Christe shall giue thee light 15 Take hede therefore that ye walke circumspectly not as fooles but as * wise 16 Redemyng the time for the dayes are euil 17 * Wherefore be ye not vnwyse but vnderstand what the will of the Lord is 18 And be not drunke with wine wherein is excesse but be fulfilled with the Spirit 19 Speaking vnto your selues in psalmes and hymnes and spiritual songs singing and making melodie to the Lord in your hearts 20 Giuing thankes ãâã for all things vnto God euen the Father in the Name of our Lord Iesus Christ. 21 Submitting yourselues one to another in the feare of God 22 ¶ * Wiues submit yourselues vnto your housbands as vnto the Lord. 23 * For the housband is the wiues head euen as Christ is the head of the Church and the same is the sauiour of his bodie 24 Therefore as the Churche is in subiection to Christ euen so let the wiues be to their housbands in euerie thing 25 ¶ * Housbands loue your wiues euen as Christ loued the Churche and gaue him self for it 26 That he might sanctifie it and clense it by the washing of water through the worde 27 That he might make it vnto himself a glorious Church not hauing spot or wrincle or anie suche thing but that it shulde be holie and without blame 28 So ought men to loue their wiues as their owne bodies he that loueth his wife loueth him self 29 For no man euer yet hated his owne flesh but nourisheth and cherisheth it euen as the Lord doeth the Church 30 For we are members of his bodie of his flesh and of his bones 31 * For this cause shal a man leaue father and mother and shal cleaue to his wife and they twaine shal be one flesh 32 This is a great secret but I speake concerning Christ and concerning the Churche 33 Therefore euerie one of you do ye so let euerie one loue his wife euen as him self let the wife se that she feare her housbaÌd CHAP. VI. 1 How children shulde behaue themselues towarde their fathers and mothers 4 Likewise parents towarde their children 5 Seruants towarde their masters 9 Masters towarde their seruants 13 An exhortation to the spiritual battel and what weapoÌs the Christians shulde fight with all 1 CHildren * obey your parents in the Lord for this is right 2 * Honour thy father and mother whiche is the first commandement with promes 3 That it may be wel with thee and that thou maist liue long on earth 4 And ye fathers prouoke not your children to wrath but bring them vp in instruction and information of the Lord. 5 * Seruants be obedient vnto them that are your masters according to the flesh with feare treÌbling in singlenes of your hearts as vnto Christ. 6 Not with seruice to the eye as men pleasers but as the seruants of Christ doyng the will of God from the heart 7 With good will seruing the Lord and not men 8 And know ye that whatsoeuer good thing any man doeth that same shall he receiue of the Lord whether he be bonde or fre 9 And ye masters do the same things vnto theÌ putting away threatning and knowe that euen your maister also is in heauen nether * respect of persone with hym 10 ¶ Finally my brethreÌ be strong in the Lord is there and in the power of his might 11 Put on the whole armour of God that ye may be able to stand against the assauts of the deuil 12 For we wrestle not against flesh and blood but against * principalities against powers ãâã against the wordlie gouernours the princes of the darkenes of this worlde against spiritual wickednesses whiche are in the hie places 13 For this cause take vnto you the whole armour of God that ye may be able to resist in the euil daye hauing finished al things stand fast 14 Stand therefore your loines girde about with veritie and hauing on the brest plate of righteousnes 15 And your fete shod with the preparation of the Gospel of peace 16 Aboue al take the shielde of faith wherewith ye may quenche all the fyrie dartes of the wicked 17 * And take the helmet of saluation and the sworde of the Spirit which is the worde of God 18 And pray alwaise with all maner prayer and supplication in the Spirit and * watch thereunto with al perseuerance and supplication for all Saintes 19 * And for me that vtterance may be giuen vnto me that I may open my mouth boldly to publish the secret of the Gospel 20 Whereof I am the ambassadour in bondes that therin I may speake boldely as I ought to speake 21 ¶ But that ye may also knowe mine affaires and what I do ãâã chicus my deare brother and faithfull minister in the Lorde shall shewe you of all things 22 Whome I haue sent vnto you for the same purpose that ye might knowe mine affaires and that ye might comfort your hearts 23 Peace be with the brethren and loue with faith from God the Father and frome the Lord Iesus Christ. 24 Grace be with all them whiche loue our Lord Iesus Christe to their immortalitie Amen Written from Rome vnto the Ephesians and sent by Tychicus THE EPISTLE OF Paul to the Philippians THE ARGVMENT PAul being warned by the holie Gost to go to Macedonia planted first a Churche at Philippi a citie of thesame coun trey but ãâã his charge was to preache the Gospel vniuersally to all the Gentiles he trauailed from place to place ãâã ãâã ãâã he was taken prisoner at Rome whereof the Philippians being ãâã sent their minister ãâã ãâã with ãâã vnto him who declaring him the state of the Churche caused him to write this Epistle wherein he ãâã
heauen 2 * Continue in prayer and watch in the same with thankes giuing 3 * Praying also for vs that God maye open vnto vs the dore of vtterance to speake the mysterie of Christ wherefore I am also in bondes 4 That I maye vtter it as it becometh me to speake 5 ¶ * Walke wiselye towarde them that are without and redeme the time 6 Let your speache be gracious alwais and powdred with salt that ye may know how to answer euerie man 7 ¶ Tychicus our beloued brother faithful minister and felowe seruant in the Lord shal declare vnto you my whole state 8 Whome I haue sent vnto you for the same purpose that he might know your state and might comforte your hearts 9 * With Onesimus a faithfull and a beloued brother who is one of you They shal shewe you of all things here 10 Aristarch us my prison fello we saluteth you and Marcus and Barnabas sisters sonne tou ching whome ye receiue hym 11 And Iesus whiche is called Iustus whiche are of the circumcision These onely are my worke fellowes vnto the kingdome of God which haue bene vnto my consolatioÌ 12 Epaphras the seruant of Christe whiche is one of you saluteth you and alwais striueth for you in prayers that ye may stande perfite and ful in al the wil of God 13 For I beare him recorde that he hath a great zeale for you and for theÌ of Laodicea and them of Hicrapolis 14 * Luke the beloued physition greteth you and Demas 15 Salute the brethren which are of Laodicea and Nymphas and the Church whiche is in his house 16 And when this epistle is red of you cause that it be red in the Churche of the Laodiceans also and that ye likewise read the epistles written from Laodicea 17 And say to Archippus Take hede to the ministerie that thou hast receiued in the Lord that thou fulfil it 18 The salutation by the hand of me Paul RemeÌber my baÌdes Grace be with you AmeÌ Written from Rome to the Colossians and sent by Tychicus and One simus THE FIRST EPISTLE of Paul to the Thessalonians THE ARGVMENT AFter that the Thessalonians had bene wel instructed in the faith persecution which perpetually follo weth the preaching of the Gospel arose against the which althogh they did constantly stand yet S. Paul as moste careful for them sent Timothie to strengthen them who sone after admonishing him of their estate gaue occasion to the Apostle to confirme them by diuers arguments to be ãâã in faith to suffer what soeuer God calleth them vnto for the testimonie of the Gospel exhorting them to declare by their godlie liuing ãâã puritie of their religion And as the Church can neuer be so purged that some cockle remaine not among the wheat so there were among them wicked men which by mouing vaine and curious questions to ouerthrowe their faith taught falsely as touching the point of the resurrection from the dead whereof he briefly instructeth them what to thinke earnestly forbidding them to seke curiously to knowe the times willing them rather to watche lest the sudden comming of Christ come vpon them at vnwares and so after certeine exhortations and his commendations to the ãâã he endeth CHAP. I. 2 He thanketh God for theÌ that thei are so stedfast in faith and good workes 6 And receiue the Gospell with suche earnestnes ãâã That they are an example to all others 1 PAul and Siluanus Timotheus vnto the Church of the Thes salonians which is in God the Father in the Lord Iesus Christe Grace be with you and peace froÌ God our Father and from the Lord Iesus Christ. 2 * We giue God thankes alwayes for you al making * mention of you in our prayers 3 Without ceasing remembryng your effectual faith and diligent loue the pacience of your hope in our Lord Iesus Christ in the sight of God euen our Father 4 Knowing beloued brethren that ye are elect of God 5 For our Gospel was not vnto you in word onely but also in power in the holie Gost and in much assuraÌce as ye know after what maner we were among you for your sakes 6 And ye became followers of vs and of the Lord and receiued the worde in much affliction with ioye of the holie Gost. 7 So that ye were as ensamples to all that beleue in Macedonia and Achaia 8 For from you sounded out the worde of the Lord not in Macedonia and in Achaia only but your faith also whiche is towarde God spred abroade in all quarters that we nede not to speake anything 9 For they them selues shewe of you what maner of entring in we had vnto you how ye turned to God from idoles to serue the liuyng and true God 10 And to loke for his Sonne frome heauen whome he raised from the dead euen Iesus which deliuereth vs froÌ the wrath to come CHAP. II. 1 To the intent they shulde not faint vnder the crosse 2 He coÌmendeth his diligeÌce in preaching 13 And theirs in obeing ãâã He excuseth his absence that he colde not come and open his heart to them 1 FOr ye your selues knowe brethren that our entraÌce in vnto you was not in vaine 2 But euen after that we had suffred before were shamefully entreated at * Philippi as ye knowe we were holde in our God to speake vnto you the Gospell of God with muche striuyng 3 For our exhortation was not by deceit nor by vnclennes nor by guile 4 But as we were alowed of God that the Gospell shulde be committed vnto vs so we speake not as they that please meÌ but God which trieth our hearts 5 Nether yet did we euer vse flattering wordes as ye knowe nor colored couetousnes God is recorde 6 Nether soght we praise of men nether of you nor of others 7 When we might haue bene chargeable as the Apostles of Christ but we were gentle among you euen as a nource cherisheth her children 8 Thus being affectioned towarde you our good wil was to haue dealt vnto you not the Gospel of God onely but also our owne soules because ye were dere vnto vs. 9 For ye remember brethren * our labour trauail for we laboured day and night becau se we wolde not be chargeable vnto anie of you preached vnto you the Gospel of God 10 Ye are witnesses and God also how holily and iustly and vnblameably we behaued our selues among you that beleue 11 As ye knowe how that we exhorted you comforted and besoght euerie one of you as a father his children 12 That ye * wolde walke worthie of God who hathe called you vnto his kingdome glorie 13 For this cause also thanke we God without ceasing that when ye receiued of vs the worde of the
and loue and of the hope of saluation for an helmet 9 For God hathe not appointed vs vnto wrath but to obteine saluation by the meanes of our Lord Iesus Christ. 10 Which dyed for vs that whether we wake or slepe we shulde liue together with him 11 Wherefore exhorte one another and edifie one another 12 Now we beseche you brethren that ye knowe them which labour among you and are ouer you in the Lord admonish you 13 That ye haue them in singular loue for their workes sake Be at peace among your selues 14 We desire you bethren admonish them that are vnrulie comforte the feble minded beare with the weake by pacient towarde all men 15 * Se that none recompense euil for euil vnto any man but euer followe that which is good bothe towarde your selues and towarde all men 16 Reioyce euermore 17 * Pray continually 18 In all things giue thankes for this is the wil of God in Christ Iesus to warde you 19 Quench not the Spirit 20 Despise not prophecying 21 Trye ãâã things and kepe that which is good 22 Abstaine from all appearance of euil 23 Now the verie God* of peace sanctifie you throughout and I pray God that your whole spirit and soule bodie may be kept blameles vnto the comming of our Lord Iesus Christ. 24 * Faithful is he which calleth you which wil also do it 25 Brethren pray for vs. 26 Grete ãâã the brethren with and holie kisse 27 I chargey ãâã the Lord that this epistle be red vnto all the brethren the Saintes 28 The grace of our Lord Iesus Christ be with you Amen The first epistle vnto de Thessalonians written from Athens THE SECONDE EPISTLE to the Thessalonians THE ARGVMENT LEst the Thessalonians shulde thinke that Paul neglected them because he went to other places rather then came to them ãâã writteth vnto them and exhorteth theÌ to pacience and other frutes of faith nether to be moued with that vaine opinion of suche as taught that the comming of Christ was at hand for asmuch as before that day there shulde ãâã a fallyng away from true religion euen by a great parte of the worlde and that Antichrist shulde reigne in the Temple of God finally commending him self to their prayers and encouraging them to constancie he will eth them to correct suche sharpely is liue idelly of other mens labours whome if they do not obey his ãâã he coÌmaÌdeth to excoÌmunicate CHAP. I. 3 He thanketh God for their faith loue and pacience 11 He praieth for the encrease of the same 12 And sheweth what frute shal come thereof 1 PAVL and Siluanus and Timotheus vnto the Churche of the Thessalonians whiche is in GOD our Father aÌd in the Lord Iesus Christ. 2 Grace be with you and peace from God our Father and from the Lord Iesus Christ. 3 * We ought to thanke God alwayes for you brethreÌ as it is mete because that your faith groweth excedingly and the loue of euerie one of you towarde another abundeth 4 So that we our selues reioyce of you in the Churches of God because of your pacieÌce and faith in all your persecutions and tribulations that ye suffre 5 * Whiche is a token of the righteous iud gemeÌt of God that ye may be counted worthie of the kingdome of God for the which ye also suffre 6 For it is a righteous thyng with God to recoÌpense tribulation to theÌ that trouble you 7 And to you which are troubled rest with vs * when the Lord Iesus shall shewe him selfe from heauen with his mightie Angels 8 In flamyng fyre rendryng vengeance vnto them that do not knowe God and whiche obey not vnto the Gospel of our Lord Iesus Christ. 9 Which shal be punished with euerlastyng perdition from the presence of the Lorde and from the glorie of his power 10 When he shall come to be glorified in hys Saintes and to be made marueilous in al theÌ that beleue because our testimonie toward you was beleued in that day 11 Wherefore we also praye alwayes for you that our God may make you worthie of his callyng and fulfill all the good pleasure of his goodnes and the worke of faith with power 12 That the Name of our Lorde Iesus Christe may be glorified in you and ye in him according to the grace of our God and of the Lord Iesus Christ. CHAP. II. 3 He sheweth them that the day of the Lord shal not come till the departyng from the faith come first 9 And the kingdome of Antichrist 15 And therefore he exhorteth theÌ not to be deceiued but to stand stedfast inthe things that he hathe taught them 1 NOw we beseche you brethren by the comming of our Lord Iesus Christ and by our assembling vnto him 2 That ye be not suddenly moued from your minde nortroubled nether by spirit nor by worde nor by letter as it were from vs as thogh the daye of Christ were at hand 3 * Let no man deceiue you by any meanes for that day shal not come except there come a departing first and that that man of sinne be disclosed euen the sonne of perdition 4 Which is an aduersarie and exalted him self against all that is called God or that is worshipped so that he doeth sit as God in the Temple of God shewing himself that he is God 5 Remember ye not that when I was yet with you I tolde you these things 6 And now ye knowe what with holdeth that he might be reueiled in his time 7 For the mysterie of iniquitie doeth alreadie worke onely he which now with holdeth shal let til he be taken out of the waye 8 And then shal the wicked man be reueiled * whome the Lord shal consume with the Spirit of his mouth and shal abolish with the brightnes of his comming 9 Euen him whose comming is by the wor king of Satan with all power and signes and lying wonders 10 And in all deceiueablenes of vnrighteousnes among them that perish because they receiued not the loue of the trueth that thei might be saued 11 And therfore God shal send them strong de lusion that they shulde beleue lyes 12 That all they might be damned which bele ued not the trueth but had pleasure in vnto righteousnes 13 But we ought to giue thaÌkes alwaye to God for you brethren beloued of the Lord because that God hathe from the beginning chosen you to saluacion through sanctification of the Spirit and the faith of trueth 14 Whereunto he called you by our Gospel to obteine the glorie of our Lord IESVS Christ. 15 Therefore brethren stand fast and kepe the instructions which ye haue bene taught ether by worde or by our Epistle 16 Now the same Iesus Christ
mothers the yonger as sisters with all purenes 3 Honour widowes whiche are widowes in dede 4 But if any widow haue childreÌ or nephewes let them learne first to shewe godlines towarde their owne house and to recompense their kinred for that is an honest thinge and acceptable before God 5 And she that is a widowe in dede and lefte alone trusteth in God and coÌtinueth in supplications and prayers night and day 6 But she that liueth in pleasure is dead while she liueth 7 These things therefore commaÌde that they may be blameles 8 If there be any that prouideth not for hys owne and namely for them of his housholde he denieth the faith and is worse then an infidel 9 Let not a widowe be taken into the nomber vnder thre score yere olde that hathe bene the wife of one housband 10 And wel reported of for good workes if she haue nourished her children if she haue lodged the strangers if she haue washed the Saintes fete if she haue ministred vnto them which were in aduersitie if she were continually giuen vnto euerie good worke 11 But refuse the yonger widowes for when they haue begonne to waxe want on against Christ they wil marie 12 Hauing damnation because they haue broken the first faith 13 And like wise also being ydle they learne to go about from house to house yea they are not onely ydle but also prattelers and busi-bodies speaking things which are not comelie 14 I wil therefore that the yonger women marie and beare children and gouuerne the house and giue none occasion to the aduersarie to speake euil 15 For certeine are already turned backe after Satan 16 If any faithful man or faithful woman haue widowes let them minister vnto them and let not the Churche be charged that there may be sufficient for them that are widowes in dede 17 ¶ The Elders that rule wel are worthie of* double honour specially they which labour in the worde and doctrine 18 For the Scripture saith * Thou shalt not mousel the mouth of the oxe that treadeth out the corne and * The labourer is worthie of his wages 19 Against an Elder receiue none accusation but vnder two orthre witnesses 20 Them that sinne rebuke openly that the rest also may feare 21 ¶ * charge thee before God the Lord Iesus Christ and the elect Angels that thou obserue these thyngs without preferryng one to another and do nothing parcially 22 Layhands suddenly on no man nether be partaker of othermens sinnes kepe thy self pure 23 Drinke no longer water but vse a litle wine for thy stomakes sake and thine often infirmities 24 Some mens sinnes are open before hand and go before vnto iudgement but some mens followe after 25 Likewise also the good workes are manifest before hand and thei that are otherwise can not be hid CHAP. VI. 1 The duetie of sernants to ãâã their masters 3 Against suche as are not satisfied with the worde of God 6 Of true godlines and contentation of minde 9 Against couetousnes 11 A charge giuen to Timothie 1 LEt as many * seruants as are vnder the yoke counte their masters worthie of al honour that the Name of God and his doctrine be not euil spoken of 2 And they whiche haue beleuing masters let theÌ not despise them because they are brethren but rather do seruice because thei are faith ful and beloued and ãâã of the benefite These things teache and exhorte 3 If any man teach other wise and consenteth not to the wholsome wordes of our Lorde Iesus Christe and to the doctrine whiche is accordyng to godlines 4 He is pufte vp and knoweth nothyng but doteth about * questions and strife of wordes whereof cometh enuie strife railings euil surmisings 5 Vaine disputations of men of corrupt mindes aÌd destitute of the trueth which thinke that gaine is godlines from suche separate thy self 6 But godlines is great gaine if a man be con tent with that he hathe 7 * For we broght nothing into the worlde it is certeine that we caÌ carie nothiÌg out 8 Therefore when we haue fode and raiment let vs there with be content 9 For they that will be riche fall into tentation and snares and into many foolish and noysome lustes whiche drowne men in perdition and destruction 10 For the desire of money is the roote of all euil whiche while some Iusted after they erred from the faith and perced them selues through with many sorowes 11 But thou ô man of God flee these thyngs and followe after righteousnes godlines faith loue pacience and meek enes 12 Fight the good fight of faith laye holde of eternall life whereunto thou art also called and hast professed a good profession before many witnesses 13 * I charge thee in the sight of GOD who quickneth althings and before Iesus Christ whiche vnder Pontius Pilate * witnessed a good confession 14 That thou kepe this commandement with out spot and vnrebukeable vntil the appea ring of our Lord Iesus Christ. 15 Whiche in duetime he shal shewe that is * blessed and prince onely the King of Kings and Lord of Lords 16 Who onely hathe immortalitie and dwelleth in the light that none can atteine vnto * whome neuer man sawe nether can se vnto whome be honour power euerlasting Amen 17 Charge them that are riche in this worlde that they be not high minded and that they * trust not in vncerteine riches but in the liuing God whiche giueth vs abundantly all things to enioye 18 That they do good and be riche in good workes and readie to distribute and communicate 19 * Laying vp in store for them selues a good fundatio against the time to come that they may obteine eternall life 20 O Timotheus kepe that whiche is committed vnto thee and * auoide profane and vaine bablings and oppositions of science falsely so called 21 Whiche while some professe they haue erred concernyng the faith Grace be with thee Amen The first epistle to Timotheus written from Laodicea whiche is the chiefest citie of Phrygia Pacaciana THE SECONDE EPISTLE of Paul to Timotheus THE ARGVMENT THe Apostle being now ready to confirme that doctrine ãâã his blood which he had professed and taught encourageth simotheus and in him all the faithful in the faith of the Gospel and in the constant and syncere coÌfession of the same willing him not to shrinke for feare of afflictions but patiently to attende the yssue as do housband men which at length receiue the frutes of their labours and to cast of alfeare and care as souldiers do which seke onely to please their ãâã shewing him briefly the summe of the Gospel which he preached coÌmanding him to preache the same to others diligently taking hede of
must not striue but must be gentle towarde all men apt to teache suffring the euil men paciently 25 Instructing them with mekenes that are coÌ trarie minded prouyng if GOD at anye time will gyue them repentaunce that they may knowe the trueth 26 And that they maye come to amendement out of the snare of the deuill which are takeÌ of him at his wil. CHAP. III. 1 He prophecieth of the perilous times 2 Setteth out hypo crites in their colours 12 Sheweth the state of the Christians 14 And how to auoide dangers 16 Also what profit cometh of the Scriptures 1 THys knowe also that in the * laste dayes shal come perilous times 2 For men shal be louers of theyr owne selues couetous boasters proude cursed speakers disobedient to parents vnthankefull vnholye 3 Without naturall affection truce breakers false accusers intemperate fierce ãâã of them which are good 4 Traitours headie hygh mynded louers of pleasures more then louers of God 5 Hauyng a she we of godlynes but haue denied the power thereof turne away therfore from suche 6 For of this sorte are they which crepe into houses and lead captiue simple women laden with sinnes and led with diuers lustes 7 Whiche women are euerlearnyng and are neuer able to come to the knowledge of the trueth 8 * And as Iannes and Iambres with stode Mo ses so do these also resiste the trueth men of corrupte myndes reprobate concernyng the fayth 9 But they shall preuaile no longer for theyr madnes shal be euident vnto al men as theirs also was 10 ¶ But thou hast fully knowen my doctrine maner of lyuing purpose faith long suffering loue pacience 11 Persecutions and afflictions whiche came vnto me at* Antiochia at Iconium and at I ystri whiche persecutions I suffered but from them all the Lord deliuered me 12 Yea and all that will liue godly in Christ Iesus shal suffer persecution 13 But the euill men and deceiuers shall waxe worsse and worsse deceyuyng and beyng de ãâã 14 But continue thou in the thyngs whyche thou hast learned and art persuaded thereof knowyng of whome thou hast learned them 15 And that thou hast knowen the holie Scriptures of a childe whiche are able to make thee wise vnto saluation through the fayth whiche is in Christ Iesus 16 * For the whole Scripture is giuen by inspiration of God and is profitable to teache to improue to correct and to instructe in ryghteousnes 17 That the man of GOD may be absolute being made perfite vnto all good workes CHAP. IIII. 1 He exhorteth Timotheus to be ferueÌt in the worlde and to suffer aduersitie 6 Maketh mention of his own death 9 And biddeth Timothie come vnto him 1 I Charge thee therefore before God and before the Lord Iesus Christ whiche shal iudge the quicke and dead at his appearing and in his kingdome 2 Preache the worde be instant in season and out of season improue rebuke exhorte with all long suffring and doctrine 3 For the time will come when they will not suffer wholsome doctrine but hauyng their eares itching shal after their owne lustes get them an heape of teachers 4 And shall turne their eares from the trueth and shal be giuen vnto fables 5 But watch thou in all thyngs suffer aduersitie do the worke of an Euangeliste make thy ministerie fully knowen 6 For I am nowe ready to be offered and the time of my departing is at hand 7 I haue foght a good fight and haue finished my course I haue kept the faith 8 For hence forth is laid vp for me the crown of righteousnes which the Lorde the rightous iudge shall giue me at that daye and not to me onely but vnto all them also that loue his appearyng 9 Make spede to come vnto me atonce 10 For Demas hath forsakeÌ me and hath embraced this present worlde and is departed vnto Thessalonica Crescens is gone to Galacia Titus vnto Dalmacia 11 * Onely Luke is with me Take Marke and bring him with thee for he is profitable vnto me to minister 12 And Tychicus haue I sent to Ephesus 13 The cloke that I left at Troas with Carpus when thou comest bring with thee and the bokes but specially the parchements 14 Alexander the copper smith hath done me muche euil the Lorde rewarde hym according to his workes 15 Of whome be thou ware also for he withstode our preaching sore 16 At my first answering no man assisted me but all forsoke me I praye God that it may not be laid to their charge 17 Notwithstanding the Lord assisted me and strengthened me that by me the preachyng myght be fully knowen and that all the Gen tiles shulde heare and I was deliuered out of the mouth of the lion 18 And the Lord will deliuer me from euerie euil worke and wil preserue me vnto his hea uenlie kingdome to whome be praise for euer and euer Amen 19 Salute Prisca and Aquila and the * housholde of Onesiphorus 20 Erastus abode at Corinthus Trophimus I left at Miletum sicke 21 Make spede to come before winter Eubulus greteth thee and Pudens and Linus and Claudia and all the brethren 22 The Lorde Iesus Christ be with thy spirit Grace be with you Amen The seconde Epistle written from Rome vnto Timotheus the first bishop elected of the Churche of Ephesus when Paul was presented the second time before the Emperour Nero. THE EPISTLE OF Paul to Titus THE ARGVMENT WHen Titus was left in Creta to finish that doctrine which Paul had there begonne Satan stirred vp certeine which went about not onely to ouerthrowe the gouernement of the Churche but also to corrupt the doctrine for some by ambition wolde haue thrust in them selues to be Pastours others vnder pretext of Moses Law broght in manie trifles Against these two sortes of men Paul armeth Titus first teachyng him what maner of Ministers he ought to chose chiefly requiryng that they be men of sounde doctrine to the intent they myght resiste the aduersaries and amongs other things he noreth the Iewes whiche put a certeine holines in meates and suche outwarde ceremonies teachyng them whiche are the true exercises of a Christian life and what things apperteine to euerie mans vocation Againste the whiche if anie man rebelle or els doeth not obey he willeth him to ãâã ãâã CHAP. I. 5 He aduertiseth Titus touchyng the gouernement of the Church 7. The ordinance and office of ministers 12 The nature of the Cretians and of them which sowe abroade Iewish fables and inuentions of men 1 PAVLa seruant of God and an Apostle of IESVS Christ accordynge to the fayth of Gods elect and the knowledge of the trueth which is accordyng to godlines 2 Vnder the hope of eternall life whiche God that can not lie hathe promised before the * worlde began 3 But
that is in thine house 3 Grace be with you and peace from GOD our Father and from the Lord Iesus Christ. 4 I* giue thankes to my God making meÌcion alwaies of thee in my prayers 5 When I heare of thy loue and faith which thou hast towarde the Lord Iesus and to warde all Saintes 6 That the felowship of thy faith may be made fruteful and that whatsoeuer good thing is in you through Christ Iesus may be knowen 7 For we haue great ioye and consolacion in in thy loue because by thee brother the Saintes hearts are comforted 8 Wherefore thogh I be verie bolde in Christ to commande thee that which is coÌuenient 9 Yet for loues sake I rather beseche thee thogh I be as I am euen Paul aged and euen now a prisoner for Iesus Christ. 10 I beseche thee for my sonne* Onesimus whome I haue begotten in my bondes 11 Whiche in time past was to thee vnprofitable but now profitable bothe to thee and to me 12 Whome I haue sent againe thou therefore receine him that is mine owne bowels 13 Whome I wolde haue reteined with me that in thy stede he might haue ministred vnto me in the bondes of the Gospel 14 But without thy minde wolde I do nothyng that thy benefite shulde not be as it were of necessitie but willingly 15 It may be that he therefore departed for a ceason that thou shuldest receiue hym for euer 16 Not now as a seruant but aboue a seruant euen as a brother beloued specially to me how muche more than vnto thee bothe in the flesh and the Lord 17 If therefore thou counte our things commune receiue him as my self 18 If he hathe hurt thee or oweth thee ought that put on mine accountes 19 I Paul haue written this with mine owne hand I wil recompense it albeit I do not say to thee that thou owest vnto me euen thine owne self 20 Yea brother let me obteine this pleasure of thee in the Lord comforte my bo wels in the Lord. 21 Trusting in thine obedience I wrote vnto thee knowing that thou wiltdo euen more then I say 22 Moreouer also prepare ãâã lodgyng for I trust through your prayers I shal be giuen vnto you 23 There salute thee Epaphras my fellowe pri soner in Christ Iesus 24 Marcus Aristarchus Demas and Luke my fellowe helpers 25 The grace of our Lorde Iesus Christe be with your spirit Amen Written from Rome to Philemon and sent by Onesimus a seruant THE EPISTLE TO the Ebrevves THE ARGVMENT FOrasmuche as diuers bothe of the Greke writers and Latines witnesse that the writer of this Epistle for iuste causes wolde not haue his name knowen it were curiositie of our parte to labour muche therein For seing the Spirit of God is the autor thereof it diminisheth nothing the autoritie althogh we knowe not with what penne he wrote it Whether it were Paul as it is not like ãâã Luke or Barnabas or Clement or some other his chief purpose is to persuade vnto the Ebrewes whereby he principally meaneth them that abode at Ierusalem and vnder them all the rest of the Iewes that Christ Iesus was not onely the redemer but also that at his comming all ceremonies must haue an end forasmuche as hys doctrine was the conclusion of al the prophecies therfore not onely Moses was inferior to him but also the Angels for they al were seruants he the Lord but so Lord that he hathe also taken our flesh and is made our brother to assure vs of our saluation through him self for he is that eternal Priest whereof all the Leuitical Priests were but shadowes and therfore at his comming they ought to cease and all sacrifices for ãâã to be abolished as he proueth from the seuenth chap. verse 11. vnto the 12. chap. verse 13. Also he was that Prophet of whome all the Prophetes in time past witnessed as is de clared from the 12. chapter verse 18. to the twentie and fiue verse of the same chapter yea and is the King to whome all things are subiect as appeareth from that verse 25. to the beginning of the last chapter Wherefore according to the examples of the olde fathers we must constantly beleue in him that being sanctified by his iustice taught by his wisdome and gouerned by his powet we may stedfastly and courageously perseuere euen to the end in hope of that ioye that is set before our eyes occupying our selues in Christian exercises that we may bothe be thankeful to God duetiful to our neighbour CHAP. I. 1 He sheueth the excellencie of Christ. 4 Aboue the Angels 7 And of their office 1 AT sondrie times and in diuers maners God spake in the olde time to our fathers by the Prophetes 2 In these last dayes hathe spoken vnto vs by his SoÌne whom he hathe made heir of all things by whome also he made the worldes 3 * Who being the brightnes of the glorie the ingraued forme of his persone and bea ring vp al things by his mightie worde hathe by him self purged our sinnes and sitteth at the right hand of the maiestie in the high est places 4 And is made so muche more excellent then the Angels in as muche as he hath obteined a more excellent name then thei 5 For vnto which of the Angels said he at anie time * Thou art my Sonne this day begate I thee and againe I * wil be his Father and he shal be my sonne 6 And againe when he bringeth in his first begotten Sonne into the worlde he saith * And let all the Angels of God worship him 7 And of the Angels he saith * He maketh the Spirits his messengers and his ministers a flame of fyre 8 But vnto the Sonne he saith * O God thy throne is for euer and euer the scepter of thy kingdome is a scepter of righteousnes 9 Thou hast loued righteousnes and hated iniquitie Wherefore God euen thy GOD hathe anointed thee with the oyle of gladnes aboue thy fellowes 10 And Thou Lord in the beginning hast established the earth aÌd the heauens are the workes of thine hands 11 They shal perish but thou doest remaine and they all shal waxe oldeas doeth a garment 12 And as a vesture shalt thou folde them vp and they shal be changed but thou art the same and thy yeres shal not faile 13 Vnto which also of the Angels said he at anie time Sit at my right hand til I make thine enemies thy fotestole 14 Are they not all ministring spirits sent forthe to minister for their sakes which shal be heires of saluation CHAP. II. 1 He exhorteth vs to be obedient vnto the new Law which Christ hathe giuen vs 9 And not to be offended at the infirmitie and Iowe degre of Christ 10 Because it was necessarie that for oursakes he shulde
take suche an humble state vpon him that he might be like vnto his brethren 1 WHerefore we ought diligently to giue hede to the things which we haue heard lest at anie time we shulde let them slippe 2 For if the worde spoken by Angels was stedfaste and euerie transgression and disobedience receiued a ãâã recompense of rewarde 3 How shal we escape if we neglect so great saluation which at the first began to be preached by the LORD and afterwarde was confirmed vnto vs by them that heard him 4 * God bearing witnes there to bothe with signes and wonders and with diuers miracles and giftes of the holie Gost according to his owne wil 5 For he hathe not put in subiection vnto the Angels the worlde to come whereof we speake 6 But* one in a certeine place witnessed saying What is man that thou shuldest be mindeful of him or the sonne of man that thou woldest consider him 7 Thou madest him a litle inferior to the Angels thou crownedst him with glorie and honour and hast set him aboue the workes of thine hands 8 * Thou hast put all things in subiection vnder his fete And in that he hath put al things in subiection vnder him he left nothing that shulde not be subiect vnto him But we yet se not all things sub dued vnto him 9 But we se Iesus crowned with glorie and honour which was made a litle inferior to the Angels through the suffering of death that by Gods grace he might taste death for all men 10 For it became him for whomme are all things by whome are all things seing that he broght manie children vnto glorie that he shulde consecrate the Prince of their saluation through afflictions 11 For he that sanctifieth and they which are sanctified are all of one wherefore he is not ashamed to call them brethren 12 Saying * I wil declare thy Name vnto my brethren in the middes of the Church will sing praises to thee 13 And againe * I wil put my trust in him And againe * Beholde here am I and the children which God hathe giuen me 14 Forasmuche then as the children were partakers of fleshe and bloode he also him self likewise toke parte with them that he might destroye * through death him that had the power of death that is the deuil 15 And that he might deliuer all them which for feare of death were all their life time sub iect to bondage 16 For he in no sorte toke the Angels but the toke the seed of Abraham 17 Wherefore in all things it became him to be made like vnto his brethreÌ that he might be merciful a faithful high Priest in things concerning God that he might make recon ciliation for the sinnes of the people 18 For in that he suffered and was tempted he is able to sucker them that are tempted CHAP. III. 1 He requireth them to be obedient vnto the worde of Christ 3 who is more worthie then Moses 12 The punishement of suche as wil harden their hearts and not belieue that they might haue eternal rest 1 THerefore holie brethren partakers of the heauenlievocation consider the Apostle and high Priest of our profession Christ Iesus 2 Who was faithful to him that hathe appoin ted him euen as * Moses was in all his hou se. 3 For this man is counted worthie of more glorie then Moses inasmuche as he whiche hathe buylded the house hathe more honour then the house 4 For euerie house is buylded of some maÌ and he that hathe buylt all things is God 5 Now Moses verely was faithful in all his house as a seruant for a witnes of the things which shulde be spoken after 6 But Christ is as the Sonne ouer his owne house whose house we are if we holde fast the confidence and the reioycing of the hope vnto the end 7 Wherefore as the holie Gost saith * To day if ye shal heare his voyce 8 Harden not you hearts as in the prouocation according to the day of the tentation in the wildernes 9 Where your fathers tempted me proued me and sawe my workes fortie yeres long 10 Wherefore I was grieued with that genera tion and said They erre euer in their heart nether haue they knowen my wayes 11 Therefore I sware in my wrath If thei shal enter into my rest 12 Take hede brethren lest at anie time there be in anie of you an euil heart and vnfaithful to departe away from the liuing God 13 But exhorte one another daily while it is called To day lest anie of you be hardened through the deceitfulnes of sinne 14 For we are made partakers of Christ if we kepe sure vnto the end the beginning whe re with we are vp holden 15 So long as it is said To day if ye heare his voyce harden not your hearts as in the prouocation 16 For some when they heard prouoked him to angre how beit not all that came out of Egypt by Moses 17 But with whome was he displeased fortie yeres Was he not displeased with them that sinned * whose carkeises fell in the wildernes 18 And to whome sware he that they shulde not enter into his rest but vnto them that obeyed not 19 So we se that they colde not enter in becau se of vnbeliefe CHAP. IIII. 2 The worde without faith is vnprofitable 3 The Sabbath or rest of the Christians 6 Punishement of vnbeleuers 12 the nature of the worde of God 1 LEt vs feare therefore lest at anie time by forsaking the promes of entring into his rest anie of you shulde seme to be depriued 2 For vnto vs was the Gospel preached as also vnto them but the worde that they heard profited not them because it was not mixed with faith in those that heard it 3 For we which haue beleued do enter into rest as he said to the other * As I haue swor ne in my wrath If they shal enter into my rest althogh the workes were finished from the fundation of the worlde 4 For he spake in a certeine place of the seuenth day on this wise * And God did rest the seuenth day from all his workes 5 And in this place againe If they shal enter into my rest 6 Seing therefore it remaineth that some must enter thereinto and they to whome it was first preached entred not therein for vnbele fes sake 7 Againe he appointed in Dauid a certeine day by To day after so long a time saying as it is said * This day if ye heare his voyce harden not your hearts 8 For if Iesus had giuen them rest then wolde he not after this day haue spoken of another 9 There remaineth therefore a rest
to the peo ple of God 10 For he that is entred into his rest hathe also ceased froÌ his owne workes as God did from his 11 Let vs studie therefore to entre into that rest lest anie man fall after the same ensample of disobedience 12 For the worde of God is liuelie aÌd mightie in operation sharper then anie two edged sworde and entreth through euen vnto the diuiding a sonder of the soule and the spirit and of the ioynts and the marie and is a discerner of the thoghtes and the intentes of the heart 13 Nether is there anie creature which is not manifest in his sight but all things are naked and open vnto his eyes with whome we haue to do 14 Seing then that we haue a greate hie Priest which is entred into heauen euen Iesusthe Sonne of GOD let vs holde fast our profession 15 For we haue not an hie Priest which can not be touched with the feling of our infirmities but was in all things tempted in like sorte yet without sinne 16 Let vs therefore go boldely vnto the throne of grace that we may receiue mercie and finde grace to helpe in time of nede CHAP. V. 5 He compareth Iesus Christ with the Leuiticall Priests shewing wherein they ether agre or dissent 11 Afterwarde he reproueth the negligence of the Iewes 1 FOr euerie hie Priest is taken from among men and is ordeined for men in things perteining to God that he may offer bothe giftes and sacrifices for sinnes 2 Whiche is able sufficiently to haue compassion on them that are ignorant and that are out of the way because that he also is compassed with infirmitie 3 And for the sames sake he is bonde to offer for sinnes as wel for his owne parte as for the peoples 4 * And no man taketh this honour vnto him self but he that is called of God as was Aaron 5 So likewise Christ toke not to him * self this honour to be made the hie Priest but he that said vnto him * Thou art my Sonne this day begate I thee gaue it him 6 As he also in another place speaketh * Thou art a Priest for euer after the order of Melchi-sedec 7 Whiche in the dayes of his flesh did offer vp prayers and supplications with strong crying and teares vnto him that was able to saue him from death and was also heard in that which he feared 8 And thogh he were the Sonne yet learned he obedieÌce by the things which he suffred 9 And being consecrate was made the autor of eternall saluation vnto all them that obey hym 10 And is called of God an hie Priest after the order of Melchi-sedec 11 Of whome we haue many things to say which are hard to be vttered because ye are dull of hearing 12 For when as concerning the time ye ought to be teachers yet haue ye nede againe that we teache you the first ãâã of the worde of God and are become such as haue nede of milke and not of strong meat 13 For euerie one that vseth milke is inexperte in the ãâã of righteousnes for he is a babe 14 But strong meat belongeth to theÌ that are of age whiche through long custome haue their wittes exercised to discerne bothe good and euil CHAP. VI. 1 He procedeth in reprouing them and ãâã them not to faint 12 But to be stedfast and patient 18 Forasmuche as God is sure in his promes 1 THerefore leauing the doctrine of the beginning of Christ let us be led forward vnto perfection not laying againe the funda tion of repentance from dead workes and of faith towarde God 2 Of the doctrine of baptismes and laying on of hands and of the resurrection from the dead and of eternal iudgement 3 And this wil we do if God permit 4 * For it is impossible that they which were once lightened and haue tasted of the heauenlie gift and were made partakers of the holie Gost 5 And haue tasted of the good worde of God and of the powers of the worlde to come 6 If they fall away shulde be renued againe by repentance seing they crucifie againe to them selues the sonne of God and make a mocke of him 7 For the earth which drinketh in the raine that cometh ofte vpon it and bringeth forthe herbes mete for theÌ by whome it is dressed receiueth blessing of God 8 But that which beareth thornes and briars is reproued and is nere vnto cursing whose end is to be burned 6 But beloued we haue persuaded our selues better things of you and suche as accompanie saluation thogh we thus speake 10 For God is not vnrighteous that he shulde forget your worke and labour of loue which ye shewed to warde his Name in that ye haue ministred vnto the Saintes and yet minister 11 And we desire that euerie one of you shewe the same diligence to the ful assurance of hope vnto the end 12 That ye be not slothful but followers of them which through faith and patience inherite the promises 13 For when God made the promes to Abraham because he had no greater to sweare by he sware by him self 14 Saying * Surely I wil abundantly blesse thee and multiplie thee marueilously 15 And so after that he had taryed paciently he enioyed the promes 16 For men verely sweare by him that is greater then them selues and an othe for confirmation is among them an end of all strife 17 So God willing more abundantly to shewe vnto the heires of promes the stablenes of his counsel bound him self by anothe 18 That by two immutable things wherein it is vnpossible that GOD shulde lye we might haue strong consolation which haue our refuge to holde fast the hope that is set before vs 19 Which we haue as an ancre of the soule both sure and stedfast and it entreth into that whiche within the vaile 30 Whether the forerunner is for vs entred in euen Iesus that is made an hie Priest for euer after the order of Melchi-sedech CHAP. VII 1 He compareth the Priesthode of Christ vnto Melchisedec 11 Also Christs Priesthode with the Leuites 1 FOr this Melchi-sedec * was King of Salem the Priest of the most hie God who met Abraham as he returned froÌ the slaughter of the Kings and blessed him 2 To whome also Abraham gaue the tithe of al things who first is by interpretation King of righteousnes after that he is also King of Salem that is King of peace 3 Without father without mother without kinred and hathe nether beginning of his dayes nether end of life but is likened vnto the Sonne of God and continueth a Priest for euer 4 Now consider how great this man was vn to whome euen the Patriarke Abraham gaue the tithe of the spoiles 5 For
and doeth despite the Spirit of grace 30 For we knowe him that hathe said * Vengeance be ongeth vnto me I wil recompen se saith the Lord. And againe The Lord shal iudge his people 31 It is a feareful thing to fall into the hands of the liuing God 32 Now call to remembrance the dayes that are passed in the which after ye had receiued light ye endured a great fight in afflictions 33 Partely while you were made a gazing stocke bothe by reproches and afflictions and partely while ye became companions of them which were so tossed to and fro 34 For bothe ye sorowed with me formy bon des and suffred with ioye the spoyling of your goods knowing in your selues how that ye haue in heauen a better and an enduring substance 35 Cast not away therefore your confidence which hathe great recompense of rewarde 36 For ye haue nede of patience that after ye haue done the wil of God ye might receiue the promes 37 * For yet a verie litle while and he that shal come wil come and wil not tarie 38 Now the iust shal liue by faith but if anie with drawe him self my soule shal haue no pleasure in him 39 But we are not they which withdrawe our selues vnto perdicion but folowe faith vnto the conseruacion of the soule CHAP. XI 1 What faith is and a commendacion of the same 9 Without faith we can not please God 16 The stedfast belefe of the Fathers in olde time 1 NOw faith is the grounde of things whiche are hoped for and the euidence of things which are not sene 2 For by it our elders were wel reported of 3 * Through fayth we vnderstande that the worlde was ordeined by the worde of God so that the things which we se are not made of things which did appeare 4 By faith Abel * offred vnto God a greater sacrifice then Cain by * the which he obteined witnes that he was righteous God testifying of his gifts by the which faith also he being dead yet speaketh 5 By faith was * Enoch taken awaye that he shulde not se death nether was he founde for God had taken him away for before he was taken he was reported of that he had pleased God 6 But with out fayth it is vnpossible to please him for he that cometh to God must beleue that God is and that he is a rewarde of them that seke him 7 By faith * Noe beyng warned of God of the things whiche were as yet not sene moued with reuerence prepared the Arke to the sauing of his housholde through the which Arke he condemned the worlde and was made heire of the ryghteousnes whiche is by faith 8 By faith * Abraham when he was called obeyed God to go out into a place whiche he shulde afterwarde receiue for inheritance and he went out not knowyng whether he went 9 By fayth he abode in the land of promes as in a straunge countrey as one that dwelt in tentes with Isaac and Iacob heires with him of the same promes 10 For he loked for a citie hauyng a fundacion whose buylder and maker is God 11 Through faith * Sarra also receiued strength to conceyue sede and was deliuered of a chylde when she was past age because she iudged him faithful which had promised 12 And therefore sprang there of one euen of one which was dead so manie as * the star res of the skie in multitude and as the sand of the sea shore which is innumerable 13 All these dyed in fayth and receiued not the promises but sawe them a farre of and beleued them and receiued them thanke fully and confessed that they were strangers and pilgremes on the earth 14 For they that say such things declare plainly that they seke a countrey 15 And if they had bene mindefull of that countrey from wheÌce they came out they had leasure to haue returned 16 But now they desire a better that is an heauenlie wherefore God is not ashamed of theÌ to be called their God for he hath prepared for them a citie 17 By faith * Abraham offred vp Isaac wheÌ he was tryed and he that had receiued the pro mises offred his onely begotten sonne 18 To whome it was sayd * In Isaac shall thy sede be called 19 For he considered that GOD was able to raise him vp eueÌ from the dead froÌ whence he receiued him also after a sorte 20 By faith * Isaac blessed Iacob and Esau con cerning things to come 21 By fayth * Iacob when he was a dying blessed bothe the sonnes of Ioseph and * leanyng on the end of his staffe worshiped God 22 By faith * Ioseph when he dyed made mention of the departyng of the children of Israel and gaue commandement of his bones 23 * By fayth Moses when he was borne was hid thre moneths of his pareÌts because they sawe he was a proper childe nether feared they the Kings * commandement 24 By fayth * Moses when he was come to age refused to be called the sonne of Pharaos daughter 25 And chose rather to suffer aduersitie with the people of God then to enioy the pleasures of sinnes for a ceason 26 Estemyng the rebuke of Christ greater riches then the treasures of Egypt for he had respect vnto the recompense of the reward 27 By fayth he forsoke Egypt and feared not the fiercenes of the Kyng for he endured as he that sawe him which is inuisible 28 Through faith he ordeined the * Passeouer and the effusion of blood left he that destroyed the first borne shulde touche them 29 By fayth they * passed through the red sea as by drye lande whiche the Egyptians had assayed to do they were drowned 30 By fayth the * walles of Iericho fell downe afterthei were coÌpassed about seuen dayes 31 By ãâã the harlot * Rahab peryshed not with them whiche obeyed not when * she had receiued the spies peaceably 32 And what shall I more saye for the tyme wolde be to shorte for me to tell of * Gedeon of * Barac and of * Sampson and of * Iephte also of * Dauid and Samuel and of the Prophetes 33 Which through faith subdued kingdomes wroght righteousnes obteined the promises stopped the mouthes oflyons 34 Quenched the violeÌce of fyre escaped the edge of the sworde of weake were made stronge waxed valiant in battell turned to flight the armies of the aliantes 35 The women receiued their dead raised to life other also were racked and wolde not be deliuered that they might receiue a better resurrection 36 And others haue bene tryed by mockings and scourgyngs yea more ouer by boundes and prisonment 37 They were stoned they were
able to saue and to destroye * Who art thou that iud gest another man 13 Go to no we ye that saye To daye or to morowe we wyll go into suche a citie and continue there a yere and bye and sel and get gaine 14 And yet ye can not tell what shal be to moro we For what is your lyfe It is euen a vapour that appeareth for a litle time and af ter warde vanisheth away 15 For that ye ought to say * If the Lord wyll and If we liue we wil do this or that 16 But no we ye reioyce in your boastyngs all suche reioycing is euil 17 Therefore to him that knoweth howe to do wel and doeth it not to him it is sinne CHAP. V. 2 He threateneth the wicked riche men 7 Exhoiteth vnto pacience 12 To beware of swearyng 16 One to knowledge his fautes to another 20 And one to labour to bring another to the trueth 1 GO to nowe ye ryche men wepe and howle for your miseries that shall come vpon you 2 Your riches are corrupt and your garments are moth eaten 3 Your Golde and Siluer is cankred and the rust of them shal be a wytnes agaynste you and shall eat your fleshe as it were fyre * Ye haue heaped vp treasure for the last dayes 4 Beholde the hyre of the laborers which haue reaped your fields whiche is of you kept backe by fraude cryeth and the cryes of them which haue reaped are entred into the eares of the Lord of hostes 5 Ye haue liued in pleasure on the earthe and in wantoÌnes Ye haue nourished your hearts as in a day of slaughter 6 Ye haue condemned and haue killed the iuste and he hathe not resisted you 7 Be pacient therefore brethren vnto the commyng of the Lorde Beholde the housband man waiteth for the precious frute of the earth and hathe longe pacience for it vntill he receiue the former and the latter rayne 8 Be ye also pacient therefore and setle your hearts for the commyng of the Lord draweth nere 9 Grudge not one against another brethren lest ye be condemned beholde the iudge standeth before the dore 10 Take my brethren the Prophetes for an ensample of suffering aduersitie and of long pacience whiche haue spoken in the Name of the Lord. 11 Beholde we count them blessed whiche endure Ye haue heard of the pacience of Iob ãâã haue knowen what end the Lord made For the Lord is verie pitiful and mercifull 12 But before all thyngs my brethren * sweare not nether by heauen nor by earth nor by anie other othe but let your yea be yea and your naye naye lest ye fall into condemnation 13 Is anie among you afflicted Let him pray Is anie merie Let him sing 14 Is anie sicke among you Let hym call for the Elders of the Churche and let them praye for him and anoint hym with * oyle in the Name of the Lord. 15 And the prayer of fayth shal saue the sicke and the LORDE shall rayse him vp and if he haue committed sinne it shal be forgiuen hym 16 Acknowledge your fautes one to another and pray one for another that ye may be hea led for the prayer of a ryghteous man auaileth muche if it be feruent 17 * Helias was a man subiect to lyke passions as we are and he prayed earnestlye that it myght not rayne and it rained not on the earth for thre yeres and six moneths 18 And he prayed agayne and the heauen gaue rayne and the earth broght forthe her frute 19 Brethren if anye of you hathe erred frome the trueth and some man hathe conuerted hym 20 Let him knowe that he whiche hathe conuerted the sinner from goyng astraye out of his way shal saue a soule from death aÌd shal hide a multitude of sinnes THE FIRST EPISTLE general of Peter THE ARGVMENT HE exhorteth the faithful to denie them selues and to contemne the worlde that being deliuered from all carnal affections and impediments they may more spedely atteine to the heaueÌlie kingdome of Christ whereunto we are called by the grace of God reueiled to vs in his Sonne and haue already receiued it by faith possessed it by hope and are therein confirmed by holines of life And to the intent this faith shulde not faint seing Christ contemned and reiected almost of the whole worlde he declareth that this is nothyng els but the accomplishyng of the Scriptures whiche testifie that he shulde be the stombling stone to the reprobate and the sure fundation of saluation to the faithfull therefore he exhorteth them courageously to go forwarde considering what they were and to what dignitie God hathe called them After he entreateth particular points teaching subiects how to obey their gouernours and seruants their masters how maried folkes ought to behaue them selues And because it is appointed for all that are godlie to suffre persecutions he sheweth them what good yssue their asflictions shal haue and contrariewise what punishment God reserueth for the wicked Last of all he teacheth how the ministers ought to behaue them selues forbidding them to vsurpe autoritie o ãâã the Churche also that yong men ought to be modest and apt to learne and so endeth with an exhortation CHAP. I. 2 He sheweth that through the abundant mercie of God we are elect and regenerate to a liuelie hope 7 And how faith must be tried 10 That the saluation in Christ is no newes but a thing prophecied of olde 13 He exhorteth them to a godlie conuersation forasmuche as they are now borne a newe by the worde of God 1 PETER an Apostle of Iesus Christ to the strangers that dwel here and there throughout Pontus Galacia Cappadocia Asia Bithynia 2 Elect according to the fore knowledge of God the Father vnto sanctificatió of the spirit through obedience and sprinkling of the blood of Iesus Christ Grace and peace be multiplied vnto you 3 * Blessed be God euen the Father of our Lord Iesus Christ whiche accordyng to his abundant mercie hathe begotten vs againe vnto a liuelie hope by the resurrection of Iesus Christ from the dead 4 To an inheritance immortall and vndefiled and that fadeth not away reserued in heauen for you 5 Whiche are kept by the power of GOD through faith vnto saluation whiche is prepared to be shewed in the last time 6 Wherein ye reioyce thogh now for a ceason if nede require ye are in heauines through manifolde tentations 7 That the triall of your faith being muche more precious then golde that perisheth thogh it be tried with fyre might be fouÌde vnto your praise and honour and glorie at the appearing of Iesus Christ. 8 Whome ye haue not sene and yet loue him in whome now thogh ye se him not yet do you beleue and reioyce with ioye vnspeakeable and glorious 9 Receiuing the
God was opened in heauen and there was sene in his Temple the Arke of his couenaÌt and there were lightnings and voyces and thoÌdrings and earthquake and muche haile CHAP. XII 1 There appeareth in heauen a woman clothed with the sunne 7 Michael fighteth with the dragon which persecureth the woman 11. The victorie is gotten to the comfort of the faithful 1 ANd there appeared a great wonder in heauen A woman clothed with the iunne and the moo ne was vnder her fete and vpon her head a crowne of twelue starres 2 And she was with childe and cryed trauailing in birth and was pained readie to be ãâã 3 And there appeared another wonder in heauen for beholde a great red dragon hauing seuen heades and ten hornes and seuen crownes vpon his heads 4 And his taile drue the third parte of the star res of heauen and cast them to the earth And the dragon stode before the woman which was readie to be deliuered to deuoure her childe when she had broght it forthe 5 So she broght forthe a man childe whiche shulde rule all nations with a * rod of yron and her sonne was taken vp vnto God and to this throne 6 And the woman fled into wildernes where she hathe a place prepared of God that they shulde fede her there a thousand two hundreth and threscore dayes 7 And there was a battel in heauen Michael and his Angels foght against the dragon and the dragon foght and his Angels 8 But they preuailed not nether was their pla ce founde anie more in heauen 9 And the great dragon that olde serpent called the deuil and Satan was cast out which deceiueth all the worlde he was euen cast into the earth and his Angels were cast out with him 10 TheÌ I heard a loude voyce saying Now is saluation in heauen and strength and the kingdome of our God and the power of his Christ for the accuser of our brethren is cast downe which accused them before our God day and night 11 But they ouercame him by the blood of the Lambe and by the worde of their testi monie and they loued not their liues vnto the death 12 Therefore reioyce ye heauens and ye that dwell in theÌ Wo to the inhabitants of the earth and of the sea for the deuil is come downe vnto you which hathe great wrath knowing that he hathe but a short time 13 And when the dragon sawe that he was cast vnto the earth he persecuted the womaÌ which had broght forthe the man childe 14 But to the woman were giuen two winges of a greate egle that she myght flie into the wildernes into ther place where she nourished for a time and times and halfe a time from the presence of the serpent 15 And the serpent cast out of his mouth was water after the woman lyke a flood that he myght cause her to be caryed awaye of the flood 16 But the earth holpe the woman and the earth opened her mouth and swalowed vp the flood whiche the dragon had cast out of his mouth 17 Then the dragon was wroth with the woman and wente and made warre wyth the remnant of her sede whiche kepe the commandements of God and haue the testimonie of Iesus Christ. 18 And I stode on the sea sand CHAP. XIII 1.8 The beast deceiueth the reprobate 2. 4. 12. And is confirmeth by another 17 The priuiledge of the beastes marke 1 ANd I sawe a beast rise out of the sea hauing seuen heads and ten hornes and vpon his hornes were ten crownes and vppon his heades the name of blasphemie 2 And the beast which I sawe was lyke a leoparde and hys fete lyke a beares and hys mouth as the mouth of a lion and the dragon gaue him his power and his throne and great autoritie 3 And I sawe one of hys heades as it were wounded to death but his deadlie wounde was healed and al the worlde wondred and followed the beast 4 And they worshipped the dragon which gaue power vnto the beast and they worship ped the beast sayinge Who is lyke vnto the beast who is able to warre with ãâã 5 And there was giuen vnto hym a ãâã that spake greate thynges and blasphemies and power was giuen vnto hym to do two and fortie moneths 6 And he opened his mouth vnto blasphemie against God to blaspheme his Name aÌdhis tabernacle and them that dwel in heauen 7 And it was giuen vnto hym to make warre wyth the Saintes and to ouercomethem and power was giuen him ouer euerie kinred and tongue and nation 8 Therefore all that d well vpon the earth shal worship hym whose names are not * writen in the Boke of life of the Lambe whiche was slaine froÌ the beginning of the worlde 9 If anie man haue an eare let him heare 10 If anie lead into captiuitie he shal go into captiuitie ifanie kill with a sworde he must be killed by a sworde here is the pacience and the faith of the Saintes 11 And I behelde another beast commyng vp out of the earth whiche had two hornes like the LaÌbe but he spake like the dragoÌ 12 And he did all that the first beast colde do before him and he caused the earth aÌd them whiche dwel therein to worship the firste beast whose deadlie wounde was healed 13 And he did great wonders so that he made fyre to come down froÌ heauen on the earth in the sightof men 14 And deceiued them that dwel on the earth by the signes which were permitted to him to do in the sight of the beast saying to theÌ that dwel on the earth that they shuld make the image of the beaste whiche had the wounde of a sworde and did liue 15 And it was permitted to him to giue ãâã spirit vnto the image of the beast so that the image of the beaste shulde speake and shulde cause that as manie as wolde not worshyp the image of the beast shulde be killed 16 And he made al bothe small and great riche and poore fre aÌd bonde ãâã receiue a marke in their right hand or in their forheads 17 And that no man might bye or sell saue he that had the marke or the name of the beast or the nomber of his name 18 Heare is wi dome Let hym that hathe wit count the nomber of the beaste for it is the nomber of a man and his nomber is six hun dreth threscore and six CHAP. XIIII 1 The notable companie of the LaÌbe 6 One Angel annouÌ ãâã the Gospel 8 Another the fal of Babylon 9 And the ãâã warneth to flee from the beast 13 Of their blessed nes which dye in the Lord. 18 Of the Lords haruest 1 THen Iloked and lo a
the tribe of Iudah Iudg. 1. 4 The Canaanite ãâã the Israelites Nomb. 14. 45 The Canaanites that remained were as thornes to Israel Iudg. 2. 3 The Canaanitish woman Mat. 15. 22 The Candlesticke and facion thereof Exod. 25. 31 37. 17. 40. 24 ãâã vnbeieuing citie Mat. 11. 23 The Caphtorims destroyed the auims Deut. 2. 23 The Captiuitie of the Kyngs of Iudah fore spoken 2. Kyng 20. Ierem. 16. 13 and 20. 4 The Cares of this worlde do choke vp The worde Mar. 4. 19 Cartes of yron in vse among the Canaanites Iudg. 1. 19 4. 3 God Caryed the children of Israel vpon egles wings Exod. 19. 4 ¶ Cendebeus captaine of the sea coast 1. Macc. 15. 38 The Centurion and his faith Mat. 8. 5 God reiecteth the iewish Ceremonies Isa. 1. 11. 66. Ebr. 10. 5 The decre of Augustus Cesar. Luk. 2. 1 ¶ Chamois Deut. 14. 5 Eliiah the Charet of Israel 2. Kyng 2. 12 To make him self Chaste for the kingdome of heauen Mat. 19. 12 Blessed is the man that god Chastiseth Iob. 5. 17 Chastise thy childe betime Prou. 13. 24. 19. 18. 22. 16 Chastitie is the gift of god Wis. 8. 21 Chemosh the abomination of moab 1. King 11. 7 The Cherubims kepe the way of the tre of life Gen. 3. 24 Offend not litle Children Mat. 18. 6 The rodde of correction for Children Prou. 22. 15. Ecclesiasti 30. 13 The Angels of litle Children Mat. 11. 10 Childrenas concernyng maliciousnes and not in vnderstandyng 1. Cor. 14. 20 Children broght to Christ. Matth. 19. 13. Christ receiueth the Childe into his armes Mar. 9. 36 We are the Children of god by faith Gal. 3. 26 Childrens obedience to their parents Ephes. 6. 1 Chorazin a citie that Christ proueth for her vnbelief Mat. 11. 21 Paul a Chosen vessel Act. 9. 15 Christ conceiued Luk. 1. 35. Isborne Luk. 2. 7. is circumcised Luk. 2. 21. is baptized Mat. 3. 15. sent to preache libertie to the captiues Isa. 61. Luk. 2. 31. and 4. 43. and 5. 52. he speaketh the wordes of God Iohn 3. 34. he preacheth that the kingdome of the Messias is at hand and exhorteth to repeÌtance and to beleue the Gospel ãâã 4. 17. 9. 35. he is hungrie Mat. 4. 2. he is wearie Ioh. 4. 6. he is pore Mat. 8. 20. he entreth into Ierusalem ridyng vpon an asse Mat. 21. 7. he is solde by Iudas Mat. 26. 14. he is buffeted Mat. 26. 67. he is deliuered to be crucified Mat. 27. 26. He prayeth for then that persecute him Luk. 23. 34. he yeldeth vp the gost Mat. 27. 50. His resurrection Mat. 28. He is caryed vp into heauen Mark 16. 19. Luk. 24. 51 The coming of Christ fore spoken NoÌ 24. 17. Isa. 40. 10 Christ God eternal Iohn 1 Christ greater then Dauid Matth. 22. 44 Christ promised to Adam Gen. 3. ãâã to Abraham Gen. 12. 3 Christ sent of god Iohn 8. 42 Christ sent to saue the Iewes Matth. 15. 24 Christ without sinne 1. Pet. 2. 22 False Christs and false Prophetes do great miracles Mat. 24. 5. 24 Christiane so named first in Antiochia Act. 11. 26. Christians are fre 1. Pet. 2. 16. Iohn 8. 32 Christians hated of the worlde Matth 10. 22. Luk. 21. 17 The Church is the house of god 1. Tim. 3. 15 The Church of god is not contentious 1. Cor. 11. 16 ¶ The Apostles forbid the gentiles to be Circumcised Act. 15. 28 Circumcise the foresk inne of the heart Deut. 10. 16. 30. 6. Rom. 2. 29. Colos. 2. 11. Paul Circumciseth timothie Act. 16. 3 God Circumciseth our hearts and why Deut. 30. 6 Abraham commanded to Circumcise his familie Gen. 17. 9 Circumcision and vncircumcision are nothing 1. Cor. 7. 19 Circumcision is seruitude Gal. 2. 4 The seconde CircuÌcision vnder ioshua Iosh. 5. 2 We haue no continuing Citie here ebr 13. 14 ¶ None Cleane before god Iob. 25. 4 Cleopatra the daughter of Ptolomeus 1. Macc. 10. 57 The cloude filleth the house of the lord 1. King 8. 10 The renting of the Clothes a signe of greatheauines Iosh. 7. 6. Matt. 26. 65. 2. Sam. 1. 11 ¶ To heape Coles vpon the head of his enemie Rom. 12. 20 One ought to Comfort another 1. Thes. 4. 18. 5. 14 The Comforter is promised Ioh. 14. 16 15. 26 16. 7 The ãâã Commandements Deut. 5. 7 Teache thy childe the commaÌdements of God Deut. 6. 7 Commandements of men being contrarie to gods are not to be receiued Tit. 1. 14 The comming of Christ in the daye of Iudgement Matth. 24. 30. 2. Pet. 3. 10. Isa. 3. 14. 13. 9 The Commyng of christ with his Aungels Mat. 16. 27 The Commyng of the Lord. Malac. 4. 1 Isa. 35. 4. 62. 11 The Commune vse of goods in the primatiue Churche Act. 2. 44 The worde Concubine for wife Iudg. 19. 2 Ashame not to Confesse christ 2. Tim. 1. 8 To Confesse god for to praise hym is oft times in the Psalmes To Confesse that Iesus is Christ is the gift of God Mat. 16. 17 Remission to them that Confesse their sinnes 1. Iohn 1. 9 Moses Confesseth to God the sinne of the people Exod. 32. 31 Confession of sinnes commanded to the priests of the Iewes Leuit. 16. 21. Confession of thy sinnes to God 1. King 8. 47. Psal. 32. 5 Cursed is he that hathe his Confidence in man Iere. 17. 5 God is not the autor of Confusion but of peace 1. Cor. 14. 33 Who ought to be excluded out of the Congregation of the Lord. Deut. 23. 1 The Conscience of the wicked is alwayes feareful Prou. 28. 1 Christ the Consolation of Israel Luk. 2. 25 The good Conuersation of christians Phil. 1. 27. 3. 17 The ãâã of saincts shulde prouoke vs to followe their faith Ebr. 13. 7 Contemners of the worde of god shal be punished 1. Sam. 2. 30. Isa. 28. 14 Cornelius the captaine Act. 10. 1. Brotherlie correction Prouer. 27. 5. Mat. 18. 15 They that refuse correction are threatned of God Leuit. 26. 22 The Correction of the Lord. Ebr. 12. 5. It is permitted to Correct thy brother but to hate him is forhidden Leuit. 19. 17 Circumcision the Couenant of God Gen. 17. 13 The Couenant of god with noah Gen. 9. 11 Couetousnes is idolatrie Col. 3. 5 Couetousnes is insatiable Pro. 27. 20 Couetousnes the roote of all euill 1. Tim. 6. 10 Couetousnes to be auoided Pro. 15. 16. Isa. 3. 12. Iere. 8. 10. Ephes. 5. 3 Be of good Courage in affliction Ioh. 16. 33 The Counsels of god are vnsearcheable Rom. 11. 33 The Israelites aske Counsel of god in their affaires Iudg. 1. 1. 20. 18. 23. 1. Sam. 10. 22. and herein they vse the helpe of the Prophetes 1. Sam. 9. 9. 2. King 22. 13 God breaketh the Counsels of the heathen Psal. 33. 10 Courteousnes required in christians Ephes. 4. 32. 1. Cor. 13. 4 Zealous phinehas killeth Cozbi the midianitish harlot Nomb. 25. 15 ¶
23 31. infirmities come vpon vs for our sinnes Ioh. 5. 14 the leuites Inheritance Deut. 10. 9 euerie one shal beare his owne Iniquitie Deut. 24. 16 iniuries ought to be forgotten leu 19. 18 innocent as concerning euil wisevnto that which is good Rom. 16. 19 none is Innocent before god exod 34 7 thre things are Insatiable Prouer. 30. 15. wicked Inuentions Deut. 28. 20 Christ is our Intercessour Rom. 8. 34 Ioab and his doings 2. Sam. 2. 13. 11. 14 19. 1. King 21. 5 ioashpreserued through the helpe of his aunt iehosheba 2. King 11. 2 ioash the father of gideon Iud g. 6. 29 ioash the sonne of ahaziah and Iehoash the sonne of iehoahaz 2. King 11. and 14. Iob an example of pacience Iam. 5. 11. iochebed the wise of amram Exod. 6. 20 iohanan Iere. 40. 41 42 43 iohn baptist exhorteth to repentance Mat. 3. 2. Iohn baptist is buryed Mat. 14. 12 iohn marke the minister of paul and bar nabas Act. 12. 25. ionathan a gouernour of the iewes 1. Mac. 9 11 12. ionath an the sonne of saul his doings 1. Sam. 14 18 19 20 31 ioseph and his doings from the 30. of Gene. vnto the. 50 ioseph of arimathea Mat. 27. 57 ioses called barnabas Act. 4. 36. the good king Iosiah his doings 1. King 13. 2. 2. King 21. 24. 22. 1 ioshua and his doings Exod. 24. 13. 32. 17. Nomb. 11 28 13 14. Deut. 1. 38. and throughout his whole boke Iothan the sonne of Ierubbaal Iudges 9. 5. the iourne is of the children of Israel Nomb. 33 ¶ Iphtah and his doings Iudg. 11. and 12 ¶ Isaiah the prophet 2. King 19. 20. 20 his visions 1 2. 6. Ishai dauids father ruth 4. 22. 1. Sam. 16. 11. ish-bosheth and his doings 2. Sam. 2. 3. 4. ishmael and his life Gen. 16 and 17 21. 25. why iaak ob was called israel Gene. 32. 28 true Israelites who rom 9. 6. carnal Israel described hose 9. 7 israel sinned not of ignorance Rom. 10. 19. ¶ Iubal the inuentour of the harpe Gen. 4. 21 the Iubile leuit 25. 10 the rest of Iudah led away to babel 2. King 25. 11 iudah leahs sonne Gen. 29. 35 of Iudasmaccabeus read the bokes of maccabies iudas that betrayed Christ. Ioh. 18. 2 his repentance Mat. 27. 3. he slewe him self and brast in the middes Act. 1. 18 the general Iudgement Isa. 2. 19 and 26. 11. the signes that shal come before it Math. 24. 29 Iudgement for affliction 1. pet 4. 17 iudgement beginneth at the house of God 1. Pet. 4. 17 Gods Iudgements are a great deapth Psal. 36. 6 the office of a Iudge Exod. 23. 6 Speake not euil of Iudges Exod. 22. 28 What maner of men ought to be Iudges Exod. 18. 21. 23. 2 Iudge not another Mat. 7. 1. 12. 7 the Iudge of all the worlde Gen. 18. 25 a Iudge ought not to haue anie respect of persones Leuit. 19. 15 iudges are called gods Exod. 22. 8 Psal. 82. 6. the Iudges gaue sentence according to moseslaw Deut. 17. 11 iustified by faith Rom. 5. 1. not by workes Gal. 3. 10 We are Iustified or condemned by our wordes Mat. 12. 37 iustified what it signifieth Tit. 3. 4. actes 13. 38 ¶ Izhak the sonne of Abraham and his doings Gen. 21. vnto the. 28 K NAtiuitie of Kain and his doings Ge. 4. 1. 2. 1. Ioh. 3. 12. ¶ Keilah a citie deliuered by dauid 1. Sam. 23. 1 God Kepeth his as the apple of the eye Deut. 32. 10 keturah the wife of abraham Gen. 25. 1 the Keyes of the kingdome of heauen promised Matt. 16. 19. Are giuen by christ to his apostles Ioh. 20. 23 ¶ Man ought to kepe him froÌ all Kinde of euil 1. Thess. 5. 22 the rigour of a King 1. Sam. 8. 11 what is required in Kings Deu. 17. 15 what is the honour of Kings Prou. 25. 2. the Kingdome of christ eternal Isay. 9. 7 Luk. 1. 33 the Kingdome of heauen suffreth violence Mat. 11. 12 the Kingdome within vs. Luk. 17. 21 kiriath-arba a citie called also hebron Iosh. 14. 15 kiriath sepher a citie called also debir Iosh. 15. 15 paul Kissed of the faithful Act. 20. 37. the holie Kisse of Christians Rom. 16. 16 2. Corin. 13. 12 ¶ God hathe not cast away his people which he Knewe before Rom. 11. 2 Whome God Knewe before theÌ he ordeined to be like facioned vnto the image of his sonne Rom. 8. 29 to Knowe god and Iesus Christ whome he hathe sent is life eternal Ioh. 17. 3. the Knowledge of saluation Luk. 1. 77 ¶ Kohath and his sonnes Exode 5. 18. Iosh. 21. 5 korah for his rebellion is striken of god Nomb. 16 the red Know Nomb. 19. L LAban the brother of rebekah his doings Gen. 24. 29 the Laborers are few Mat. 9. 37 man appointed to labour Gen. 3. 19. he that doeth not Labour ought not to eat 2. Thess. 3. 10 we ought to liue by our Labours Prou. 5. 15. We ought to Labour with our hands 1. Thess. 4. 11 the Ladder that iaak ob sawe in his drea me Gen. 28. 12 Christ calleth to him theÌ that are Laden Mat. 11. 28 the pascal Lambe Exod. 12. 3 Iesus the Lambe of God Iohn 1. 29 Lamech and his two wiues Gen. 4. 19. 5. 26 the Lame from his mothers wombe is healed Actes 3. 7 the Last shal be the first Mat. 19. 30. wo to them that Laugh and why Luk. 6. 25 the Law ayoke Act. 15. 10 the end of the Law Christ. Rom. 10. 4 by the Law cometh knowledge of sinne Rom. 3. 20 the Law giuen to the lawles 1. Ti. 1. 9. the Law is giuen vnto the people Exod. 20. Deut. 5 the Law not giuen for the iuste Galat. 5. 18. the Law our schole master to bring vs to christ gal 3. 24 before the Law sinne was not counted sinne rom 5. 13 the Law writen in the heart of the faithful Ebr. 8. 10. Lazarus raised vp Ioh. 11 12. Lazarus sicke Ioh. 11. 4 ¶ Lea conceiueth Gen. 29. 32 the Leaper healed by faith mat 8. 2. the ten Leapers healed Luk. 17. 12. the iudging of Leprosies Deut. 24. 8. Leuit. 13. 14. the Law of Lending Exod. 22. 14. lend to the nedie Deut. 15. 8. Mat. 5. 42. the Letter killeth and the spirit giueth life 2. Cor. 3. 6 purge the olde Leuaine 1. Cor. 5. 7 leuaine for wicked doctrine Mat. 16. 6 Leuites elected to the ministerie Nomb 3. 45. Leuithe sonne of iaakob Gene. 29. 34. he slayeth the sichimites Ge. 34. 25 ¶ Paul vseth not his Libertie 1. Cor. 9. 4. libertie giueth not occasion to the flesh Gal. 5. 13. the Libertie of the spirit 2. Cor. 3. 17. the breuitie of mans Life Psalm 90. Iob. 7. to finde his Life and to lose it Mat. 10. 39 our Life Christ. Ioh. 14. 6. Colos. 3. 4
they ãâã hym a right so ãâã did he preserue and prosper them i Or grandmother and herein he shewed that ãâã lacked ãâã for she ought to haued ãâã bothe by the ãâã and by the Lawe of God but he ga ue place to foolishe pitie and wolde also seme after a ãâã to satisfie the Law k VVhich partely came through lacke of zeale in hym partelye through the negligence of hys officers and part ly by the ãâã cion of the people that all were not taken away l Because that God was called the God of Israél by reason of his promes to Iaakob therefore Israélis some time taken for Iudah because Iudah was hys chief people m In respect of his predecessors a VVho reigned after Nadab the sonne of Ieroboam b He fortified ãâã with walles and ditches it was a citie in Beniamin nere to ãâã â Or Darmasek c He thoght to re pulse his aduersa rie by an vnlawfull meanes that is by seking helpe of infideles as they that ãâã Turkes amitie thinkyng therby to make theÌ selues more strong â Or Prophet Chap. 14 9. 2. Mac. 9 5. 12 22. â Ebr. prison house d Thus in ãâã of turning to God by repentan ce he disdained the admonicion of the Prophet and punished him as the wicked do wheÌ they be tolde of their fautes â ãâã goutie or swollen â Or to the top of his head e God plagued his rebellion and hereby declareth that it is nothing to beginne wel except we so coÌtinue to the end that is zealous of Gods glorie put ãâã whole trust in him f He sheweth that it is in vaine to seke to the Phisitians except first we seke to God to purge our sinnes which are the chief cause of all our diseases after vse the help of the phisitian as a meane by whome GOD worketh a That is his vertuest meaning be fore he had committed with Bathshéba and against ãâã b Soght not helpe at strange gods â Ebr. Worke. c He gaue him selfe wholy to serue the Lord. d He knewe it was in vaine to professe religion except such were appointed which colde instruct the people in the same and had au toritie to put away all idolatrie e Thus God prospereth all suche that with a pure heart seke his glo rie and kepeth their enemies in feare that thei caÌ not be able to execute their rage against theÌ â Ebr. in his hand Or next to him f Meaning which was a Nazarian g That is they were as his ordi narie garde 1. King 22 ãâã a For Iorám Iehoshaphats sonne maried Ahabs daughter b That is ãâã third yere 1. King ãâã c To recouer it out of the hands of the ãâã d Heare the adui se of some Prophet to knowe whether it be Gods wil. e VVhiche were the Prophetes of Báal ãâã that the wicked esteme not but flatterers suche as wil beare with their inordinate affections f Yet the true mi ãâã of GOD ought not to cea se to do their due tie thogh the wic ked magistrates ãâã ãâã abide theÌ to speake the ãâã g Meaning that he ought not to refuse to heare ãâã that was of God h That is in their ãâã ãâã apparel i Read 1. King 22 11. k Thinking that where a foure ãâã dreth ãâã had ãâã in one thing that he being but one man and in least estimation durst not gaine say it l He ãâã this by ãâã of the false ãâã as the ãâã ãâã perceiued m He ãâã how the people shulde be dispersed Aháb steane n Meaning his Angels â Or deceiue o That is the Lord. p So they that wil not ãâã the trueth God sendeth strong delusion that they shulde beleue lyes 2. Thess 2 ãâã q By this ãâã his ãâã hypocrisie was discouered thus the ãâã ãâã of the ãâã which they haue not and declare t eir malice against them in whome the true Spirit is r Kepe him streict ly in ãâã and ãâã him fele hungre and thirst â Or ãâã s Thus the wicked thinke by their owne ãâã to escape Gods ãâã which he threatneth by his word r He ãâã to the Lord by acknow ledging his ãâã in going with this wicked King to warre against the worde of the Lord by his Pro phet and also by ãâã ãâã for the same â ãâã in his ãâã or ãâã â Or betwene the habergine u He ãâã his hurt that his souldiers might fight more couragiously â Ebr. in peace a He declareth that the wrath and iudgement of God is oueral suche that supporte the wicked and rather shewe not in dede that they are enemies to all suche as hate the Lord. â Ebr. wrath froÌ the Lord. b He visited all his ãâã and ãâã hys people frome ãâã to the know ledge of the true God c Bothe to preser ãâã ãâã if you do iustely or to punish you if you do ãâã ãâã ãâã 10. 17. d He wil declare by thes ãâã of the punishmeÌt ãâã he ãâã all ãâã Iob. 4 15. Act. 10. ãâã Rom. 2. 11. Gal. 2. 6. Ephe 6 9. Col. ãâã 26. ãâã ãâã e The ãâã aÌd ãâã whiche ãâã ãâã ãâã to the ãâã of the ãâã f ãâã is to trye ãâã ãâã ur ther was done at ãâã or els ãâã ãâã Nomb. 35 11. ãâã 4. ãâã g Meaning that God ãâã punish them ãâã ãâã if they wold not execut ãâã right h Shalbe ãâã o ãâã of the pu ãâã ãâã of ãâã easine i They shal haue ãâã ãâã of ãâã causes k ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã a That is which ãâã the Ammonites in langage apparel The ãâã thinke that they were the ãâã but as mai ãâã by the ãâã ãâã they were the ãâã of mouÌt Seir. b Called the dead sea where God ãâã the ãâã cities for sinne c This declareth what the ãâã of the godlie is whiche is as a pricke to stirre them to prayer aÌd to depend on the Lord where as it moueth the wicked ether to seke after world ly meanes aÌd po licies or els to fal into despaire d He ãâã his prayer vpon Goddes power whereby he is able to helpe aÌd also on his mercie which he wil continue toward his for as muche as he hathe once chosen them and begonne to shew his graces to warde them e Meaning warre whiche commeth by Gods iuste iudgements for our sinnes f That is it is here called vpon and thou declarest thy presence and fauour 1. King 8. ãâã Chap. 6. 28. Deut. 2. 9. Nehem. 13. 3. g VVe onely put our truste in thee and waite for our deliuerance from heauen h That is before the Arke of the couenant i VVhiche was moued by the Spirit of God to prophecie k They fight againste God and not agaynst you therefore he wil fight for you Exod. 14. ãâã â Or ãâã l Declaryng his faith and obedieÌ ce to the worde of the Lord and giuing thankes for the deliueran ãâã
Iob vseth all kindes of persuasion with GOD that he myght staye his hand n After all ãâã saith ãâã forthe and leadeth ãâã to ãâã ãâã it was not in suche perfection that he colde ãâã him selfe ãâã ãâã with God because that he stil tryed his faith o That is I shal be dead a He ãâã that their wordes which wold diminish anye thing frome the ãâã of God is but a puft of winde that ãâã sheth away b That is hathe rewarded them accordynge to their iniquitie meanyng that Iob ought to be warned by the example of hys children that he offend not God c That is if thou turne betyme whiles God calleth thee to repentance d Thogh the beginnyngs be not ãâã pleasaunt as thou woldest desire yet in the ãâã thou shalt haue sufficient occasion to content thy self e He willeth Iob to examine all antiquitie and he shall ãâã it true whiche he here ãâã f Meaning that it is not ynough to haue the expe rience of ãâã selues but to be con firmed by the ex amples of them that ãâã before vs. g As a rush can not grow with out ãâã so can not the hypocrite because he hath not ãâã which is ãâã with Gods Spirit h VVhiche is to day and to morow swept away i He compareth the iuste to a tre which althoghit be remoued out of one place vnto another yet florishetht so the affliction of the godlie turneth to their profire k That is so that there remaine nothing there to proue whether the ãâã had growen there or no. l To be planted in another place where it may growe ãâã pleasure m If thou be godlie he will giue thee occasion to reioyce and if not thyne ãâã shal increase a Iob here ãâã reth to the point of Eliphaz Bil dads oracion ãâã chiÌg the iustice of God his iÌnoceÌ cie ãâã god to be iÌfinit in iui slice maÌ to be nothing iÌ respect b Of a thousand ãâã which god colde laye to his charge maÌ caÌnot answer him one 1a He declareth what is the infir mitie of man by the mightie and incompreheÌsible power that is in God shewing what the colde do if he wolde set forthe his power 1b The seare the na mes of certeine starres whereby he meaneth that all starres bothe knowen and vn knowen are at his ãâã 1c I am not able to comprehend his workes whiche are commune daily before mine eyes muche Iesse in those things which are hid secret f He sheweth that wheÌ God doeth execute his pow er he doeth it iustely for asmuch as none can controle him g God wil not be appeased for ought that man can laye for him self for his iustification h That is all the reasons that meÌ can laie to appro ue their cause i How shuld I be able to answer him by ãâã whereby be noteth his friends that albeit they were eloquent in talke yet they felt not in heart that which they spake k Meaning in his owne opinioÌ signifying that ãâã ãâã flatter himself to be righteous whiche before God is abomina cion l Whiles I am in my pangs I can not but ãâã forthe into many in conueniences althogh I knowe stil that God is iust m I am not able to fele my sinnes so great as I fele the weight of his plagues this he speaketh to condemne his dulnes to iustifie God n After he hathe accused his owne weakenes he coÌtinueth to iustifie God and his power o If I wolde staÌd in mine owne de fence yet God hathe iuste cause to condemne me it he examine mi ne heart and con science p If God punish according to his iustice he wil destroye as wel them that are counted perfite as them that are wicked q To wit the wicked r This is spoken according to our apprehension as thogh he wolde say If God destroye but the wicked as chap. 5. 3 why shulde he suffer the innocents to be so long tormented by them s That they can not se to do iustice t That can shewe the contrary u I thinke not to fall into these affections but my sorowes bring me to these manifolde infirmities and my conscience condemneth me x why doeth not God destroye me at once thus he speaketh according to the infirmitie of the flesh y Thogh I seme neuer so pure in mine owne eyes yet all is but corruption before God z whatsoeuer I woldevse to couer my filthines with shal disclose me so muche more a which might make an accorde betwene God and me speaking of impaciencie and yet consessing God to be iust in punishing him b Signifying that Gods iudgements kepe him in awe a I am more like to a deadmaÌ then to one that ãâã b I wil make an ample declaratioÌ of my torments accusing my self and not God c He wolde not that God shulde procede against him by his secret iustice but by the ordinarie meanes that he punisheth others d Is it agreable to thy iustice to do me wrong e Wilt thou be without compassion f Wilt thou gratifie the wicked and condeÌne me g Doest thou this of ignoráce h Art thou inconstant chaÌge able as the times to daie a friend to morowe an enemie i By affliction thou kepest me as in a prison and restraynest me from doing euil nether can any set meat libertie k In these eight verses following he describeth the mercie of God in the Wonderful creation of man and there on groundeth that God shulde not shew himself rigorous against him l As brittel as a pot of clay m That is reason and vnderstaÌding and many other giftes whereby man excelleth all earth he creatures n That is thy fátherlie care and prouideÌce where by thou preseruest me and with out the which I shulde perish streight way o Thogh I be not fully able to coÌpreheÌd these things yet I ãâã nedes confesse that it is so p I Wil alway Walke in feare and humilitie knowing that none is iuste before thee q Iob being sore assalted in this battel betwene the flesh the Spirit brasketh out into these affections wishing rather short dayes then long peins r That is ãâã of diseases in great abundaÌ ceshewing that God hathe infini temeanes to punish ãâã s We ãâã that God ãâã leaue of his ãâã considering ãâã great miserie ãâã ãâã of his life t He speaketh thus in the persone of a sinner that is ouercome with passions and with the feling of Gods iudgements and therefore can not apprehend in that ãâã ãâã merc es of God and ãâã of the ãâã u No distinction ãâã light and darkenes but where all is ãâã darkenes it self a Shulde he persuade by his great talke that he is ãâã b He chargeth Iob with this that he ãâã ãâã ãâã the thing which he spake ãâã ãâã that he was without sinne in the sight of God c Which is not to stand in iuslifying of
ãâã of God vnto sinners and wherein mans ãâã stan deth which is through the iustice ãâã Iesus Christ and faith therein o He sheweth that it is a sure to ken of Gods mercie toward ãâã when he cau seth his wordes to be preached vn to them p That is the minister shal by the preaching of the worde ãâã vntohim the forgi uenes ofhis sinnes q He shal fele Gods fauour and reioyce declaring hereby whe ãâã standeth the true ioy of the faithful and that God wil restore him to health of body which is a token of his blessing r God wil forgiue sinnes and accept him as iuste s ãâã is done wickedly t But my sinne hathe bene the cause of Gods ãâã toward me u God wil forgiue the penitence sinner x Meaning oft times ãâã as ãâã as a sinner doeth repent y If thou doute of any thing or se occasion to speake against it z That is to shewe ãâã wherein mans iustification consisteth a VVhich are este med Wise of the Worlde b Let vs examine the matter ãâã c That is hathe ãâã me without measure d Shulde I say I am wicked being an innocent e I am ãâã punished them my sinne deserueth f VVhich is compelled to receiue the reproche and scornes of many for his ãâã wordes g meaning that Iob was like to the wicked becau se he semed not to glorifie God ãâã him selfe to his ãâã i That is liue god ly ãâã Gene. 5 ãâã k He ãâã Iobs wordes who said that Gods children are oft times punis hed in this worlde the wicked go fre Chap. 36. 23. k To destroye him l The breath of li fe which he gaue man m If God ãâã ãâã iust how col ãâã he gouernethe worlde n If man of nature feare to speake euil of such as haue power ãâã muche more ought to be ãâã to speake ãâã of God o VVhen they lokenot for it p The ãâã or visitation that God shal sent s Make them ãâã that they are wicked q God ãâã not a ãâã man aboue measure ãâã that he shulde haue ãâã casion to con ãâã with him r For all his creatures are at hand to serue ãâã that nedeth not to seke for ãâã other armie t Declare the thiÌg that ãâã u Meaning ãâã in the sight of all men x By their crueltie and ãâã y VVhen ãâã sit in the ãâã of iustice which vnder ãâã of ãâã ãâã ce are but ãâã tes oppresse the people it is a signe that ãâã ãâã drawen backe is countenance and fauour from tha place r Onely it belongeth to God to ãâã ãâã ctions not vnto man a Thus ãâã spea keth in the ãâã of God as it were mocking Iob because he wolde be wiser then God b VVil God vse thy counsel in doing his worker c Thus he speaketh in ãâã ãâã ne of God as thogh Iob shulde chuse and refuse ãâã at his plea sure d That he may speake as muche as he can that we may answer him and all the wicked that shal vse suche arguments e He standeth slub ãâã in the maintenance of his cause a Iob ãâã spake these wordes but because he mainteined him innocencie it semed as thogh he wolde say that God ãâã him ãâã iust cause b Suche as are in the like ãâã c ãâã thou ãâã controle the ãâã des wilt thoupre sume to instruct God d Nether doeth thy sinne hurt God nor thy iustice profice him for he wil be glorified without thee e The wicked may hurt man cause him to ãâã who if he soght to God which sendeth ãâã shuld be deliuered f Because theipray not ãâã faith as feling Gods ãâã g God is iust how soeuer thou iudgest of him Chap. XXXVI h For if he did pu nish thee as thou deseruest thou shuldest not be able to open thy mouth a He sheweth that when we speake of God we must lift our spirits more hie ãâã our natural sense is able to reache a He sheweth that when we speake of God we must lift our spirits more hie ãâã our natural sense is able to reache b Thou shalt perceiue that I am a faithful instructour and that I speake to thee in the name of God c Strong and constant and of vnderstanding for these are the gifts of God and he loueth them in man but for as mu ãâã as God punished now Iob it is a signe that the se are not in him d Therefore he wil not ãâã ãâã the wicked but to the humble ãâã heart he wil she wegrace e He preferteth the godlie to honour f He wil moue theit heartes to ãâã their sinnes that they may come to him by ãâã as he did ãâã Isa. 1. 19. g That is in their ãâã or ãâã and so shal be cause of their owne destruction h VVhich are ãâã bent against God and slatter them ãâã in their vices i VVhen they are in ãâã they seke not to God for succour as Asa 2. Chro. 16. 12. reuel 16. 11. k Thei dye of some vile death and that before thy co me o age l ãâã hou hadest be ne obedient to God he wolde ha ue broght thee to libertie welth m Thou ãâã altogether after the maner of the ãâã ked for thoudo est ãâã against ãâã heiustice of God n God doeth punish thee lest thou shuldest forget God in thy welth and so ãâã o Be not ãâã ãâã in seking the cause of Gods iudgements ãâã he ãâã ãâã p And ãâã against GOD through ãâã ãâã q The workes of God are so ãâã that a man may se ãâã a farre of and knowe God by the same r Our ãâã ãâã vs so that we can not ãâã to the ãâã knowledge of God s That is the ãâã cometh of those dropes of water which he kepeth in the cloudes t Meaning of the ãâã ãâã which he calleth the ãâã ãâã of God u ãâã the cloude x That men can not come to the ãâã of the springs the eof ãâã He sheweth ãâã the raine ãâã ãâã ãâã vsee the one ãâã it ãâã clareth ãâã ãâã when ãâã ãâã ouerflowe any ãâã the other that it m. ãâã the ãâã ãâã z That ãâã ãâã de to dash against another a The colde vapour ãâã him that is cloude of the ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã being ãâã ãâã the ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã the ãâã where the ãâã is and so angre is ãâã ãâã that ãâã noise and thunder claps a At the ãâã of ãâã ãâã lightening whereby he ãâã ãâã that the faith ãâã uely touched with the maiestie of God ãâã they beholde his wo kes b That is the thun der whereby be ãâã to men to waken their dulnes to bring them to consideracion ãâã ãâã ãâã or kes c Meaning the raines thuÌders Chap XXXVII d So that nether smale raine nor great snowe nor ahie thing els coÌmeth without Gods appointement e By raines thunders God causeth men ãâã
that he wolde increase in hym knowledge and iudgement b So Ieremie saith that ãâã the Lorde touched him he was like a ãâã ãâã so that the vse of gods rods is to call vs home to god c Their heart is indurate aÌd hardened ãâã vp wyth prosperitie and vaine estimacion of them selues d He confesseth ãâã before that he was chastened he was rebellious as man by nature is a Because god leaueth not hys worke that he hathe begonne he desireth a newe ãâã that is that he wolde ãâã hys mercyes b VVhen GOD sheweth his gra ce towarde anye he testifieth to others that he faileth not theÌ that trust in hym c He declareth that wheÌ he felt not gods mercies he was as dead Ebr. is trueth d That is be comforted by myne example e He sheweth that there can be no true feare of GOD without the knowledge of his worde a Thogh my strength faileme yet my soule ãâã neth and sigheth restyng styll in thy worde b Like as ãâã tell or bladder that is parched in the smoke c Howe longe wilt thou afflict thy seruant d They haue not onely oppressed me violently but also craftely conspired agaynste me e He assureth him selfe that GOD will deliuer hys and destroy suche as vniustly ãâã ãâã f Finding no helpe in earth he lifteth vp hys eyes to ãâã a Because none shulde esteme Gods worde accordyng to the changes of thinges in this world he sheweth that it abideth in heauen and therfore is ãâã b Seing the earth and all ãâã remaine in that estate wherein thou hast created them much more thy trueth remaineth constaÌt and vnchaungeable c He proueth by effect that he is Gods childe because he seketh to vnderstande his worde d There is nothing so perfire in earth but it hathe an end onely Gods worde ãâã for euer a He sheweth that we can not loue Gods worde except we exe cise our selues therein and practise ãâã b VVhosoeuer doeth submit him self onely to Gods worde shal not onely be safe against the practises of his enemies but also learne more wisdome ãâã thei that professe it and are men of experience c So then of our selues we can do nothing but wheÌ GOD doeth inwardely instruct vs with his ãâã we fele ãâã graces ãâã then honie a Of our selues we are but ãâã nes and can not se except we be lightened with gods worde b So all the faith ful ought to bind theÌ selues to god by a solemne othe and promes to stirre vp their zeale to embrace gods worde c ãâã ãâã my pra yer and thankesgiuing whiche sacrifice Hosea called the calues of the lippes d That is I am in continual dan ger of my life e I estemed no worldlie things but made thy worde mine ãâã Chap. 14. Vers. 3. a VVhosoeuer wyll imbrace Gods worde a right must abhor re all ãâã and imaginacions bothe of him self and of others b And hinder me not to kepe the Lawe of the Lorde c He desireth Gods continuall assistance lest he shulde faint in this race whiche he had begon d The ãâã pra ctises of them that contemne thy Law shal be b oght to noght e VVhiche infected thy people as drosse doeth the metal f Thy iudgementes do not onely teache me ãâã but cause me to feare considerynge mine owne weakenes whiche ãâã causeth repentance a Put thy selfe betwene mine enem es and me as if thou ãâã my pledge b He ãâã not that he is Gods seruaunt but ãâã ãâã GOD in mynde that as he made hym hys by hys ãâã so he wolde continue by ãâã towarde him c The prophet sheweth that when the wicked haue broght all things to con fusion and Gods worde to vtter contempt then it is Gods time to helpe and send ãâã d That is what soruer ãâã from the puritie of thy worde a ãâã high and secret ãâã so that I am moued with admiracion and reuerence b The simple idiotes that submit theÌ selues to God haue their ãâã opened and their mindes ãâã minated so sone as they begin to ãâã Gods word c My zeale toward thy worde was so great d He sheweth what oughtto be the zealeof Gods children when they se his worde contemned a We can not con ãâã God to be ãâã except we liuevp rightly and ãâã as he hathe coÌmanded Psal. 69. 10. b Golde hathe nede to be fined ãâã thy worde is perfection it self 2. ãâã ãâã 1. c This is the true trial to ãâã God in ãâã d So that the ãâã of man without the knowledge of God is death a He ãâã that all his affections and whole heart were bent to God ward for to haue helpe in his dangers b He was more ãâã in the studie of Gods worde theÌ they that ãâã the ãâã were in their charge â Or ãâã c He sheweth the nature of the wicked to be to persecute against their coÌscience d His faith is grounded vpon ãâã that he wolde ãâã be ãâã ãâã his children be oppressed a For ãâã Gods promes there is no ãâã of deliuerance b According to thy ãâã ade in the ãâã ãâã because the wicked ãâã they can haue no hope ãâã salnacioÌ c My ãâã consumed me when ãâã We ãâã ãâã and ãâã of thy ãâã d ãâã is ãâã signe of our ãâã when we loue the Law of God e Since ãâã ãâã promised euen to the end all thy sayings ãâã ãâã a The ãâã and ãâã ãâã ãâã colde not cause me to ãâã to confesse thee ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã men b That is often ãâã times c For their conscience ãâã them that thei ãâã thee ãâã as they ãâã loue not thee haue ãâã ãâã d He sheweth that we must ãâã haue faith before we can worke and please God e I had no ãâã of men but ãâã thee alwaies ãâã mine ãâã as the iudge of my doings a As thou hast ãâã to be the scholemaster vnto all ãâã that ãâã on thee b The worde ãâã to powre ãâã ãâã c All his praier and ãâã is to profit in the wor de ãâã God d That is thy ãâã uident care ouer me and here with thou wilt iudge mine enemies e Being chased to and fro by ãâã ne enemies and hauing no place to rest in a That is of ãâã vp the tune and rising in singing b ãâã the chil ãâã ãâã God ãâã to reioyce ãâã they suffer for righteousnes sake yet it is a great grief to the flesh to ãâã euil for wel doing c He assured him self that God wol de turne their craft to their owne destructioÌ d He sheweth that there is nothing so sharpe to perce nor so ãâã to set on fyre as a sclanderous ãâã e These were people of Arabia which came of laphét Gene. 10. 2. f That is of the I ãâã g He declareth what he meaneth by Meshech and Kedár to wit the ãâã which had dege nerate from their ãâã ãâã and hated and contended against the faithful
preaching and ãâã ãâã of the same whiche is coÌmitted to the ãâã l And reprehensions when the word is preached bring vs to life m ãâã ãâã ãâã lokes and ãâã n Meaning that she will neuer cease til she haue ãâã to beg gerie and theÌ seke thy destruction o He approueth not theft but shew eth that it is not so abominable ãâã whoredome forasmuche as ãâã might be redemed but ãâã was a perpetual infamie and death by the Law of God p Meaning ãâã very ãâã ãâã faileth in heart q That is death ap pointed by the Law r He sheweth that man by ãâã seketh his death that hathe abused his wife and so concludeth that nether Gods Law nor the Lawe of nature admitteth ãâã raunsome for the adulterie a By this diuer sitie of wordes he meaneth that nothing ought to be so dere vnto vs as the word of God not that we loke on any thing more nor minde any thing so muche b Salomon vseth this ãâã to de clare their ãâã that ãâã theÌ selues to be abused by ãâã c He ãâã that there was almost none so ãâã but they were afraid to be sene also their owne coÌ ãâã did accuse theÌ ãâã caused them to seke the night to couer their filthines â Or garment â Or ãâã d He ãâã ãâã ãâã on s whiche are peculiar to ãâã â Ebr. she strengthened her face e Because that in peace offrings a portion returned to them that ãâã she sheweth him that she hath meate at home ãâã make good there with or els she wolde vse some cloke of holines til she had gotten him in her ãâã f ãâã declareth that harlottes outwardly will seme holie religious both because they may the better deceiue others and also thinking by obseruing of ceremonies offrings to make ãâã for their sinnes â Or ãâã work â Ebr. in his hand g ãâã thinking ãâã goeth to the ãâã goeth ãâã to his owne destruction h ãâã goeth ãâã not ãâã that he shal be ãâã â ãâã it is for hys life i Nether wit nor ãâã can ãâã them that fall into the hands of the harlot Chap. 2. 18. Chap. 1. 20. a Salomon declareth that man is cause of his owne ãâã and that he can ãâã ãâã ãâã for asmuche as God calleth to all men by his worde and by his workes to follow vertue and to ãâã from vice b ãâã the people did moste resort and whiche was the place of iustice c Meaning ãâã the worde of God is easie vnto all that haue a ãâã vnto it and which are ãâã blinded by the prince of this worlde d That is excepte a man haue wisdome whiche is the true knowledge of God he can nether be prudent nor good counseller e So that he that doeth not hate euil feareth not God f VVhereby he declareth that honors dignitie or riches come not of mans wisdome or industrie but by the preuidence of God g That is studie the worde of God diligently with a ãâã to ãâã h Signifying that he chiefly meaneth the spiritual treasures and heauenlie riches i For there can be no true iustice or iudgemeÌt whiche is not directed by this wisdome k He declareth hereby the diuinitie and ãâã of this wisdome which he ãâã and praiseth through this boke meaning thereby the eternal Sonne of God Iesus ãâã our Sauiour whome S. Iohn calleth the worde that was in the beginning Iohn 1. 1. l He declareth the eternitie of the Sonne of GOD whiche is ment by this worde VVisdome who was before all time euer present with the Father m Some read a chief worker signifying that this VVisdome euen Christ Iesus was equal whiche God his Father created preserued and stil worketh with him as Ioh. ãâã n VVhereby is declared that the ãâã of the crea tion was no peine but a solace vnto the wisdome of God o By earth he mea neth man wh ch is the worke of God in whome wisdome toke pleasure in so mu che as for mans sake the Diuine wisdome toke mans nature and dwelt among vs and filled vs with vnspeakeable trea sures and this is that solace and passe time whereof is here spokeÌ Chap. ãâã a Christ hathe pre ãâã him a Church b That is many chief staies ãâã cipal partes of his Church as were the ãâã Prophetes Apostles Pastors Doctors c He compareth wisdome with great princes that kepe open house for all that come d Meaning true preaches which are not infected with mans wisdo me e He that knoweth his owne ignorance and is voide of ãâã f By the meat and drinke is ment the worde of God and the ministration of the sacraments whereby God nourisheth his seruants in his house which is the Church g For the wicked wil ãâã him and labour todiffa me him h Meaning them that are incorrigi gible which calleth doge and swinei or he speaketh this in comparison not that the wicked shuld not be rebuked he sheweth their malice and the smale hope of pro ãâã i He sheweth what true vnderstanding is to know the wil of God in his worde which is ment by holie things k Thous halt haue the chief ãâã comodite thereof l By the foolish woman ãâã vnderstand the wicked preachers who ãâã the worde of God as appeareth vers 16 which were the wordes of the true preachers as vers 42. but theirs doctrine is but as stollen waters meaning that they are but mens traditions which at more pleasant to the flesh then the worde of GOD and therefore they them selues boast thereof Chap. 15. 20. a This is wicked ly gotten b Thogh he ãâã the iuste to ãâã for a time yet ãâã wil ãâã him comforte in ãâã season Or ãâã c TVhen their ãâã kednes shal be discouered thei shal be as ãâã and not knowe what to say d Shal be vile and ãâã bothe of God and man con ãâã to ãâã owne expectation which thinke to make their name immortal â Or surely Ebr lippes e He that ãâã a faire countenance and ãâã mischief in his ãâã as Chap 6 ãâã f For the ãâã of his heart is knowen by his talke 1. Cor. 13 4. 1. ãâã 4. 8. g That is God ãâã finde him out ãâã ãâã him h And somaketh him bolde to do ãâã where as ãâã ãâã the poore from manie euil things i For they speake trueth and ãâã manie by ãâã tions ad nonition and ãâã k Meaning that all ãâã ãâã things bring care and sorew where as they that feele the blessings of God haue ãâã l He is but a trou ble and grief to him that setteth him about anie busines m The time of their prosperitie s halbe short because of their great fall thogh thei seme to liue long n They ãâã in this life by ãâã hope their euer lasting life a Vnder this worde he ãâã all false weights measures and deceit â Ebr. ãâã b VVhen man forgetteth him
from him f He that is merci ful and liberal Eccle. 31. 28. g He sheweth that priÌces ãâã vse their familia ritie whose conscience is good and their talke wise and godlie h Fauour them that loue knowledge i He ãâã theÌ that ãâã excuses because they wolde not do their duetie k So God punisheth one sinne by another wheÌ he suffreth the wicked to fal into the acquaintaÌ ce of an harlot i He is naturally giuen vnto it m He sheweth what the end of wisdome is to wit to direct vs to the Lord. n That is sundrie times â Ebr. in the ãâã Chap. 23 11. o Haue not to do with him that is not able to rule his affections for he wolde hurt thee by his euil ãâã p VVhich rashely put theÌ selues in daÌger for others as Chap. 6 1. Deu 27. 17. Chap 23 ãâã a Eat with sobrie tie b ãâã ãâã ap ãâã as it were by force and vio lence c For oft times the ãâã when they bid ãâã in ãâã to their tables it is not for the loue they bear them but for their owne secret purposes d Bestowe not the ãâã that God hathe giuen ãâã to get wordelie ãâã e That is couetous as contrarie a good eye is taken for liberal as Chap. 22 9. f He wil not cease til he hathe done thee some harme his flattering wordes shal come to no vse Deut ãâã ãâã Chap. 22 ãâã Chap. 22 23. Chap. ãâã 24. 19 18. Eccl. 30 ãâã g That is from de ãâã Psal. 37 ãâã Chap 24 1 h The ãâã of the wicked shal not continue i In the obseruation of Gods coÌmandements â Ebr. wine ãâã â Ebr. deuourers of flesh k Spare no cost for trueths sake nether ãâã from it for anie gaine l Giue thy self wholly to wisdome Chap. 22 14. m She seduceth manie ãâã them to offend God Chap. 7 8. n Which by are make wine ãâã ãâã more pleasant o That is dronkeÌ nes shal bring thee to whoredome p In such greatdaÌ ger shalt thou ãâã q Thogh droÌkennes make them more insensible then ãâã yet can they not refraine Psal 37 1. Chap. 23. 17. Chap. 20 18. a In the place where wisdome ãâã be shewed b Man hathe no tryal of his strength til he be in troubles c None can be ex cused if he helpe not the innocent when he is in daÌger d As honie is swete ãâã to the tast so wis dome is to the soule Or rewarde e He is subiect to manie ãâã but God deliuereth him f To be auenged on thee Psal. 37 ãâã chap. ãâã 17. Chap. 13 9. g Meaning other of the wicked sedicious as vers 19 and 21 or of them that feare not God nor obey their King Ebr. to knowe the face Chap. ãâã 15. Isa. 5 23. h Be sure of the meanes how to compasse it before thou take anie enterprise in hand Chap. ãâã 22. i He sheweth what is the natu re of the ãâã to reuenge wroÌg for wrong k That I might ãâã by another mans faute l Read Chap. 16 ãâã a Whome ãâã appointed for this purpose b That is gathered cut of diuers bokes of SalomoÌ c God doeth not reueile the cause of his iudgemeÌts to man d Because the King ãâã by the ãâã reueiled worde of God the cause of his doings must appeare and therefore he must vse diligence in trying ãâã of causes e He sheweth that it is to hard for man to ãâã to the reason of all the secret doings of the King euen when bets vpright and doeth his ãâã f When vice is re moued from a King he is a mere vessel for the Lords vse g It is not ãâã nough that he be pure him self but that he put away others that be cor rupted h Lest where as thou thinkest by this meanes to ha ue an end of the matter it put thee to farther trouble Luk 14 10. i In the time of great heat when men desire colde k Which haue an outward appearance and are no thing within l By not ministring occasion to prouoke him far ther. m That is the heart that is bene to angre as Chap 15 1. n Vse moderatly the pleasures of this worlde o Which melteeth it and ãâã hit â Or alume Roma 12. 19. p Thou shalt as it were by force ouercome hym in so muche that his owne conscieÌ ce shal moue him to acknowledge thy benefites aÌd his heart shal be inflamed Chap. 21. 9. Eccle. 3. ãâã q And so is in ex treme danger a Consent not vn to hym in hys doings b Reproue hym as the matter requireth â Ebr. eyes c To wit of the messenger whoÌ he sendeth d That is receyueth domage thereby e VVhereby he bothe hurteth hym selfe and others f Meaning God 2. Pet. 2 22. g For the foole will rather be counseled then he also the foole sinneth of ignorance and the other of malice h Read Chap. 22. 13. Chap. 19. 24. i VVhiche dissem bleth him self to be that he is not Eccle. 38. 12. Chap. 18 8. k They wil sone breake our and vtter theÌ selues l Meanyng manie the vseth the nomber certeine for the ãâã m In the assemblie of the godlie Eccle. 10. 8. Eccle. 27. 30. a Delave not the time but take oc casion when it is offred Eccle. 22. 18. b For the enuious are obstinate and can not be reconciled c They are slatteryng and seme friendfull Iob. 6. 6. d Trust not to anie worldlie hel pe in the daye of thy trouble e Read Chap. 22. 3. Chap. 20. 16. â Ebr. ãâã f Hastelye and without cause Chap. 19. 20. and 21 9. g One hastie maÌ ãâã another to ãâã h There is no dif ference betwene ãâã and man by ãâã but ãâã the grace of God maketh the ãâã Eccle. 14. 9. Chap. 17. 3. i That is he is ãâã knowen ãâã be ambitious aÌd glorious or hum ble and modest k This declareth the ãâã goodnes of God towardes man and the ãâã that ãâã requireth of hym for the preseruation of hys giftes a Because their owne conscience accuseth them b The ãâã of the commune weale is often ãâã changed Chap. 19. 1. c For God will take awaye the wicked ãâã giue his goods to him that shall beslowe them wel d Because it is not of faith whi che is grounded of Gods worde or Lawe whiche the wicked ãâã e And iudge that he is not wise Chap. 29. 2. f He is knowen by his doings to be wicked g VVhiche standeth in awe of God aÌd is afraid to offend him h For he can neuer be satisfied but euer oppresseth and spoileth i None shal be able to deliuer ãâã Chap. 12 11. Eccle. 20. 30. Chap. 13. 11. and 20. 21. k He wil be abu sed for nothing l Meanyng hym that is couetous m Shall haue all thynges in abun dance Chap. 29. 2. â Or are increased Chap. 28. 12. and 28.
Luk. ãâã 13. a He that giueth ãâã to the flatte rer is in daÌgeras the bird is before the fouler b He is euer ready to fall into the snare that he lay ethfor others c He can beare no admonition in what ãâã euer it is spoken Chap. 22 ãâã Chap. 20 28. d Where there are not faithful ministers of the worde of God e He that is ãâã a seruile and rebel lious nature â Or regarde Chap. 15 18. Iob. 22 29. f He that feareth man more then God falleth into a snare and is de stroyed g He nedeth not to flatter the ãâã what God hathe appointed that shal come to him a Who was an ex cellent man in vertue and know ledge in the time of Salomon b Which wereÌ Agurs schollers or friends c Herein he declareth his great humilitie who wolde not attribute anie wisdeme to him sel but allvnto God d Meaning to knowe the secrets of God as ãâã he ãâã saye None Psal 19. 1. Deut. 4. 2. 12. 32. e He maketh this request to God f Meaning that they ãâã ãâã their trust in their riches forget God that by to muche wealth meÌ haue an occasioÌ to the same g In accusing him without cause h The leache hathe two sorkes in her tongue which here he calleth her two daughters where by she sucketh the blood and is neuer ãâã eueÌ so are the couetous extorsioners insatiable i ãâã hante in the valley for carious k She hath her desires and after counter faiteth as thogh she were an ãâã ãâã l These communely abuse the ãâã te whereunto thei are called m Which is maried to her master after the death of her mastres n Thei ãâã great doctrine and wisdome o If man be not able to compasse these commune things by his wis dome We can not attribute wisdome to man but folie p Make a stay continue not in doing euil a That is of Salomon who was called Lemuél that is of God be cause God had or deined him to be King ouer Israél b The doctrine whiche his mother Bathshéba ãâã him c By this often re petition of one thing ãâã declareth her motherlie affection d Meaning that women are the destruction of Kings if they hante them e That is the King must not giue him self to wantonnes and neglect his office which is to execute iudgement f For wine doeth ãâã the heart as Psal. 104 15. g Defend their cause that are not able to helpe theÌ selues h He shal not nede to vse anie ãâã meanes to gaine his liuing â Or meat ãâã Psal ãâã 5. i She prepareth their meat be time k She purchaseth it ãâã the gaines of her ãâã â Or with double l In the assemblies and ãâã of iudgement Or linen cloth m After that he had spoken of the apparel of the bo ãâã he nowdeclareth ãâã apparel of the spirit n Her tongue is as a boke where by onemight lear ne manie good things for she deliteth to talke of the worde of God o That is do her reuerence p Confesse her diligent abours and commende her therefore q For as muche as the moste honorable are clad in the apparel that she made a ãâã is here called a Preacher or one that asseÌbleth the people because he ãâã the true ãâã of God how men ought to ãâã their life in this ãâã world b He ãâã the opinions of all men that set ãâã in anie thing but in God alone seing that in this worlde all things are as ãâã nothing c Salomon ãâã not condemne mans labour or diligence but she ãâã that there is no ful ãâã in anie thing vnder the heauen not in ãâã ãâã for asmuche as all things are transitorie d One maÌ doeth after another aÌd the earth remaineth longest eueÌ to the last daie which yet is subiect to ãâã e By the sunne winde and riuers he ãâã that ãâã greatest labour and longest hathe an end and therefore there can be no felicitie in this worlde f The sea which ãâã all the earth filleth the veines thereof the which ãâã out springs and riuers into the sea againe g He speaketh of times and sea sons and things ãâã in them which as thei haue bene in times past so come thei to passe ãâã h He ãâã that if anie colde haue ãâã to ãâã in this ãâã by labour ãâã he ãâã shulde haue ãâã it becau se he had ãâã and ãâã of God there ãâã aboue all ãâã Eccles. 40. ãâã i Man of nature hathe a desire to ãâã and yet is not able to come ãâã the ãâã of knowledge which is the punishment of ãâã to humble man and to ãâã him ãâã depende onely vpon God k Man is not able ãâã all his diligence to ãâã ãâã to go other ãâã thei ãâã her can he nombre the fautes that are ãâã muche lesse remedie them l That is vaine things which serued vnto pleasure wherein was no commoditie but grief and trouble of conscience m Wisdome and knowledge can not be come by without great peine of bodie and minde ãâã when a man ãâã ãâã to the hiest yet is his minde neuer fully content therefore in this worlde is no true telicitie a Salomon makeththis ãâã with him self as thogh he wolde trye ãâã there were ãâã ãâã in ease and pleasures â ãâã ãâã my ãâã to wine b Albeit I gaue ãâã self to pleasures yet ãâã ãâã to kepe wisdome and the feare ãâã God in mine ãâã and gouerne mine ãâã by the same ãâã br do Ebr. paradises c Meaning of the seruants or sclaues ãâã he had boght so the children borne in their ãâã were the masters d That is what soeuer men take pleasure in e ãâã were the most beautiful of them that were taken in warre as Iudges 5. ãâã Some vnder stand by these wordes ãâã but instruments ãâã musike f For all this God did not take his gift of Wisdome from me g This was the ãâã of all my labour a certeine pleasure mixt ãâã care which he calleth ãâã in ãâã nextverse h I bethoght with my self whether it ãâã better to followe Wisdom ãâã mine owne af fections pl asu re which ãâã calleth madnes â Or ãâã with the King i He foreseeth things which the foole can not for ãâã of wisdome k For bothe dye and ãâã forgotten asverse 16 or they bothe alike haue prosperitie or ad uersitie Prou. 17. 24. l Meaning in this worlde m He woundereth that ãâã for get a wise man being dead ssone as ãâã do a ãâã n That I might seke the true felicitie which is in God o Among other griefs this was not the least to leaue that Which he had gotten by great trauail to one that had taken no peine therefore and Whome he knew not Whether he Were a Wise maÌ or a soole p WheÌ maÌ hathe all laboured he can get no more then fode ãâã ãâã yet he ãâã also that
and ãâã aÌd put on the apparel of ioye and gladnes c The Babylonians paied ãâã to me for you therefore I will take you againe without ãâã d VVhen Iaakob went thether in time of ãâã e The Egyptians myght ãâã some ãâã ãâã op presse my people because they went thether aÌd remained amoÌg them but the As ãâã haue no title to excuse their tyraÌnie by and therfore wil I punis he them more them I did the Egyptians f To wit by the wicked whiche thinke that I haue no power to deliuer them g ãâã that the ãâã aÌd good tidings of their deliurance shuld make their affliction in the mea ne time more ea sy but this is chie fly ment of the spiritual ioye as Nah. 1. 15. h The Prophetes whiche are thy watchmen shal publish this thy deliurance this was ãâã vnder zerubbabél Ezra aÌd Nehemiah but was accomplyshed vnder Christ. Rom. 10. ãâã k He warneth the faithfull not to pollute them selues with the superstitions of the Babylonians as Chap. 48. 20. 2 Cor. 6. 7. l For the time is at ãâã that the ãâã and Leuites chiefly and so by them all the people which shal be as ãâã in this of office shal cary home the vessels of the Temple which N ãâã had taken awaye m As your fathers did out of E ãâã n Meanyng Christ by ãâã our spiritual deliurance shulde be ãâã whereof this was a figure i As ready to smite hysennemies and to deliuer his people o In the corrupt ãâã of man Christ in his persone was not estemed p He shall sp ead his worde through manie nations q In signe of ãâã and as beyng aslonis hed at his excellencie r By the preachyng of the Gospel a The ãâã ãâã that ve rie fewe shal receiue this their preachynge of Christ of their deliuerance by him Ioh. ãâã 38. b Meanyng that none can beleue but whose heartes God ãâã with the vertue of his holie spirit c The beginning of Christs kingdome shal be smale and conteÌ ptible iÌ the sight of maÌ but it shal growe wonderfully and florish before God d Read Chap 11. ãâã Rom. ãâã 16. e VVhich was by gods singular pro uidence for the comforte of sinners Ebr. 4. ãâã f That is the punis hment due to our sinnes for the whiche he hath both suffred and made satisfa ction Mat. 8. 17. 1. pet 2. 24. g VVe iudge euil thinking that he was punished for his owne sin nes and not for ãâã h He was chastised for our recon ciliation 1. Cor. 15 ãâã i Meaning the punishemnt of our ãâã not the ãâã it self k But willingly paciently obey ed his fathers appointement Mat 26 63. act 8 ãâã l From the crosse and graue after that he was con demned m Thogh he dyed for ãâã yet after his resurrectioÌ he shal liue for euer and this his death is to restore life to his mem bers Rom. 6 9. n God the Father deliuer dhim into the hands of the wicked and to the powers of the worlde to do with him what hev wolde o Christ by off ãâã ãâã him self shal giue life to his Church and so cause them to liue with him for euer p That is the frut and effect of his labour which is the saluacion of ãâã ãâã q ãâã ãâã iustifie by faith through is worde where as Moses colde not ãâã by the Lawe r ãâã be humbled him self therefore ãâã shal be ãâã to glorie ãâã 2 7. s ãâã is in all that beleue in him a After that he hathe declared the death of Christ he speaketh to the Church because it shulde fele the frute of the same calleth her bareÌ because that ãâã the ãâã she was as a widdowe without hope to haue anie children b The Church in this her affliction captiuitie ãâã bring forth mo children then when she was at ãâã or this may he spok n by ãâã coÌsidering the great nomber that shul de come of her Her deliuerance vnder Cyrus was as ãâã childe he de therefore this was accoÌplished when she came to her age whiche was vnder the Gospel c Signifying that for the great ãâã ber of children that God shulde gvue her she shulde seme to lacke roume to lodge them d The afflictions whiche thou suf fred at the begin ãâã e ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Chap 50. 1. f That did ãâã ãâã thee by his holy ãâã g His glorie ãâã al ãâã through the whole worlde ãâã ãâã ãâã to be shut vp in ãâã h As a wife which wast ãâã ãâã thy you h. i As sure as the promes that I made to ãâã ãâã the ãâã shulde no more ãâã ãâã ãâã earth k ãâã he ãâã the ãâã ãâã te of the Church vnder ãâã l By the hearing of ãâã worde and in ward ãâã of his ãâã m In ãâã and ãâã so that it shal ãâã for euer Or ãâã or pea ãâã o Meaning the domestical enemies of the Chu ch as ãâã the ãâã ãâã p ãâã ing hereby that man can do nothing but so ãâã as God giueth ãâã ãâã seing that all are his ãâã he ãâã nedes gouerne and guide them n And therefore shal not preuaile a Christ by proposing his graces and ãâã to his Church ãâã the ãâã which are ãâã with their imagined ãâã the Epicures which areful with their worldelie lusts and so thirst not after these waters b Signifying that Gods ãâã can ãâã be boght for ãâã c By ãâã wine milke bread he meaneth all things necessarie to the ãâã life as these are necessarie to this corporal life d He reproueth their ingratitude which refuse tho se things that God off eth wil lingly and in the meane time spare nether cost ãâã labour to obteine those which are nothing profitable e You shal be fed abundantly f The same couenant whiche through my mer cie I ratified and confirmed to Da uid that it shulde be eternal 2. Sam 7 13. act 13 34. g Meaning Christ of whom Dauid was a figure h To wit the GeÌ tiles whiche before thou ãâã not receiue to be thy people i When he offreth him self by the preaching of his worde k Hereby he shew eth that repentaÌ ce mustbe ioyned with faith and how we can not call vpon God aright except the frutes of ourfaith appeare l Althogh you are not sone reconciled one to another and iudge me by your selues yet I am most easie to be reconciled yea I offer my mercies to you m If these smale things haue their effect as daiely ãâã muche more shal my promes which I haue made and coÌhrmed bring to passe the thing which I haue spoken for your deliuerance n Read Chap 44 2 49 1. o To set forth his glorie p Of Gods deliuerance and that the wil neuer ãâã his Church a God sheweth what erequireth of theÌ after that he hath deliuered ãâã wit the workes of ãâã whereby ãâã saith is
Not that the Priests ãâã the Sabbath in doing that Which Was commanded by the Law but he speaketh thus to confuce the error of the people Who thought the Sabbath broken if any necessarie Worke Was done that day Nomb. 28. 9 c Christ hathe power to exeÌpt his from keping of the Sabbath seing the seruice required in the TeÌple Was able to excuse them that labored ãâã the same ãâã 6 7. Chap. 9. 13. Mark 3. 10 Luk. 6. 6. Isa. 42 1. d The right trade of gouernement not onely to ãâã Iewes but also to strange nacions e He shall not make great noise nor seke out War depoÌpe glorie f He Wil beare With them that be infirme and Weake g Christ shall ouercome al lettes Which hinder the course of the Gos pel aÌd then snall giue ãâã as a coÌquerer against all his enemies Luk. 11. 14. Chap. 9. 34. Mar. 3 22. Luk. 11. 17. â Or desolate h VVhich ãâã deuils by the ãâã of Gods name all beit it Was expresly against the Law of God i He declareth to the Pharises that they Were in t Wo sortes his enemies not onely because thei did forsake him but also make open ãâã against him Mar. 3 28. Luk. 2. 10. 1. ioh 5. 3. k That is he that striuech against the ãâã Which he knoweth and against his owne conscience can not returne to repentance for he sinneth against the holie Gost. â Or corrupt â Or broodes Luk. 6. 45. l Muche more they ãâã giue a counte of their ãâã m Their Wicked Wordes shal be a ãâã proffe to condemne the vngodlie if there Were no other thing Chap. 16. 2. Ink. 11 29. n This Was to finde some newe ãâã or pretext to ãâã his doctrine 1. Cor. 1. 22. o They Were become bastardes and ãâã from their holie ãâã Iona. 2 8. p He taketh ãâã te of the day ãâã the Whole day ãâã 3. 1. q VVho Was a poore stranger yet these knowe not the Messias Which Was promised to be their king ãâã king ãâã 2. 2 Ch. ãâã 1. r It is ment as touching her fact in comming to se SolomoÌ and not her persone for she Was not instructed in the Lawe of God Luk. 11 24. s Meaning an infinite nomber Or Wildernes 2. Pet. 2. 20. t If Satan be cast out We must Watche stil that he enter not againe for since he Was once mans oldegest he knoWeth ãâã and corner of our house ãâã 6. 4. ãâã 26 Mar. 3. 31. Luk. 8. 20. u This Worde in the ãâã ãâã ãâã times euerie kinsman x ãâã preferreth the ãâã kinred to the car nal Mar 4. 1. Luk 8. 5. a All desired to heare his doctrine but there Was not like affection in all b He sheweth that all men can not vnderstande these mysteries and also maketh his disciples mo re ãâã c The Gospell is hid to them that perish d Christ increaseth in his children his graces Chap. ãâã 29. e Euen that whi che he semeth to haue Isay. 6. 9. Marke 4. 12. Luke 8. 10. Iohn 12. 40. Act. 18. 26. Rom. 11. 8. f That ãâã the Prophete referreth to the secret counsell of God is here attri buted to the hard stubbernes of the people for the one can not be separated frome the other g To wit the glo rie of the Sonne of God to acknowledge hym their Sauiour Luke 10. 24. Marke 4. 15. Luke 8. 11. â Or was sowen h He ãâã that the good aÌd the bad shal be ãâã together in the Church to the end that the ãâã many arme theÌ selues with pacience nd constancie i Christ ãâã onelye that the Churche shal ne uer be without some wicked men althogh they be neuer so ãâã punished by suche meanes as he hathe left to pur ge ãâã Church Marke 4. 30. k This teacheth vs ãâã to be ãâã ãâã at the smale ãâã of the Gospell Luke 13. 18. Luke 13. 11. l ãâã this be ãâã theÌ to wai e ãâã the ãâã of the Gospel ãâã Marke 4. 33. Psal. 78. 2. m Thys worde signifieth graue and ãâã prouerbes to the end that the doct ine myght ãâã the ãâã maiestie aÌd the wicked myght thereby be confounded Ioel. 3 ãâã Reuel 14. ãâã n The ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã theyr euill example Dan. 22. 3. ãâã 3. 7. o It is a kinde of ãâã that ãâã in al things that come in the waye p The Greke worde signifieth rotten things q Because the Scribes office was to expouÌde the Scriptures he meaneth hym that doeth inter pret theÌ a right and accordynge to the Spirit r The preachers of Gods worde must haue store of ãâã and ample ãâã Marke 6. 1. Luke 4. 16. Iohn 6. 42. ãâã 6. 4. Luke 4. 24. Iohn 4 44 â Or Confiue s Men commune ly neglect them whome they ha ue knowen of children also they do enuie them of the same countrey such is ' their ingratitude that they take light occasion to coÌtemne the graces of God in others Chap. XIIII Marke 6. 14. Luke 9. 7. Marke 6. 17. Luke ãâã 14. Leui 18. 16. and. 20. 21. a He spake after the commune errour for they thoght that the soules of them that were depar ted entred into another bodie b To approue his resurrection and to get him great autoritie c Aswel because ãâã abhorreth suche horrible in ceste as also that he had taken ãâã by ãâã ãâã his brother Chap. ãâã 26. d The ãâã was wicked but yet it was more vile to obstinate in the same that he myght seme constant â Or karkeis ãâã 6 38. Luke 9. 10. e To the ãâã that his disciples nowe after their ambassagemight some what reste them or els that he might ãâã them to greater entreprises Marke 8. 35. Luke 9. 12. Iohn 6. 5. f Christ leaueth them ãâã ãâã of ãâã nourishmente ãâã whiche seke the fode of the ãâã â Or praied and gaue thankes to God g The disciples were lothe to de part from ãâã but yet they shewed their obedience Marke 6. 46. Iohn 6. 16. h The night was deuided into foure watches whereof euerie one conteined thre houres i The presence of Christ ãâã his bolde k His zeale was great but he had ãâã sufficiently considered the measure of hys faith l His entreprise was to greate and therefore he must nedes fall in danger when his faith failed m Christ ãâã his ãâã also giueth reme die bothe at once ãâã 6 54. n It semeth they we eled with a ãâã ãâã not withstan ding our Sauiour wold not queÌche the smoking ãâã and therefore did beare with these smale beginnings Marke 7 1. a Men are more rigorous to ãâã their owne traditions then Gods commandement â Or meat Exod. 20 ãâã Deut 5 16. ãâã 6 2. ãâã 21 17. ãâã 20 9. prou 20 20. b The ãâã dis pensed with theÌ that did not their dueties to their owne ãâã so that thei wolde recompense the same to their pro fite by
their offrings Isai. 29 12. c God wil not be honoured according to mans faÌ tasie but detesteth all good in tentions whiche ãâã not grouÌded on his worde Marke 7 17. Iohn 15 2. d All thei which ãâã not grafted in Iesus Christ by fre adoption and euerie doctrine that is not established by Gods ãâã e They are not worthie to be cared for Luke 6 39. Marke 7 ãâã f All vices proce de of the corrupt affection of the heart Gen 6 5. 8 21. Marke 7. 24. g The disciples were offended at her importunitie Chap. 10 6. h Christ calleth them dogs or whelpes whiche are strangers froÌ the house of God i Christ granted her ãâã for her faiths sake not at the request of his disciples ãâã 7 31. Isa. 35 5. Marke 8 1. k Christ can noÌt ãâã those that ãâã him â Or ãâã Chap. 12. ãâã a Althogh they did not agre in doctrine yet they ioyned together to fight against the truth Mark 8 ãâã b Men tempte God eyther by their incredulitie or curiositie Luke ãâã 54. c VVhich apperteine to the heauenlie and spiritual life Chap. 12. 14. d Christ shal be to them as a ãâã raised vp froÌ death Ionas 2. 1. Marke 8. 14. ãâã 12. 1. â Or reasoned with theÌ selues e A token of Christs diuinitie to knowe mens ãâã Chap. 14. 17. Iohn 6. 9. Chap. 15. 34. f We may bolde ly by Christs admonition reiect and coÌtemne all ãâã doctri ne and mans ãâã oght onely to cleaue to the worde of GOD. Marke 8. 27. Luke 9. 28. Iohn 6. ãâã g He meaneth any thing that ãâã in man Iohn 1. 41. h VpoÌ that faith ãâã thou hast confessed aÌd acknoweledged me for it is grouÌ ded vpon an infallible trueth i The power of Satan which ãâã deth in craft and violence Iohn 20. ãâã k The preachers of the Gospel ãâã pen the gates of heauen with the worde of God whyche is the right keye ãâã so that where this worde is not pu rely taught ther is nether keye nor autoritie l Condemne by ãâã ãâã â Or absolue m Because he wolde yet ãâã them and not preuent his tyme. n He wold pluck out of their hear tes that false opi nion which they had of his temporal kingdome Chap. 10. 38. o ãâã worde signifieth an aduersarie who re sisteth the will of God either of malice as did ãâã das or of rashenes and arrogan cie as Peter did ãâã 8. 14. Luk. 9. 23. 14. ãâã Chap. 10. 39. p That is whosoeuer thinketh to saue him selfe by forsaking Iesus Christ. Marke 8. 34. Luk. 9. 24. 17. ãâã Marke 8. 36. Luke 9. 25. * Rom. 2. 6. Iohn 12. 25. * Mar. 9. 1. * Luk. 9. ãâã q This was fulfilled in his resurrection which was ãâã an entrie into his kingdome and was also confirmed by sending the holie Gost whereby he wroght so great and sondrie miracles Psal. 62. 12. â Or the ãâã day after XVII Marke 9. 2. Luke 9. ãâã a ãâã shewed them his glories that they might not thinke that he suffred throu ghe infirmitie but that he offered vp him selfe willingly to ãâã b By these two ãâã ãâã are represented the Lawe and the Prophets which lead vs to Christ. c After Moses Elias ãâã Peter fearing he shulde lose that ioyful sight spea ãâã as a man distract aÌd wold haue lodged theÌ in earthlie houses whiche were receiued in ãâã d VVe are recon ciled to God by Christ onely Chap. 3. ãâã e Christ is our chief and onely ãâã ãâã Chap. 11. 14. 2. Peter 2. 17. f And so worshipped Christ. g For men wold not haue belieued them before that Christ had made his glorie more manifest by hys resurrection Marke 9. 11. Mala. 4. 5. Marke 9. 14. Luke 9. 37. h He speaketh chieflye to the Scribes who began to bragge as ãâã they had now gotten the victo ãâã ouer ãâã because his disci ples were not able to do thys miracle Luke 17. 6. Chap. 20. 17. Marke 9. ãâã Luke 9. 44. 24. 7. i By this maner of speache is ãâã that they shulde do thyngs by their faith that shulde seme impossible k The best remedie to streÌgthen the weake faith is prayer which hath ãâã added to it as an helpe to the same â Or ãâã conuersant or retur ned into Galile l The Greke worde is didrachma which was of value about ten ãâã of olde sterlyng monie and the Israelites payed it once by the Law Exo. 30. 13. and at this time they payed it to the Romains m ãâã giue occasion to forsake the trueth n The worde is Statera which conteineth two didrachmas and in valued about fiue grotes of olde ãâã XVIII Marke 9. 33. Luke 9 46. Chap. 19. 24. a They striue for the rewarde before they haue taken any paine and where as they shuld haue holpen and reue ãâã not another they were ãâã and despicers of their ãâã 1. Cor. 14 20. b ãâã lack of discretion but that they be not vayne glorious ãâã to aduan cethem selues to ãâã ãâã c He calleth theÌ litle childreÌ now whiche humble them selues with all humilitie and subiectioÌ Marke 9. 42. Luke 17. 1. d The worde ãâã a ãâã milstone whiche an ãâã ãâã and it is spoken in ãâã of that which is tourned with mans hand whiche is lesse e Christ warneth his to take heed that they shrink not backe from him for any ãâã example or offence that man can giue Chap. 5. 30. Marke 9. 45. f Christ toucheth the cause of this offence whiche is pride and disdeyne ãâã our ãâã Psal. 34. 7. g Seyng GOD hath ãâã his Aungels to ãâã the charge of hys children the wicked may be ãâã that if they dispice theÌ God wil reueÌge their cause Luke 13. 10. Luke 15. 4. h VVe maye not lose by our offen ce that whyche God hath so derely boght i Where with thou maist be offended he spea keth of secret or particular sinnes not of open or knoweÌ to others â Or reproue him Deu. 19 15. Leu. 19 17. eccle 19 13. ãâã ãâã 3. ãâã 5 18. k He meaneth according to the order that was amoÌgs the Iewes who had their couÌcel of ancient and expert men to reforme maners execute discipline This assemblie represeÌted the Church whiche had appointed them to this charge iohn 8 17. ebr 10 28. 2. cor 13 1. l In the 16. Chap. 19. he ment this of doctrine and here of eccle siastical discipline which depen deth of the doctrine 1. Cor. 5. 9. 2. thes 3. 14. Iohn 20 23. â ãâã done to Luk. 17 4. m VVe muste be coÌtinually ready to forgiue and be forgiuen n A commune ãâã was valued at thre score pounde some also were greater and some lesse o Which amouÌteth of our money to the ãâã of 25. shillings or verie nere and was nothing in respect of the for mer whiche his master forgaue him p
better theÌ the dogs therfore Christ speaketh accordyng to their ãâã k She asketh but the poore crommes aÌd not the chyldrens bread wherein she declareth her faith and humilitie l Declaryng by this signe the ãâã that he hath vpon ãâã ãâã Gen. 1. ãâã m As if they wolde say ãâã sides all the mitacles that he hath done euen this no we declareth that whatsoeuer he doeth is verie wel Eccle. 39. ãâã Mat. 15. 32. a Christ prouideth for his wheÌ they ãâã to be ãâã and for saken â Or ãâã b If bread were so hard to come by it semeth vnpossible to obteine other meat Mat. 15. 39. c VVhiche was nere to ãâã betwen the ãâã of ãâã aÌd mount ãâã Mat. 16. 1. d Oh the incomprehensible loue of our Christe how long shall we abuse ãâã great ãâã e ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã rpcnes of speache to saue ãâã from wilfull ãâã uction â Or if a signe be giuen f As if he wolde say if I shewe them any signe let me be a lyar and ãâã Mat. 16 5. g He willeth ãâã to beware contagious doctrine and suche sub I le practises as the aduersaries vsed to suppres hys Gospel Iohn 6. ãâã h Christ reproueth them becau se their mindes are as yet vppon the material leauen not withstandynge they had preuen by ãâã miracles that he gaue theÌ theyt dayelye bread Mat. 16. 13. Luke 9. 19. i He that is the ãâã of God aÌd ãâã with all grace for maÌs ãâã k Differring it to a more ãâã dious time lest ãâã hast shuld ãâã binder then further the ãâã of ãâã comming l This worde signifieth aduersa rie or ãâã he calleth hym so because he hid as muche as in him laye to pull him from ãâã God Mat. 0 38 16. 24. Luke 9. 23. and 14. 27. Mat. 10. 35. and 16. 25. Luke 9. 24. and 17. 33. m For mortalitie and corruption hes ãâã ãâã ue immortaliue and ãâã Iohn 12. 25. Mat. 10. 33. Luke 9. 26. and 12. 8. Mat. 16. 28. Luk. 9. 17. a The preaching of the Gospel receiued increased the spake this to coÌforte them and that they shulde not think thei trauailed in vaine Mat. 17. 1. luk 9. 28. b Christ sheweth his ãâã so ãâã as their ãâã was able to coÌprehend it c Peter measured this vision ãâã ding to his owne capacitie ãâã coÌsidering the end thereof Mat. 3. 17. 17. 5. d Christ onely must be the chief teacher and instructour of all them which pro ses them selues to be his members seing that God the father giueth him this autoritie and comman deth vs this obedience ãâã 3. 22. chap. 1. 11. Mat. 17 9. e Their false opinion was that ether Elias shuld rise againe from the dead or that his soule shulde enter into some other bodie Malach. 4 3. f That is Iohn Baptist. Isa. 13. 4. g To the nine which he left the day before Mat. 17. 14. luk 9. 38. â Or against theÌ h When the spirit cometh ãâã him he teareth him with inwarde sorow pangs as in a colike a man feeleth such grief as ãâã his bow els were rent a sunder i It semeth that this maÌ deserued not so sharpe an answer but Christ speaketh in his persone to the Pharises which were stub burne and desperate k The Lord is euer readie to helpe vs so that we put him not backe through our ãâã l All things that are agreable to the wil of God shal be granted to him that ãâã for faith seketh nothing that is ãâã to his wil or that is not reueiled in his worde m That is the feblenes imperfe ioÌ ãâã my faith n Meaning the childe o Meaning that prayer whiche is surely grounded vpon faith and hathe fasting ioy ned vnto it as a profitable aide Mat. 17. 22. luk 9. 22. p Because ãâã imagined that Christ shulde reigne temporally this matter of his death was so straÌ ge that they colde perceiue nothing Mat. 18. 1. luk 9. 45. q To wit onely as maÌ but as him in whome is all perfection fulnes of all graces and benefites Luk. 9. 49. 1 ãâã 12. 30 â Or ãâã great worke r ãâã he ãâã not him self to be myne yet in that he beareth ãâã ence to my Name it is ynough for vs. Mat 10. ãâã ãâã 18 6. Luk. 17. 1. s It is a ãâã of speache which ãâã that we shulde ãâã of all things which ãâã der vs to serue Christ. Mat. ãâã 29. ãâã 8. t ãâã ãâã declare the peines and ãâã ãâã of the ãâã Isa. ãâã 24. u He teacheth that it is better to be ãâã to God by salte and fyre that is to be purged and ãâã them to be sent into hel ãâã Leu 2. 23. x They which destroye the grace that thei haue receiued of God are as ãâã which hathe lost ãâã sauour and are worse then infideles Mat. 5. 13. Luk. 14. 34. Matth. 19. 1. ãâã 24. 1. Gene. 1. 27. Mat. 19. 4. a The true ãâã to amende abuses is to returne to the institution of thinges and to trie theÌ by Gods worde Gene. 2. ãâã 1. Cor. 6. 16. Ephe. ãâã 31. â Or persone 1. Cor. 7. 10. Mat 5. ãâã 19 9. Luk 16. 8. b For the seconde is not his wif but his harlot 1. Cor. 7. 10. ãâã 19. ãâã Luk. 18. 15. c We must be ãâã and voide of all pride ãâã ãâã 19 16. d It was ãâã with the Iewes that the greater shulde blesse the inferior Luk. 18. 18. Ebr. 7. 7. Therefore Christ being the head of his Church did by a solenne kind of prayer offer vp and ãâã the babes to God e Christ wolde ãâã that his goodnes was far re other wayes then the goodnes which is attributed o men which is ful of ãâã ãâã Exo. 20 19. f That is heappro ãâã certeine good seed that was in him which gaue him a litle ãâã g He toucheth his maladie and sore which before he ãâã not â ãâã cable rope h Which ãâã his trust in riches i For he can giue grace to the riche to cause him to enioye his riches as if he had them not Mat. 19. 27. Luk. 18. 28. Mat. 10. 30. Luke 13. 30. k VVe must not measure these promises by our owne ãâã desires but refer re the ãâã to Gods will who euen in ãâã ãâã and afflictions performeth the same so ãâã as they be ãâã Let vs there fore learne to ha ue ynough and to want that beyng tryed We maye ãâã our treasures in heauen l He saith this be cause they that ãâã firste called shuld go ãâã for ãâã de and not ãâã others Mat. 20. 17. Luke 18. 31. Mat. 20. 20. m Can you be partakers of my ãâã and ãâã n I haue not this commission for this time Luke 22. 25. o Christ wolde not that his disci ples aÌd ministers shuld beare rule as worldelie go ãâã do Mat. 20. 29. Luke 18. 35. p The
other EuaÌ gelistes mencion two but Marke nameth him that was most know ãâã q The more that Satan ãâã vs the more our faith oght to increase ãâã 21. 1. Luke 19. 29. a Christ sheweth by this poore en trie the ãâã of hys kingdome and it is not like to the great magnificence of this worlde Iol. ãâã 12. 14. b Euerie one she wed some signe of honour and reuerence â Or saue I pray thee c Many came in their own ãâã but Christ came in the Name of the Lord. d Because the Promes was made to him Mar. 21. 16. Luke 19. ãâã Mar. 21. 19. e Christ was sub iect to our infirmities f This was to de clare how much they displease God which haue but an out ward shewe and appearance without frute Isa. 56. 7. ãâã 7. ãâã g For nether colde they suffer reprehensioÌ nor that their profit shulde ãâã hyndered Mat. 21. 19. h Christ taketh occasion to instruct theÌ of the vertue of faith i He teacheth vs not hereby to aske whatsoeuer semeth good in our fantasies for our prayer must be ãâã on faith and our fayth vppon the worde of God Mat. 7 7. Luke 11. 9. Mat. 6. 14. Mat 22. 19. Luke 20. 1. k He comprehen deth hys whole office and ministerie l They came of malice and not to learne therefore Christ thogh theÌ vnworthie to be taught Isa. 5. ãâã Iere. 2. 21. Mat. 21. 33. Luke 20. 9. a The Greke word signifieth the vessel or fat which standeth vnder the wine-presse to receiue the ioyce or licour b He sheweth the plague that shal befale these ambitious aÌd co uetous rulers whose ãâã are hardened against Christ. Psal. 118 21. Isa. 28. 16. c It is the ordinaÌ ce of God that it shuld be so whiche most coÌmunely is contrarie to mans reason thus that whiche was spoken figuratiuely of Dauid is fulfilled in Christ read Matth. 22. 16. Mat. 22. 42. Act. 4. ãâã Rom. 9. 33. 1. Pet. 2. 8. d As the qualities of the minde or bodie or of outward things e As godlie ma ners agreable to Gods Law Mat. 22. 15. Luke 20. 20. f He gaue them to vnderstande that he knewe their malicious intent Rom. 13. 7. Mat ãâã 25. Luk. 20 27. Deu. 15. 5. g This was a politike law giuen for a time for the preseruation of families read Mat. 22. 24. h Not as touching the spiritual nature but concerning the ãâã of incorruption and immortalitie so that then there shal nede no more mariage Exod. 3. 6. Mat. 22. 32. i Then it followeth that they liue althogh thei be disceased out of this life Mat. 22. 35. Exod. 20. 2. Deut. 6. 4. â Or thoght Leuit. 19. 18. Mat. 22. 39. k That is dependeth on the first and procedeth of the loue of God Rom. 13. 9. Galat. 5. 14. Iam. 2 8. l He meaneth all the ãâã of the Law whe rein the hypocrites put great holines m Because he shewed him self willing to be taught and wel perceiued the dif ference betwixt our outwarde profession and that which Go ãâã ãâã require of vs. n Inspired by the holie Gost and by the Spirit of ãâã Mat. 22. 41. Luk. 20. 41. Psal. 110. ãâã â Or as he taught o He coÌdemneth not their apparel but theirvaine os tentatioÌ and out warde shewe of holines whereby they deceiued the simple people Mat. 23. 6. Luk. 11 43 and 20. 45. â Or and vnder ãâã praye long Mat. 23. 14. Luk. 20. 47. p VVhich is about half a ãâã Luk. 21. 1. q Our Sauiour estemeth our gif tes by our affections and ready willes Mat. 24. 1. Luk. 21. 5. Luk. 9. 43. Ephes. ãâã 2. Thess. 2. 3. ãâã a He doeth answer them of things that were more necessarie for them to know them the things that they demanded b vsurping the au toritie of Christ. c That they may be inexcusable Mat. 10. 19. Luk. 12 11. 21. 14. d He onely forbiddeth that care whiche cometh of distrust e This it not to make theÌ negligeÌt but to assure them that he wil ãâã them and instruct theÌ sufficiently with answers so that thei may hereby perceiue that their defence slaÌdeth not in their owne wisdome or cloquence Mat. 24. ãâã f This is ment of that time that the Romains shulde profane the Temple â Or being Dan. 9. 25. Luk. ãâã 20. g Because the destruction shal be moste extreme and cruel h For they shal not be able to flee i That you haue no let to hinder you when you shulde escape â Or man Mat. 24. ãâã ãâã 21. 8. k The elect may wauer be trou bled but they caÌ not vtterly be de ceiued and ãâã l Wherefore he that suffreth him self now to be seduced hathe none excuse m This ãâã that ãâã shal be a change of the whole ordre of ãâã Isa. 13 10. eze 32. 7. ioel 2. 10. 3. 15. Mat. 24. 30. n The worde signifieth the space of a 100. yeres albeit this came to passe be fore fiftie yeres o When the destruction of Ierusalem the persecutions and illusions shal comes but chiefly these are vnderstand of the seconde comming of Christ. p In that he is man mediator Mat. 24. 13. q For of the comming we are most assured but of the time the yere the day or houre we are ignorant there fore must watch continually Mat. 26. ãâã ãâã ãâã 1. Mat. 26. 6. ãâã 12. 2. â Or of pure narde and faithfully made a As Iudas who caused this murmuring b Which are in value about six pound sterling c To wit Iudas who was offended there with therefore made a busines d He toke oceasion by this oyne meÌt as of a thing euil done Mat. 26. 14. ãâã 22. 4. Mat. 26. 17. ãâã 22. ãâã Mat 26 ãâã ãâã 22 14. iohn ãâã ãâã e To dip the haÌd is as much to sav as he that is accu stemed to ãâã with me Psal. 41. 10. f This declareth that nothing can be done without Gods prouideÌce mat 25 23 Iohn 13. 18. act 1. 16. g Read Matth. Chap 26. 26. Mat. 26. 26. 1. cor 11 ãâã h The Greke worde is no bles se which is here taken onely to giue thankes as S. Luk. S. Paul interprete it S. Marke also speaking of the cuppe Iohn 16. ãâã i That is turned from me because of the persecutio Zac. 13. 7. Chap. 16. 7. Mat. 26. 36. ãâã 12 39. k His diuinitie was it were hid and his humanities hewed it self fully l Ab in ãâã and Abba in the Syrian tongue ãâã Father m He standeth not so to his owne wil but that willingly he offreth him self to obey God n He meaneth that the houre wil come when they shal be kept from sleping Mat. 26. 47. ãâã 22. 47. iohn 18. 3. o It was the facioÌ then to grete with kissing at their meetings and also at their departure p He ãâã it twise as if he
that the ãâã of their bap ãâã appeared in them p This worde comprehendeth the whole doctrine that Iohn ãâã q Meaning to their owne condemnation ãâã as some read with them selues because they durst not openly speak against Iohns ãâã for they feared the people Mat. 11. 16. r The songs of litle children are sufficient to condemne the Pharises and suche like s Liueth according to the ãâã of ãâã men Matth. 21. 46. t He sheweth that the wicked althogh they tur ne from God shal ãâã hin der the ãâã to coÌ tine we in the faith of the Gospel Mar. 15. 40. Iohn 20. 11. u This great loue is a signe that she felt her self muche ãâã vnto Christ who had forgiuen her so manie sinnes x The peace of ãâã cometh onely of faith Marke 16. 9. a Whereby they acknowledged the benefite which they had receiued of him and also shewed their perseuer ance which proued their knowledge ãâã be of God Or to them Matth. 13. 3. Marke 4. 10. b That is to vnderstand and beleue these things c which worde is here taken for an obscure or dar ke saying Isa. 6. 9. Matth. 13. 14. Mark 4. 12. Ioh 12. 40. Act 28. 26. Rom. ãâã 8. Mat. 13 18. Mark 4. 15. d That is acknowledge and consent to the worde and also reuerence it e when they returne home to their ãâã f Christ warneth his to do good with their light which they haue receiuede and to set it forthe before all mens faces Chap. 12. 13. Matth. 5. ãâã â Or bed Marke 4. 22. Chap. 12 2. Mat. 10. 26. Mar. 4. ãâã g Bothe to him self and to others Matt. 3. 12. and 25 ãâã Mar. 4. 15. Chap. 19. 20. Mat. 12. 46. Mar. 3 32. â Or ãâã h The spiritual kinred is to be preferred to the carnal and natural for asmuche as thereby of many we are made one confessing to gether one God one faith and one baptisme louing God aboue all thing and our neighbour as our selues i The worde signifieth a depe or sounde ãâã Matt. 8. 23. Mar. 4. 16. Mat 8 8. Mar. 5. 4. k Satan is tormented where Christ is ãâã â Or many a day agone l The worde signifieth to be inforced with violence as an horse when he is spurred m A Legion as writteth Vegetius conceiued 6000 footemen and 732 horsemeÌ but here it is taken for an vncer teine aÌd infinite nomber n That is so to depart that they colde do no harme this word Chap. 16. 25. is called hel where the deuils are chained in the obscuritie of dar kenes 2 Pet. 2. 6. o Christ knewe that he shulde better serue him being absent theÌ with him p This was his owne citie called Gadaris whi che was in the countrey of Decapolis therefore Luke dissen teth not frome Marke who writeth that he preached in Decapolis q Of the Congregation of the Iewes Mat. 9. 18. Mat. 5. 22. r Being assured of the ãâã and power of Iesus Christ aÌd not attributynge any vertue to the gar ment s Christ ãâã not impute vnto vs the weaknes of our faith but doeth accept it as thogh it ãâã perfite t Meanyng the ruler of the Syna gogue u Althogh she was verely dead yet to Christ it was more easie to restore her to life then it is for one maÌ to wake another out of his slepe x He meaneth those which he ãâã in the house Mat. 10. 1. Marke 3. 13 and 6. 7. Mat. 10. 7. Marke 6. 8. a To the ende they myght do ãâã charge with greater di ãâã wheÌ they had nothyng to let them â Or roddes b He willeth theÌ not to tary long but to preache from towne to towne c VVhich was a signe of detestation and of the vengeance whiche was prepared for such contemners of Gods benefites which are vnworthie that one ãâã receyue anye thyng at theyr hands Chap. 10. 11. Act. 13. 51. Mat. 14. 1. Marke 6. 14. Marke 6. 30. Mat. 14. 13. Marke 6. 32. Mat. 4. 15. mar 6. 3. ãâã 6. 5. d Christ fersaketh not them that folowe him but sendeth them sufficient relief e Iohn sayeth he gaue thankes Ioh. 6. 11. Mat. 16. 13. mar 8. 27. f For he knewe best his ãâã time which was appointed for him to be manifested in Mat. 17. 38. mar 8. ãâã Chap. 14. 27. mat 10. 38 16 24 mar 8. 35. g For as one day followeth another so doethone crosse folo we in the necke of ano ther. Chap. 12. 9. 17. 33 Mat. 10 33. mar 8 38. 2. tim 2 12. Mat. 16. 23. Mar. 9. 1. h Established enlarged by the preaching of the Gospel Mat. 17. 1. mar 9. 2. i That is what yssue he shulde haue and how he shulde dye k For other wayes they had not bene able to comprehend his great maieslie Mat. 3. 17. Mat. 1. 11. l Thei conceled it til Christs ãâã as Marke writeth Matth. 17. 14. Mark 9. 17. m Vnder the ãâã that his disciples colde not heale the sicke man he reproueth theÌ which wolde haue dimi nished his ãâã â Greke put these wordes into your ãâã n They were so blinde with this opinion that Christ shulde ha ue a temporal kingdome that they wolde not vnderstand when he spake of his death Mat. 18. 1. Mar. 9 33. Mar. 9. 38. o For as muche as he letteth vs not and ãâã is glorified by his occasion p Of his death Where by he Was exalted q Or ãâã or apparel for they knewè he Was a Iewe and as tou ching the ãâã opinion of the Temple read Iohn 4. 20 also thei hated ãâã Iewes because they ãâã ãâã them in religion r He reproueth their rashe and carnal affection Which Were not ãâã With Elias spirit 2. king 1. 10. Mat. ãâã 19. s We must not fol lowe Christ for riches and commodities but pre pare our selues to ãâã to the ãâã by his example t That is til he be dead and I haue done my duetie to him in ãâã him u We may not followe What semeth best to ãâã but onely Gods calling and ãâã by dead he meaneth those that are vnprofitable to ãâã God x To be hindered or entangled With respect of ãâã Worldlie commoditie or staied to go for Warde for anie paine or trouble Chap. X. a Meaning a great nomber of people Which are readie to be broghtvnto God b That is the preachers Mat. 9. 37. 2. king 4. 29. Mat. 10. 12. Mark 6. 10. c Not that they shal hurt you but that you ãâã preserued by my prouidence d He ãâã that thei shulde dispatche this iourney with diligen ce not occuping theÌ selues about other dueties e It Was their ma ner of salutacion Whereby they Wisshed helth ãâã f VVhiche loueth the doctrine of peace and the Gospel ãâã 24. 14. mat 10. 10. 1 ãâã 5. 18. g He Wolde not that they shulde tary long in one towne nether yet to be careful to change their
vaine boasting who in his life vanted him self to be the son ne of Abraham warning vs also hereby how litle glorious title auaile â Or good things â Or ãâã things â Or swallowing ãâã q VVhich declareth that it is to late to be instructed by the dead if in their life time thei can not profite by the liuelie worde of God r As faith cometh by Gods worde so is it maintened by the same So that nether we oght to loke for Angels from heauen or the dead to confirme vs therein but onelie the worde of God is sufficient to life euer lasting Mat. 18. 7. Mat. 9. 42. a That is to turne him backe froÌ the knowledge of God and his saluacion Mat. 18. 21. b That is manie times for by a certeine nomber he meaneth an vncerteine Mat. 17. 20. c That is if thei had neuer so litle of pure and ãâã faith d Meaning thei shulde do wonderful and incre dible things e Hereby is decla red that it is not ynough to do a piece of our duetie for a time but also we must con ãâã to the end f For God receiueth nothing of vs whereby he shulde staÌd bouÌde vnto vs. Leui 14. 2. g To whome ãâã did ãâã to iudge of the ãâã Leui. 14 2 and hereby also the ãâã ãâã haue no oc casion to grudge or murmute h He noteth here by their ingratitude that the greatest parte ne glect the benefites of God i It can not be de cerned by anie outwarde shew or ãâã whereby ãâã might the rather be knowen â Or among you k Ether by reasoÌ of the worde of God which is receiued by faith or that the Messias whome ãâã soght as absent is now present eueÌ within their owne dores and yet they knowe ãâã not l He speaketh of his first coÌming into the worlde Iohn 1. ãâã m Meaning his secoÌde comming wherein he shal appeare in glorie Mat. 24. 23. ãâã ãâã 21. n When men coÌtemned the iudgement of God where with they were before menaced Gen. 7. 5. mat 24. 38. ãâã pet 3. 20. Gen. 19. 24. o We must forgee that ãâã we ha ue left behinde vs to the end that we may the better folowe our heauenlie vo cacion Gen. 19. 26. Cha. 9 24 16. 25. ãâã ãâã 39. ãâã 8. ãâã ãâã 12 35. p This ãâã death shal engen dre life euerlasting Matt. 24. ãâã q He meaneth that no bande or coniunction is so strait that shulde stay vs. Mat. 24. 28. () Two shal be in the field one shal ãâã receiued and another shal be left r Nothing can hinder the faithful to be ioyned to their head ãâã Christ for thei shal gather vnto him as the rauening birdes about a ãâã Eccle. 18. 22. Rom. 12. 12. a The Greke wor de signifieth not to shrinke backe as cowards do in warre or to giue place in afflictioÌs or dangers ãâã Thes 5. 17. â Or auenge me b Who pleadeth against me c And seme ãâã in ãâã their wrongs d Whereby he declared his prou de aÌd disdainful heart e These were signes of an humble ãâã and lowlie heart Or and not the other Chap. 14. 11. Matth ãâã 12. Mat. 19. 13. ãâã ãâã 13. f The worde signifieth yong ãâã king babes which thei caryed in their armes g He meaneth the nourtes or them that bare the babes whome the Apostles rebuked h He comprehen deth aswel them that are infants of age as them al so which are like vnto infants in simplicitie and plainenes i Signifying that they ãâã to lay aside all malice and pride Mat. 19. 16. Mar. 10. ãâã k Because communely they abu sed this worde Iesus sheweth him that he colde not confesse him to be good except also he acknowledged that he was of God Exod. 20. 13. â Or cable rope l For he so gouer neth the hearts of his that their riches do ãâã blin de them Mat. 19. 27. Mat. ãâã 28. m The litle the a man ãâã which the grace of God is an hun dreth folde better them all the abundance that one can haue without him but the chief recompencé is in heauen Mat 20. 17. ãâã 10. 32. Mat. 20. 29. ãâã 10. ãâã n The people vsed to ãâã the ãâã by t is Name because they knewe he i i ãâã ãâã of the stocke of ãâã auid Psal. ãâã 11. Act. 2. ãâã o He was minde ful of ãâã ãâã receiued and also the people were moued thereby to glorifie God â Or a man of a wicked life Not ãâã this ãâã God ãâã to ãâã self fre libertie ether to chuse or forsake as in Abrahams house Mar. 18. 11. â Or false ãâã a ãâã adoption was a signe that the whole familie was receiued to mercie b To be the sonne of Abraham is to be chosen ãâã Rom. 9 8 to wal ke in the ãâã of the faith of Abraham Rom 4. 12. to do the workes of Abraham Iohn 8. 19. by the whiche things we are most ãâã ssu red of life euer la sting c This was to de clare to them that he must yet take great paines before his kingdome shulde be established d This piece of money is called Mina and the whole some mouÌ teth about the value of 17. poun de esteming eue ãâã piece about fiue nobles and seuen pence Rom. 8. 29. e God wil not that his graces re maine idle with vs. ãâã 25. 14. f VVhereby we learne that the se conde comming of our Sauiour Christ shal be more glorious excellent theÌ it doeth now appeare g They that suppresse the giftes of God ãâã in idlenes are with out all excuse Chap. 8. 18. matth 13. 12. 25. 29. h He that faithfully bestoweth the graces of God shal haue them increased but they shal be takeÌ away ãâã him that is vnprofita ble and vseth theÌ not to Gods glorie mar 4. 25. i Hereby we per ceiue the excellent constancie of ãâã who ãâã he did now fight against the terrour of death Gods iudgement yet went before his feareful disciples and led the way to death Mat. 21. 1. mar 11. 1. k Christ preuenteth such difficulties as might haue troubled his ãâã Mat. 21. 7. iohn 2. 4. l They wish that God may be appeased reconci led with men so by thi ãâã be glorified Chap. 21 6. mat 24. 1. mar 13. 1. m Christ partely pitieth the Citie which was so ne re her destruction and partely vp braideth their malice whiche wolde not embrace Christ their Sauiour therefore pronouÌceth greater punishment to IerusaleÌ then to other cities whiche had not receiued like graces n Meaning Christ without whome there is no saluation and with whome is all telicitie o Through thine owne malice thouart blinded Isa. 56. 7. p And receiuedst not the redemer which was sent ãâã â Or in the day time mat 21. 12. mar 11. 17. Iere. 7. 11. q That is were moste attent to heare Mat 21 23. mar 11. 27.
territorie Chap. 4. 1. q That is how they might be made cleane before God which the washings vnder the law did represent r They wereled with ambition fearing left their master shuldhaue lost his fame Chap. 1. 17. Chap. 1. 20. s No maÌ oght to vsurpeaniething further then God giueth him t And be exalted and ãâã estemed as his seruant u The minister coÌpared to Christ is but earth Rom. 3. 4. x For vnto Christ was giuen the ãâã ãâã of all grace that we might ãâã of him as of the onelie fountaine ãâã 10. 26. Abac 2 4. 1. Iohn 5. 10. a To giue place to their rage â Or ãâã Gen 33. 19. 48. 22. ios 24. 32. b Euen wearie as he was c VVhiche was midday d For the Iewes estemed the ãâã as wicked and prophane e Meaning of ãâã self ãâã his Father had sent to conuert this woman f VVhiche is the Ioue of God in his SoÌne powred into our hearts by the holie Gost vnto eucrlasting life Rom 5. 5. â Or the ãâã water 1. Ioh. 3. 5. g Of the spiritual grace h He shal neuet be dryed vp ãâã destitute i Til she was liuely touched with her fautes she mocked and ãâã not heare Christ. Deut. 12. 6. 2. king 17. ãâã k God being of a spiritual nature ãâã spiritual seruice and agreable to his nature 2. Corin. 3. ãâã l There is nothing that I hunger for more or wherein I take greater pleasure ãâã ãâã 37. Luke 10. 2. m Without ãâã the one at the others ãâã â Or ãâã n Meaning the ãâã o The ãâã shewed them selues willing to re ceiue his doctrine who being but strangers and skarsely knowing Christ are a coÌdemnation to the Iewes and all others which neglect Gods worde when it is offered p ãâã is had the right and true faith ãâã 13. ãâã q Here by his owne countrey he meaneth Ierusalem and the countrey about Mar. 6 4. Luke 4. 24. Chap. 2. 1. r The worde signifieth royal or one of the kings court ãâã it semeth that he was one of Herods court who was in great estimation with Herode whome the people called king â Or come ãâã 6. 14. â Or ãâã Leuit. ãâã 2. ãâã 16. 1. â Or the ãâã market a Where the shepe were washed that shulde be sa ãâã b Which signifieth the house of powring ãâã because the water ranne ãâã by con duits c This was to the end that the miracle might be so euident that no man colde speake against it Ier. 17. 22. d The ãâã that we endure are ãâã ments for our sinnes Exod. 4. 22. e That is propre and ãâã to him alone f It was ãâã for all Israel ãâã call God their Fa ther. But because Christ did ãâã to him self that he had power ouer all things and wroght as his Fa ther did thei gathered that Christ did not ãâã ma ãâã him self the Sonne of God but also equal ãâã him g That is he doeth communicate with him hauing the same power and the same wil. h ãâã giuing him power and rule ouer all i They that recei ue it by faith k To communicate it with vs. l That is to gouerne and ãâã all ãâã Mat. 25. 41. Chap. 8. 14. m Christ had respecte to their weakenes that hearde him and ãâã said his owne witnes shulde not be ãâã ãâã 3. 17. Chap. 1. 27. â Or lampe n But ye ãâã him quickely ãâã ãâã not perseuere Mat. 3. 17. and 17. 5. o In the Law aÌd Prophetes Deut. 4. 12. Act. 17. 11. p The people are more readie to receiue false prophetes then Iesus Christ. q Vaine glorie is a greate let for a man to come to God Chap. 12. 43. Gen. 3. 15. and 22. ãâã and ãâã 10. Deut. 18 15. r As Moses shal accuse theÌ truste in hym so they shall haue no greater enemies at the day of iud gement then the virgine Marie and the Saintes vpon whome nowe they call but whosoeuer doeth accuse Christ and their owne ãâã shall condemne the reprobat Chap. VI. a Called the lake of Gennesareth b ãâã Fethsaida and Capernaum were on this side the ãâã in ãâã of Galile but it ãâã here said that he weÌt ouer because there were diuers crikes and turninges ouer the which men feried Leui. 23. 2. Deut. 16. 1. Mat. 14. 16. Marke 6 38. c This summe ãâã mounteth to about fiue pound sterling Luke 9. 13. d Prayer and ãâã do saÌctifie our meates where with we are nourished e The abundante store of Goddes gifts ãâã not to make vs prodigal to wast theÌ f They imagined an ãâã king dome wythout the testimonie of Gods worde so that by thys meanes his spiri tuall kingdome shuld haue ãâã abolished g Ouer a corner of the lake Mat. 14. 25. Marke 6. 47. h Whereof eight make a mile i Wherefore it ãâã nedes fol lowe that Christ passed miraculously k This was not straight ouer the lake from side to side but ouer a crike or arme of the lake which saued mu che labour to theÌ that shulde haue gone about by land l Which nourisheth aÌd augmen ãâã our faith Chap. 1 32. Matt. 3. 17. 17. 3. m For when he appointed him to be the Mediator he set his marke and seale in him to bethe onelie one to reconcile God and man together 1. Iohn 3. 23. n Suche as be acceptable vnto God Exod. 16. 14. Nomb 11. 7. Psal. 77 24. Wisd. 16. 20. o He compareth Moses with the Father and man na with Christ who fedeth vs in to euerlasting life 1. Cor. 10. 3. ãâã 24. 29. p He shal neuer want spiritual nourrishment q God doeth regenerate his elect and causeth them to obey the Gospel Mat. 13. 55. r That is or beleue in me s By lightening his heart with his holie Spirit Isa. 54. 13. ierem 31. 33. Mat. ãâã 27. Exod. 16. 15. t Then there ãâã no fode that can nourish our soules but Iesus Christ. u Which giue life to the worlde x VVhere Christ is not there death reigneth 1. Cor. 11. 27. y As our bodies are susteined with meat and drinke so are our soules nourished with the bodie blood of Iesus Christ. z To eat the flesh of Christ and drinke his blood is to dwell in Christ aÌd to haue Christ dwelling in vs. a That is vnderstand it b He meaneth not that his humanitie descended ãâã heauen but he speaketh touching the vnion of bothe na tures ãâã buting to the one that which ãâã to the other Chap. 3. 13. c To wit if it be separate from the Spirit ãâã of it hathe the force for it cometh of the power of the Spirit that the flesh of Christ gi ueth vs life d Then without Christ there is but death for his worde onely lea deth vs to life Mat. 16. 16 e Althogh your nomber be smale yet shal ye be di minished Leui. 23. ãâã a At ãâã is feast they dwelled
for their office sake are called gods aÌd are made here in earth as hys lieutenaÌts wher fore if thys noble title be giuen to man muche more it appertei ned to hym that is the Sonne of God equall with his Father o VVhereby ãâã gathered that Christ was more excellent then Iohn Chap. 12. 3. Mat. 26. 7. a For althogh he dyed yet beyng restored so sone to life it was al most no death in comparison Chap. 7. 30. and 8. 59. and 10. 33. b He that walketh in his voca tion and hathe the light of God for his guide nedeth to feare no daÌgers The day also bothe sommer and Winter was wyth the Iewes diuided into 12 houres c They labored to stay Christ froÌ going into Iudea as thogh there had bene no nede â Or ãâã slepe d Which signisieth in our tongue a twynne in birth e Which were almost two mile f She sheweth some faith which not withstaÌding was almost ouer come by her affections g Christ restoreth vs from death to giue vs euerlastiÌg life h Wherein she declared her affe ction and reuerence that she ba re to Christ. i For ãâã for he felr our ãâã series as ãâã he suffred ãâã like k We read ãâã that his ãâã were so ãâã that he kept ãâã measure as ãâã do in our ãâã es ioyes and ãâã ther affections l That is a ãâã cle whereby Gods Name ãâã de be glorified m They resiste God thinking to hinder his worke by their owne ãâã n Or for that pre sent time o God made him to speake nether colde his impietie let Gods purpose who caused this wicked man euen as he did Balaam to be an instrument of the holie Gost. Because thei ãâã hereby to ãâã them ãâã more holie ãâã thei shul ãâã ãâã the ãâã but they ãâã not ãâã by God ãâã vse this ãâã Mart. 26. 6. Mar. 14. 3. a Euen from the head to the ãâã b Read Mark. 14. 5. 5 ãâã Chap. 13. 29. Matt. 21 8. mark 11. 7. Luk. 19. 35. c ãâã is saue I besech thee d This doeth Wel declare that his kingdome stode not in out Warde things ãâã 9 9. â Or the preasse e They Were of the race of the Iewes and came out of Asia and Grecia for els the Iewes Wolde not haue permitted that they shulde Worship With them in the Tem ple. f Which is that the knowledge of him shulde be manifest through all the Worlde g If the loue thereof let him from comming to Christ. h And so ãâã it for Christs sake Mat. 10. 39. 16.10 Marke 8. 35. Luk 9. 24. 17. ãâã Chap. 17. 24. Chap. 3. 14. i The reformacion and restoring of those things Which Were out of order k The crosse is the meane to ãâã the Church of God together and to drawe men to heauen l Not onely the Iewes but also the Gentiles Psal 89. 37. ãâã 4. 117. 2. Ezek. 37. 25. Chap. ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã Rom. 10. 6. m That is the Go spel Which is the power of God to saluacion to ãâã one that doeth beleue Isa. 6. 9. Mat. 13. 14. Mark 4. 12. Luke 8. 11. Act. 28. 26. n By deliueryng them from their miseries and giuing them true felicitie Rom. 11. 8. â Or ãâã o To be estemed of men Chap. 5. 44. Chap. 3. 19. and 9. 39. â Or condemne â Or condemne â Or condeÌneth Mark 16. 25. p ãâã that daye shal be the apptobacion of the Gospel Chap. 3. 17. Mat. 26. ãâã Mark 14. ãâã Luke ãâã ãâã a Because he sawe the danger great Which Was towarde them therfore he toke the greater eare for them b VVhiche Was the eating of the passeouer c And makethee cleane from thy sinnes d That is to be con inually purged of hys corrupte affections and ãâã cares Whiche remaine daylye ãâã vs. Chap. 15. ãâã e To serue ãâã another Chap. 15. 20. Mat. 10. 4. Luke 6. ãâã Psal. 41. 10. f Vnder pretence of friendes ãâã seketh hys destruction g To Wit the Christ and redemer of the World Mat. 10 40. Luke 10. 16. h For verie horror and ãâã tion of suche an abominable acte as Iudas shulde commit i He did openly affirme Mat 26. 21. Marke 14. 18. k Their ãâã Was not to ãâã at table but hauing their shoes of cust hions vnder theyr elbowes ãâã on their sides as it Were halfe lying Luke 22. 21. l Satan toke ful ãâã of him m Meaning that his crosse ãâã in geÌder a ãâã ãâã and that in it shal ãâã he ãâã bountie of God Chap. 7. 34. ãâã 19 18. n VVhereof we oght to ãâã cou ãâã ãâã ce as ãâã it ãâã newly ãâã Mat. 22. 39. Chap. 15. 2. ãâã Iohn 4. 21. o VVhen thou shalt be more strong Mat 26. 14. ãâã 14. 30. a For in so beleuing no troubles shall ouercome them b So that there is not onely place for him but for all his c At the ãâã day Act. 1. 11. d He was not altogether igno ãâã at but his knowled ge wis weake imperfite e Therefore we muste begin in him contine we in him and ãâã end in him f For the verie fulnes of the diuinitie remaineth in Christ. g In that that he is man h Who declareth his maiestie and vertue by his ãâã and miracles i This is referred to the whole bo die of the Church in whome this vertue of Christ doeth shine and remaine for euer Chap. 16. 23. mat 7. 7. mar 11. 24. iam 1. 5. k I haue comforted you whiles l Was with you but hensforthe the holie Gost shal comfort you and preserue you I So called becau se he worketh in vs the trueth m VVhich thing he doeth by the vertue of his Spirit n He shal sensibly ãâã that the grace of God abi deth in him o But the brother of ãâã p VVhereby he aduertiseth them not to haue respect to the worlde lest they shulde be draweÌ backe by ãâã example q That is not his alone for he had nothing separate from his Father r All comfort prosperitie s In that that Christ is become man to be Media ãâã ãâã God and vs. t SataÌ executeth his rage tyran nie by the permission of God u SataÌ shal assaile me with all his force but he shal not finde that in me whiche he loketh for for I am that innoceÌt lambe without spot Mat. ãâã 13. Chap. ãâã 11. a VVe can bring forthe no frute except we be in greffed in Christ. b VVe muste be rooted in Iesus Christ by faith ãâã cometh of ãâã word of God c So that ye folowe Gods word which ye coÌprehend by faith d VVhere with I ãâã you e Perfect entier Chap. 13. 34. 1. Thess. 1. 9. 1. ãâã ãâã 3. 11. 4. 21. f So that there is nothing omitted that is necessarie for vs and concer ning our saluacioÌ Mat. 28. 19. g The worde also signifieth
necessarie affaires were called by this name as Isa. 39. 7. Isa. 53. 7. p Albeit Christ was in graue and in deathes baÌdes feling also his Fa ther 's angre against sinne yet he brake the ban des of death and was exalted q The ãâã which he suffred was the beginning of his glorie Act. 2. 24. r That is how long his age shal endure for being risen froÌ death death shal no more reigne nether shal his king dome euer haue end or els we may take generatioÌ for his Church which neuer shal haue ende for now they sit in the heauenlie pla ces with Christ their head as s And he now reigneth in heauen t He declared at length this matter of so great im portance u With a pure perfect heart Ephes 2. 6. x This was to the intent that he might knowe so muche the bet ter that Philip was sent to him by God â Or perceiued him self to be y Some thinke this citie was also called Asdod Ios. 15. 47. a He persecuted with a great rage and crueltie the innocent blood which he thirsted for ãâã which declareth wherunto man is led by his rash zeale before he haue the true knowledge of God Rom. 9. ãâã Gal. 1. 13. b That is of that secte or sorte Chap. 22. 6. 1. Cor. 15. 8. c That is to resist God when he pricketh and ãâã ãâã our consciences d Meaning Sauls voice as e For onely Saul knewe that Iesus spake vnto him Chap. 22. 9. f For he was blinde g He was so rauished with the vision that he did meditate nothing but heauenlie things and there with was satisfied h A worthie seruant of God and endued with excellent graces aboue others i To beare me witnes and set for the my glorie k Prouing by the conference of the Scriptures l That was after thre ãâã that he had remained at ãâã and in the countrey about m The Gouernour at their request appointed a watche as he de clareth to the Co ãâã Gal 1. 18. Cor. 11. 32. Gal. 1. 19. â Greke went in and out n VVith ãâã Iames. o Making open profession of the Gospel p VVhich were Iewes but so cal led because they were dispersed through Grecia and other countreis q Because it was his owne countrey and there he might haue some autoritie â Or ãâã thy ãâã together r Meaning the greatest parte s A place so called not a citie t That is a ãâã or rebucke â Or riche u To the ãâã they might burie her ãâã for this was their custome x For she was restored to life rather that others might ãâã occasion to beleue and glorifie God then for her owne sake â Or ãâã a Who had for sa ken all superstitions and gaue him self to the true seruice of God b That is God did accept ãâã whereof it followeth that he had faith for ãâã it is impossible to please God () He shal speake wordes vnto thee whereby thou shal be saued all thine house c VVhich was midday d As camels hordogs oxen shepe swine and suche like which man nourisheth for his vse â Or commune e In taking away the difference ãâã vncleane bestes and cleane he sheweth there is no difference betwixt the Iewes ãâã f Take it not for polluted ãâã impure g TheÌ ãâã obedience which ãâã of faith ought to bewith out dout or questioning â Or Peter h Shewed to muche reuereÌce and farre passing decent ordre as thogh Peter had bene God â Or ãâã Deu. 10. 17. 2. Chro. 19. 17. Iob. 34. 19. Wisd. 6. 8. ãâã 35. 16. Rom. 2. 11. Gal 2. 6. Ephe. 6. 9. Col. 3. 25. 1. pet 1. 17. i By this speache the Ebrewes meane ãâã whole religioÌ of God which without faith profiteth ãâã nothing k That is he that is vpright and doeth ãâã to no man but doeth good to all l Meaning the re conciliation betwene God and man through Christ Iesus Luk 4. 14. m That is endued him with graces giftes aboue all others Luk. 2. 14. ãâã 31. 34. Micah 7. 11. Chap. 15. 9. n We oght not to debatre them of baptisme whom God testifieth to be hist for seing they haue the principal that is lesse ought not to be denied theÌ () Iesus Christ. a For they colde not yet comprehende this secret which was hid from the Angels them selues euen from the creatioÌ of the worlde b He purgeth his fact before the Church Eph. 3. 8. Col. 1. 26. Chap. 2. 4. 3. 6. Chap. 1. 5. 19. 4. c That is ãâã with the ãâã of the holie Gost Mat. 3. 11. Mar. 1. 8. Luk. 3. 16. Iohn 1. 17. () Not to giue theÌ the holie Gost d Their modestie declareth that they were not ashamed to vnsay that where of they had vniustly blamed Peter e This ãâã dependeth vpon faith â Or trouble Chap. 8. 1. f He meaneth not the Iewes which being scatered abroad in diuers countreis were called by this name but the Grecians which were Gentiles g The power vertue h This was the moste famous citie of ãâã and ãâã vpon ãâã â Or continue with the Lord. i VVhere as before they were called disciples now they are named ChristiaÌs k This prophecie was an occasion to the Antiochians to relieue the necessitie of their brethren in Ierusalem l To signifie that it came of a chari table minde towardes them a VVho was called Agrippa the soÌne of Aristobu lus he was nephe we vnto Herode the Great bro ther of Herodias b There was another so named whiche was the sonne of Alpheê° c It came them of no zeale ãâã religion but one ly to flatter the people d The nomber beyng sixtene was deuided by ãâã to kepe diuers wardes Chap. 5. 19. e Read Mark 6 9 f For thei thoght that Herode wolde haue put him to death as he had purposed g For they dyd knowe by Gods worde that An gels were appoin ted to defeÌde the faithful and also in those dayes they were accustomed to se suche sights h VVhiche was lesse suspect by reason of the brethren i Bothe by flatte ring wordes aÌd also by ãâã k VVhiche he ãâã haue done if he had punished the flatterers of whose vanitie he complained when he was a dying as Iosephê° ãâã l The ãâã of the punishment declareth howe GOD detesteth pride and tyran nie his grande fa ther also was eaten of ãâã m The more that tyrants go about to supresse Gods worde the more doeth it increase n VVhiche was to distribute the almes sent from Antiochia Chap. 11. 29. a This declareth that God calleth of all ãâã both hie and lowe b The worde signifieth to execute a publicke charge as the Apostleship was so that here is shewed that ãâã preached aÌd pro phecied Chap. 14. 26. c VVhich are the doctrine of the the Apostles that onelie leadeath vs to God d This was another
Paul defendeth himself in iudge ment â Or to ãâã pleasu ãâã d Seing him self betrayed by the ambition of the iudge he desireth that in considera tioÌ of his fredom he may be sent to Rome e It is lawful to require the defeÌse of the Magistrate to maintei ne our right f Without whose consent he colde do nothing g This was his owne sister whome he enter teined h This worde doeth also signifie religion but he speaketh in contempt of ãâã true doctrine â Or ãâã i Platterers firste vsed to call ãâã by this name and after it so growed into vse that ãâã princes refu sed it not as appeareth by Plipies Epistles to Traiane a Forasmuche as he beste vnderstode the religion he ought to be more attentiue b Paul speaketh of this sect according to the peoples estimation who preferred it as moste holie aboue all others for their doctrine was least corrupte Chap. 8. 3. c That is I appro ued their crueltie whiche they vsed against him Chap. 9. 3. Chap. 9. 4. and 22. 7. d Of the Iewes e Althogh this properly ãâã vnto God yet he applieth this vnto his ministers vnto whome he ãâã hys holye Spirite Chap 13. 14. Chap. 21. 30. f He knewe that the Law and the ãâã were of God but he did not vnder stand the true ap plyinge of the same 2. Cor. ãâã 25. a ãâã Sidon to Myra they shuld haue sayled north and by west but the windes caused them to ãâã to Cyprus plaine North thence to Cilicia North aÌd by East and so to Pamphilia and ãâã playne west â Or ãâã b VVhiche was an hygh ãâã of ãâã bowing to the sea ward c This ãâã the Iewes obserued aboute the moneth of October in the Faste of their expiration ãâã 23. 37. So that Paul thoght it better to winter there then ãâã ãâã in the ãâã of winter whiche was at hande d That is the Northeast wind or ãâã ãâã winde that is ãâã ãâã aÌd stormie e ãâã ãâã ãâã west be South frome Candye straight toward the goulf ãâã which were certeine ãâã sandes that swal lowed vp all that thei caught â Or boat â Or ãâã out the ãâã f That is ye shulde ãâã ãâã the losse by auoydynge the ãâã g They colde not the ãâã hym of ãâã seing that this was the ordinaÌce of God h The graces aÌd ãâã which God giueth to his ãâã pro fire ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã whi che are vnworthie to ãâã the ãâã therof i Faith is groun ded vppon the worde of God k Thys sea in ãâã ãâã ãâã taken for al that ãâã whyche was ãâã the mountaines ãâã ãâã and so ãâã Italie from Dalmatia and goeth vp to Venice l Paul wolde vse suche meanes as God had ordeined lest he shuld seme to haue ãâã hym m He meaneth an extraordinarie abstinence whiche came of the feare of death aÌd so toke away their ãâã n By thys ãâã phrase is ment that they shulde be in all ãâã safe and sounde 1. Sam. 14 45. 1. Kyng 1. 52. ãâã 10. 30. o This declareth the great and bat barous ingratitude of the wicked which can not be wonne by no ãâã a Now called Malta â Or heape b Suche is the per uers iudgement of men that they condemne suche as thei se in anie affliction c VVhome thei made a Goddesse called ãâã Dice or Nemesis d Beholde the ex tremitie of these infideles how muche thei are bent to superstitioÌ for after one rage and errour ãâã fell into another e These the Paynims fained to be ãâã children and gods of the sea f These places were ãâã from Rome a daies iourney or there about â Or ãâã g No doute the Captaine vnderstode bothe by Festus lettres aÌd also by the repor te of the vnder captaine that Paul had commit ted no faute h That is for ãâã Christs cause whome thei had long loked for as he that shulde be the redemer of the worlde i That this kingdome which was spoken of by the Prophetes was offred vnto them ãâã the comming of Christ. Isa. 6. 9. Mat. 13. 14. Mar. 4 12. k Hereby the hearts of the infideles ought to be molified the weakelings confirmed that thei ãâã not offended by the slubbernes of the ãâã Luk 8 10. Iohn 12. 40. Rom. 11 8. l The worke of God healeth ãâã the vertue of the Spirit is ioyned with it and it is preached generally that all might be inexcusable â Or minister a Through Gods mercie and also appointed by coÌmandement to this Apostle ship b Or chosen by the eternal coun sel of God or by the declaration of the same counsel Act. 13. 2. Deu. 18. 15. Act. ãâã 22. c The Scriptures onely set forthe the great benefite of God promi sed and performed to the world in Iesus Christ d Meaning of the posteritie and of the flesh of the virgine Marie e By the Spirit he declareth that Christ is God whose power did so ãâã his humanitie that it colde not fele corruption nor yet remaine in death f Which was that moste liberal benefite to preache the vnsearcheable riches of Christ g That is by the mercie of God are adopted in Iesus Christ. h The fre mercie of God and prosperous successe in all things i That is through all Christian Churches k Earnestly and from the heart l In preaching the Sonne of God that is ãâã tion and peace through Christ. 1. Cor. 1. 2. ãâã 1. 3. 2. Tim. 1. 6. m Ether by Satan n ãâã ãâã spo ken ãâã 15. 16. 1. Thess. 2. 18. or by the holie Gost Act. 16. 6. or called to some other place to preache the Gospel o He passeth not for the mocking of the wicked Chap. 15. 20. p Or effectual in strument â Or Gentile Habak 2. 4. q The perfection and integritie which whoseeuer hathe appea reth before God holie blameles and can be accused of no faute this iustice is contrarie to ãâã iustice or the iustice of workes onely is appretheÌ ded by faith which daily increaseth Psa. 84. 7 r Which God approueth 1 Cor. 1. 18. s He deuided the law of nature corrupt into vngodlines and vnrighteousnes Vngodlines conteineth the false worshipping of God vnright eous nes breache of loue toward maÌ t In that they nether worship God as nature ãâã teacheth them nor loue one another Gal. 3. ãâã ebr 10. ãâã u They worshiped him not as he prescribed but after their good intentions Ephe. 4. 18. x Or deliuered them as a iuste iudge y Seing men wolde not accor ding to the knowledge that God gaue them worship him a right he smote their hearts with blindnes that they shulde not knowe them selues but do iniurie one to another and commit suche horrible vilenie z That is suche one as was desti ture of all iudgement ãâã aboue the Creator Or appetite a Which Law God writ in their consciences and the
be without offence of Gods worde e Knowledge it self shal be perfited in the worlde to come and not abolished but the maner of knowing aÌd teaching shal cease when we shal be before Gods presence where we shal nether nedescho les nor teachers f That is imperfectly â Or teache g The Mysteries of God â Or taught of God h Because it serueth bothe here and in the life to come but faith hope apperreine onely to this life a That is to expounde the worde of God to the edification of the Church b Vnder staÌdeth him c By the Spiritual gift which he hathe reciued d For he ãâã none saue him self e The prophecie expoundeth that which God hath reueiled and the doctrine teacheth that which he hath giuen vs to vnderstand â Or flute f Your wordes shal be loste for ye shal nether glorifie God thereby nor profit man â Or as the thiÌg ãâã g That is they may be able to be vnderstand h He coÌdemneth the Corinthians of barbarousnes in that things whereby they thoght to haue atteined to the greatest praise of eloquence i And doeth his parte k Not in respect of him that praieth but in respect of the Church which is nothing edified thereby l Or giues tankes by singing m One onely ma de the praiers and the rest of the cople followed in heart his wordes when he had prayed thei all said Amen signifying that they beleued asseuredly that God wolde graÌte their requeste n That is moste fewe Mat. 18. 3. Isa. 28. 11. Deut. 28. 49. ierem 5. 15. ezek 3. 6. o He ãâã then moste shar pely that God wil punish the contempt of his worde and their contrefait ignoraÌce forasmuche as to speake which vnknoweÌ tongues is à signe of Gods curse towards the ãâã p Of Gods curse when they are not vnderstand q By hearing his secret ãâã ript vp and his sinnes reproued by Gods worde he is compelled by his owne conscience to praise God r Which expounde the worde of God s Paul beareth as yet with their weakenes because also these were the gifts of God but yet he sheweth that ãâã shuld not passe this measure that first one after another and at the vtmost the third shulde read in a strange language which was to declare Gods miracle in the gift of tongues but chiefly he ãâã mandeth that nothing be done without interpre tacion 1. Tim. 2. 11. t Or learning which Gods Spirit moue th them to vtter u To the intent that others maye iudge of him that hathe spoken if he haue passed the compas of Gods worde wherefore Gen. 3. 16. x Because thys disordre was in the Churche that women vsurped that which was peculiar to men the ãâã here sheweth what is mete to be done and what is not and albeit he mencioned this abuse afore yet he referred it to this place to be reproued because there he broght it in for another purpose S Iohn comman deth to trye thy spirits whether thei be of God y Are ye the first or the last Christians that ye nether submit your selues to the churches of whom you haue receiued the Gospel nor ha ue respect to the others to whom the Gospel doeth likewise apperteine z To haue vnder standing of spiritual things a If anie man haue iudgement let him acknowledge that I speake of the Spirit of God and so let him obey if he haue no iudgemeÌt let him acknow ledge his ignorance and trouble not the Church but credit them that are learned Gal. 1. 11. * Menander in Thaidi Isa. 53. 5. 1. Pet. 2. 42. a If you beleue to be saued by the Gospell ye must beleue also the resurrection of the dead whiche is one of the principal points therof or elles your belief is but vaine b He sheweth that nothynge ought to be taught which we ha ue not learned by Gods worde * Menander in Thaidi Ionas 2. 1. * Menander in Thaidi Iohn 20. 19. * Menander in Thaidi c Althogh Iudas wanted yet they were so called still Act. 9. 4. * Menander in Thaidi Roma 6. 3. Ephe. 3. 8. Ephe. 3. 7. * Menander in Thaidi d For he was but the instrument and minister aÌd giueth the whole glorie to God e Christes death ãâã not effectual excepte he ryse from death f For if Christ be swaloed vp of death there remaineth no hope of life anymore g As mortification and remission of sinnes de pend on Christs death so oure quickenyng and restoring to life stand in hys resurrection h You are not forgiuen norsan ctified â Or onelye for this life sake * Menander in Thaidi i As by the offring of the ãâã ãâã the whole frute is sanctified so by Christ whi che is the ãâã that is raised all haue assurance of the resurrectioÌ Col. 1. 18. Reuel 1. 5. k VVho ãâã first from the dead to take possession in our fleshe for vs his members 1. Thes. 4 15. l To wit the faithfull * Menander in Thaidi m Christ as he is man and ãâã of the Churche ãâã said to be subiect to God but in respecte of the worlde is kyng of heauen and earth this kingdome staÌdeth in gouernynge the faithfull aÌd ouer comming the ad uersaries euen death the chiefest whyche done Christ being per fited with all his membres shal as he is maÌ head of he Churche with his felowe heires deliuer his kingdome aÌd be ãâã to GOD with whom and the holie Gost in God head he ãâã equall * Menander in Thaidi * Menander in Thaidi n VVe shal be per fectlye fulfilled ãâã hys glorie and ãâã o That is as dead and because thei were but ãâã come to Christe wolde be baptized before they dyed Psal. 110. 1. p Except ãâã things be true of Christs kingdom and his subiectioÌ what shall become of theÌ whom the Church daily baptizeth for to destroye death in them whyche is the end of baptis me and so they to rise againe Isa. 22 13. Act. 2. 3 4. Ebr. 1 12 and 10. 13. Psal 8. 7. Ebr. 2. 8. q I take to witnes all my sorrowes wherein I may iustly rereioyce in the Lord that I haue susteined them among you r That is hauing regarde to this present life and not to Gods glorie and to life euer lasting * Menander in Thaidi * Menander in Thaidi Wisdo 2. 6. s There is one sub staÌce as touching the flesh both of man beast but the difference is as touching the qualitie t Euen as the suÌne and the moone being of one substance differ in dignitie so in the resurrection our bodies shal haue more excel lent qualities theÌ they haue now u For what is more vile to loke vnto theÌ the dead carkeis x ãâã changing the substance but made partaker of the diuine nature y Christ bringeth vs from heauen the Spitit of life Gen. 2. 7. z This is attributero Christ as coÌ cerning ãâã not
the Churche of Christ whiche is our mother and not of the Synagogue whiche is a seruant vnder the Law Rom. 9. 8. By the libertie wherewith Christ hath made vs fre a If you ioyne circumcision to the Gospel as a thing necessarie to saluacion Chap. V. Act. 15. 2. b We liue in hop through that Spi rit whiche causeth faith and whiche is giuen to the faithfull that we shulde ãâã faith and not by the Law obtaine ãâã ãâã of glorie whiche Christe gyueth frely 1. Cor. 1. 17. c Then whatsoeuer is not the worde of God whiche here he calleth trueth is verie lies d Which is God e A litle corruption doeth destroy the whole doctrine 1. Cor. 5. 6. f That ye wil ãâã the word of God purely g That is the doctrine of the Gospell whiche the worlde ab horred as a sclanderous thing and therewith were offended h Meaning the seconde table ãâã ãâã 18. ãâã 22. 39. k That is the na tu all man ãâã against the ãâã of of ãâã Mar. 12. 31. Iam. 2. 8. Rom. 13. 14. 1. Pet 2. 10. i In the man regenerat i If you be ãâã by the Spirit of ãâã that whiche ye do ãâã ãâã to God althogh it be nor be ãâã fity m For they are vnder the ãâã or grace n Christ hath ãâã onely remitted their sinnes but sanctified tl ãâã into ãâã es of lif o That being dead to sinne liuyng to God we may declare the same in holines and innocencie of life a Father by reason of his flesh or Satan b Christe exhorteth in ãâã places to mutual loue ãâã brotherlie loue is here called the Lawe of Christ and his comman ãâã ãâã n. 13. 14. and. 5. 12. c He sheweth that man hathe nothing of him ãâã whereof he shulde ãâã 2. ãâã 1. 12. Wherein he may reioyce ãâã me but not before God d For his reioycing is a ãâã of a good conscience e For it were a shame not to prouide for their corporal necessities whiche fede our soules with the heauenlie things 1. Cor. 5 8. 1. ãâã 9. 7. f He proueth that the ministers must be nowrished for if men onely prouide for wordely thinges ãâã out respect of the life euerlasting then they procure to them selues death and mocke God who hath giuen them his ministers ãâã ãâã them heauenlie thing 2. Thes. 3. 13. g The frute whiche God hathe promised h By the outwarde ceremonies i That is for prea ãâã Christ ãâã k That thei haue made you Iewes l By the ãâã he meaneth all ou warde pom pe ãâã things which please mens fantasies m Which is rege nerate by faith Rom. 2. 19. n That is vpon the Iewes as o Let no man trouble my preaching from heÌce forthe for my markes are witnesses how valiantly I haue foght p Which ãâã odious to the worlde but glorious before God a As with the knowledge of God in Christ with faith hope charitie other gifts â Or places b This election to lif euerlasting can neuer ãâã ãâã ged but in temporal offices which God hathe appointed for a certeine space when the terme is expired he chaÌ geth his election as we se in Saul and Iudas 1. Cor. 1. 2. c When Christs iustice is imputed ours d Whereas we were not the ãâã children he receiued vs by grace and made vs his children 2. Cor. 1. 3. 1. Pet. 1. 3. 2. Tim. 1. 9. e The principal end of our election is to praise and glorifie the grace of God Colos. 1. 22. f That is in Christ. g By this he mea neth the whole bodie of the Churche which he deuideth into them which are in heauen and them which are in earth also the faithful which re maine in earth staÌd of the Iewes and the Gentiles h To wit the Iewes i Thogh we be redemed froÌ the bondage of sinne by the death of Christ Rom 6. 22 ãâã we hope for this seconde ãâã which ãâã be when we shal possesse our inhe ritaÌce in the heauens whereof we haue the holie Gost for a gage as Chap. 4. 30. k Of Christ. l Made him Go uernour of all things bothe in heauen and in'earthe so that Christs bodie is now onely there or elsit shuld not be a true bodie and his ascencioÌ shulde be but a fantasticall thing and onely imagi ned Col. 2. 12. Chap. 3. 7. Psal. 8. 8. Ebr. 2. 8. m This is the great loue of Christe towarde his Churche that he counteth not him selfe perfect without vs whiche are his members therefore ãâã Church is also Christ as 1. Cor. 12. 12. Col. 2. 13. Chap. 6. 12. ãâã Meaning Satan b Not by creation but by AdaÌs ãâã so by ãâã c Bothe Iewe Gentil â Or with Christ. d We that are the members are raised vp ãâã death and reigne without head christ in heauen by faith e Here he meaneth as concerning grace and not by nature f He sheweth here that the further the Gentiles were of frome the grace of God the greater detters they are now to the ãâã 1. Sam. 17. 26. Eze. 44 7. Rom. 9. 4. g It was but one couenant but because it was diuers times confirmed and established ãâã here he calleth them Couenants h Whereno promesis there is no hope â Or ãâã i That is the cau se of the diuision that was ãâã ne the Iewes the Gentiles k For in Christ ãâã all things were accomplished which were pre figurate in the Law l For of the Iewes and the Gentils he made one flocke â Or death Rom. 5. 2. a He reioyceth in that he suffred imprisonmeÌt for the maintenance of Christs glorie b Which was his ãâã to prea che vnto the ãâã c That is in the first chap of this Epistle ver 9. d Althogh the fathers and the Prophetes had reuelations certeine yet it was not in comparison of that ãâã which was shewed when the GeÌtiles were called nether ãâã was the time ãâã the maner knowen Chap. 1 19. 1. Cor. 15 9. ãâã 1. 16. Rom. 16. 25. Col. 1. 26. 2. Timo. 1. 10. e The Angels Tit. 1. 2. 1. Pet. 1. 20. f The Churche being gathered of so many kindes of people is an example or a glasse for the An gels to beholde the wisdome of God in who hath turned their particular discords in to an vniuersal concorde and of the ãâã of bondage hathe made the Church of ãâã dome g He that is not of the bodie of Christ is in death h The faithful which ãâã befo re Christ ãâã were adopted by him and make one familie with the Saincts which yet remaine a liue i For we confesse that which we beleue k All perfection on euerie side is in him l That all the graces of God may abounde in you Rom. 16. 25. m In that we fele Christ in vs. a For the Lords cause Philip. 1. 27. Col. 1. 10. 1. Thess. 2. 12. b ãâã by ãâã you
owne ãâã o They ãâã and defraude theyr bodie to shewe theÌ selues greater hypocrites a After that ye haue bene dead to beggerlie ceremonies b VVhich ether serue but ãâã a time or els are ãâã by men c With Christ. Ephe 5. 3. d Extinguish all the strength of the corrupt nature which resisteth against the Spirit that ye may ãâã in the ãâã and not in the flesh Rom. 6. 4. Ephe. 4 ãâã Ebr. 12 2. 1. Pet. ãâã 1. 4. 1. ãâã 1. 26. 5. 1. 9. 6. e He sheweth what frutes are in them that are dead to the worlde and are risen again with Christ. Ephe. 6. ãâã â Or the bowels of mercies f Let it guide all your doings â ãâã gracious ãâã thankefull g The doctrine of the Gospel h Psalmes properly ãâã complainings to God narrations and expostulations hymnes ãâã thankes giuing songs ãâã praises and thankes ãâã but not so ãâã and amply as hymnes do â Or thankes giuing Ephe. 4 29. i VVhich are in the Lord. 1. Cor. 10. ãâã ãâã 5. 22. k By to muche rigour 1. Pet. 3. 1. Ephe. 6. 1. Ephe. 6. 5. ãâã 2 9. 1. Pet. 2. 18. l The ãâã master ãâã 10. 27. Wisd. 6 8. m VVhether ãâã be master ãâã seruant Eccle. ãâã 26. Rom 2. 11. ãâã 2. 6. Ephe. 6. 9. Luk. 18. 1. 1. Thes. 5. 17. Ephe. 6 18. 2. Thes 3. 1. a That I maye frely preache the Gospel Ephe. 5. 15. b To the commoditie of your neighbours c Bestowe the time well with the malice of ãâã euerie where plucked frome you and causeth you to abuse it d Perteining to edification and mixt with do vanitie ãâã ãâã e If they onely ãâã helpe him to preache the ãâã at Rome where was ãâã or those fiue and ãâã yeres that thei faine he ãâã at Rome f In preaching the Gospel 2. Tim. 4. 11. g Ether to Paul or ãâã whiche thei wolde writt as an answere to this Epistle sent to the Colossians a For ãâã is no Churche whiche is not ãâã together in God 2 Thes. 1. 3. Philip. 1. 3. b Whiche declareth it selfe by ãâã liuelie frutes c Whereby you declared your sel ues moste readie and painfull to helpethe poore d The effectual preaching of ãâã Gospel is an euideÌt token of our election e To beleue and to be fully persuaded to haue the ãâã of the holie Gost and Ioyfully to suffer for Christs sake are most certeine signes of our ele ction â Or paternes f To wit al that faithfull g For ãâã are dead things and onely fained fantasies h Which he shall execute vpon the wicked a Not in outwarde shew and in pompe but in trauel and in the feare of God b By his helpe grace Act. 16. ãâã c Whiche declareth a naughtie conscience â Or inautoritie d He huÌbled him self to supporte all things with out al respecte of ãâã euen as the tender mother which nourceth her children and thinketh no office to vile for her childrens sake Act. 20. ãâã 1 Cor. 4 ãâã 2. Thes. 3. 8. e For it is not possible to auoide the reproches of the wicked ãâã euer hate good doings ãâã 4. ãâã ãâã 1. 27. Col. 1. 10. f In his Name and vnder his pro tection g And wolde hinder all men from their saluation h And heape vp the measure i He meaneth not this of all the Iewes in general but of certeine of theÌ particu larly which ceased not after they had put Christ to death to persecu te his worde and his ministers Mat. 3. 32. Rom. 1. 11. k Therefore I ãâã ãâã forget you except I wolde forget my self a Rather seking your coÌmoditie then mine owne in sending of Timotheus to you Act. 16. ãâã b His great ãâã toward the smale flocke c Meaning ãâã d If ye remaine constant in faith and true doctrine I shal thinke that all mine ãâã be so many ãâã and ãâã restored from death to life e If you perseuere in faith Rom. 1. 10. 15. 23. f VVe must daily growe from faith to faith Chap. ãâã 23. ãâã corin ãâã 8. a And as it were ouercome your selues b The greke worde signified suche commande ments as one receiueth from ãâã man to giue them in his name to others c That is that you shulde dedicate your selues wholy vnto God Rom. 12. 2. Ephes. 5. 17. d That is his bodie which is pro phaned by suche filthines 1. Cor. 6. 8. 1. Cor. 1. 2. e By these precepts of godlie life it appeareth what were ãâã commadements which Paul ãâã vnto them 1. Cor. 7. 40. Ioh. 13. 34. 15. 12. 1. Iohn 2. 8. 4. 21 2. Thess 3. 7. f And not be idle g As strangers and ãâã h But that ye may be able by your diligence to supplie your waÌt and necessitie i He doeth not condemne all kinde of sorrow but that which procedeth of mfidelitie k Or haue continued constantly in the faith of Christ. l By raising their bodies out of the graue m Which is in the Name of the Lord and as ãâã shulde speake him self 1. Cor. 15 23. ãâã 24. 31. 1. Cor. 15. 12. ãâã Meaning them which shal be founde a ãâã o In this sudden taking vp ãâã shal be a kinde of ãâã of the qualities of ãâã bodies which shal be as a kinde of death a So muche the more we ought to be ware of all ãâã fantasies of men which ãâã them selues others in searching out ãâã the time that the Lord shal appeare ãâã for them selues a vaine prophecie and moste falsely ascribed to Elias 2000 ãâã the reuel 3 3 16 15. that 2000. yere before the Lawe 2000 vnder the Lawe and 2000. after the Lawe hee worlde shal endure b That is sud denly and vnloked for Mat. 24. 44. 2. ãâã 3. 10. Reuel 3. 3 16. ãâã c Here ãâã is taken for contempt of saluation when men ãâã we in sinnes ad wil not a walke to god lines d And not be ouercome with the ãâã of the worlde e That is lightued by the Gospel f Here it is ãâã onely to dye is ment of the faith ful Isa. 59. 17. ãâã 6 17. g As the flocke is bounde to loue the ãâã so is it his duetie to teache them aÌd ex hort them in true religion h Where this cause ceaseth that they worke not the ho nor also ceaseth and they must be expelled as wol ues out of the flocke Prou. 17. 13. 20 22. i Haue a quiet min de ãâã in Christ which shal make you reioice in the middes of sorrowes mat 5 ãâã rom 12 17. 1. ãâã 3 9. k God that hathe giuen his Spirit to his elect wil neuer suffer it to be quenched but hathe ãâã by what meanes it may be mainteined that is by suche exhortations as these by con tinual increase in godlines l The preaching of the worde of God Rom. 5 3. 2. cor 6
ãâã ne the clearnes thereof so the hardenes whiche we cannot some time compas or perfectly ãâã ãâã the Scri ptures ought not to take away from vs ãâã of the ãâã Or ãâã a That is Christ God ãâã b That is Christ being man c Which giueth ãâã and had it in him self Iohn 14. d Before all beginning e The effect of the Gospel is that we all being ioyned together in Christ by faith shulde be the sonnes of God Iohn 8. 18. f The frutes of our faith must de clare whether we beioyned in God or no for God being the verie puritie and ãâã wil not haue felowship with them which lie in sinne and darkenes h That is Christ with vs and we with our selues g In an euil conscience and with out the feare of God i If we be not ashamed earnest ly and openly to acknowledge our selues before God to ãâã sinners Ebr. 9. 14. 1. Pet. 1. 19. ãâã ãâã 6. 1 king 8 46. 2. Chron. 6. ãâã Prou. 20 9. â Or doctrine Eccle. 7. 20. a Christe is our ãâã Aduocate and ãâã for the office of intercession and redemption are ioyned together b That is of theÌ which haue embraced the Gospel by faith in all ages degrees places for there is no saluation without Christ. c That is by faith and so obey him for knowledge cannot be without obedience d Whereby ãâã loueth God so that to loue God is to obey his worde â Or doctrine e When the Law was giuen f Louechy neigh bour as thy self is the olde coÌmaÌ ãâã taught in the Law but wheÌ Christ saith So loue one another as I haue loued you giueth a newe commandement onely as touching the forme but not as touching the nature or substance of the precept g He namethall the faithful children as he being their spiritual father attributing to olde ãâã know ledge of greate things to yong men ãâã ãâã childreÌ ãâã and reuerence to their gouernours h For Christs sake Chap. 3. 14. â Or the deuil â Or the deuil i ãâã it is aduersarie to God Iam. 4. 4. k To liue in ãâã l ãâã m Ambition pride n Whiche of semed to haue bene of our noÌber because for atime they occupied a place ãâã the Church o The grace of the holie Gost. p Which is Christ q In this Epistle Whiche I now write vnto you r He that taketh away ãâã ãâã ether of the natures in Christ or he that confoundeth or separateth them els he that putteth not ãâã ãâã the per sone of the ãâã and also he that beleueth not to haue ãâã of sinnes by his onely ãâã ãâã ãâã to be the ãâã Messias s Then the inside les worship not the true God () But he ãâã coÌ ãâã the ãâã hathe also the Father t ãâã ãâã him self vnto you teacheth you by the holie Gost and his ãâã â Or in Christ. u By this name he meaneth the w ãâã Churche of Christ in general a Being made the sonnes of God in Christ he ãâã what qualities we must haue to be discer ned froÌ ãâã b That is Christ. c As the ãâã and head ãâã which make one perfect bodie d That is in ãâã ãâã doeth reigne so that he seketh not be sanctified Isa ãâã 9. 1. Pet. 2. ãâã Iohn 8. 44. e As ãâã by Adam f Whiche is the holie Gost. g He can not ãâã vnder the power of sinne because the Spirit of God correcteth hiseuil and corrupt affections h He descendeth from the first cable of the commandements to the seconde Iohn 13. 14. 15. 12 Gen. 4. 8. i This loue is the speciall frute of our faith a certeine signe of our ãâã Chap. 2 10. Leuit. 19. 17. Iohn 15. 13. Ephe. 5. 2. Luk. 3. 11. k whiche is not the cause wherefore we are the sonnes of God but a moste certeine signe l If our ãâã being giltie of any thing be able to condeÌne vs muche more the iudgemeÌt of God whiche knoweth our hearts better theÌ we our selues is able to coÌdemne vs. Iohn 15. 7. 16. 23. Mat. 21. 22. Chap. ãâã 24. Iohn 6. 29 17. 3. Iohn 13. 34. 15. 10 a Them whiche boast that they haue the Spirit to ãâã or ptophecie b ãâã being very God came froÌ his Father toke vpoÌ him our flesh He that ãâã or preacheth this truely ãâã the Spirit of God els not c He began to builde the misterie of ãâã d SataÌ the prince of the worlde Iohn 8. 47. e With pute affe ction obedieÌce Iohn 5. 10. f Trueth it is that God hathe declared his loue in many other thiÌgs but herein hathe passed all other g By his ãâã death Iohn 1. 18. 1. Tim. 6. 15. h So that his con ãâã procedeth of faith â Or towarde vs. i By inspiring it into vs. k Suche as shulde trouble the conscience l For god ãâã teth him self to vs in theÌ whiche beare his image Iohn 13. 43. 15. ãâã a Is regenerat by the vertue of his Spirit b The loue of God must go before or els we caÌ not loue a right Mat. 11. 30. c They are easie to the sonnes of God whiche are led with his Spi rit for thei delite there in 1. Cor. 15. 57. d That is regene racion e The water and blood that came out of his side de clare that we ha ue our sinnes wa shed by him aÌd he hath made ful ãâã for the same f Our minde inspired by the holie Gost. g VVhich ãâã our hearts that we be the children of God ãâã 3. 37. â of God Mat. 7. 7. and 21. 22. Chap. 3. 22. Mat. 12. 31. Mar. 3. 29. Luke 12. 10. h Althogh ãâã ãâã be to death yet God through his mer cie pardonoth his in his Sonne Christ. i As theirs is whome GOD doeth so forsake that they fal into vtter dispaire k ãâã not him selfe so ouer to sinne that he forgetteth God Luke 24. 45. l TakÌeth hede that he sinne not m That is Satan n VVith a mortal wounde o That is al men generally as of them selues lye as it were buryed in euil p Christe verye God q Meaning from euerie ãâã and facion of thinge whiche is set vp for anie ãâã to worship God â Or worthie and noble b VVe can not re ceiue the grace of God except we haue the true knowledge of him of the whiehe knowledge loue procedeth c Accordyng to Gods ãâã Iohn ãâã ãâã â Or ãâã d By ãâã our selues to be seduced e He that ãâã the limites of pu re ãâã Rom. 16. 17. f Haue nothinge to do with him nether shew him anie signe of ãâã or ãâã â Or ãâã a That is in godlie conuersacion as they whiche haue bothe the knowledge and feare of God b By keping hospitalitie c If thou surnishest them with necessities towarde they iourney knowyng that the Lorde saith He that receiueth you receiueth
blossome beare except the winde blowe vpon them â Or Christ. e God preuenteth the dangers and euils which otherwise wolde ouer ãâã the elect f Those that are sealed by the Spirit of God and marked with the blood of the LaÌbe lightened in faith by the worde of God so that they make open profession of the same are exeÌpted froÌ euil g Thogh that this blindenes be broght into the world by the ma lice of Satan yet the mercies of God reserue to him self an infinite nomber which shal be saued bothe of the Iewes and GeÌtiles through Christ. h He omitteth Dan putteth Leui in where by he meaneth the twelue tribes i That is the tribe of ãâã which was Iosephs sonne k In signe of ãâã ritie l In token of victorie felicitie m All that are saued attribute their saluacioÌ vnto God onely to his Christ to none other thing n There is no ãâã ãâã clennes but by the blood of ãâã onely whiche purgeth ãâã so maketh vs white o That is of the maiestie of God the Father the Sonne and the holie Gost p Meaning continually for els in heauen there is no night q For all ãâã and ãâã shal be then taken a way r They shall haue no more ãâã and paine but ãâã ioy and consolacion s Iesus Christ the mediator and ãâã t ãâã is ãâã God u He shal giue them life and conserue theÌ in ãâã ãâã Isa. ãâã 10. * ãâã 25. ãâã * Chap. 21. 4. a Vnder the sixt ãâã he touched in generall the corruptioÌ of the ãâã but vnder the seueÌth he sheweth the great daÌger ther of and what trou bles sectes ãâã hathe bene shal be broght ãâã the Churche thereby b That the ãâã might more attentiue c He sheweth the onelie remedie in our ãâã to wit to appeare before the face of God by the meanes of Iesus Christ ãâã is the Angel the ãâã and the ãâã which ãâã senteth our pray ers whiche remaine yet ãâã before the altar and diuine maie ãâã of God d He meaneth by ãâã the grace of God wherby we are purged and made cleane e He powreth the graces of the ãâã Gost into the ãâã of the ãâã f WheÌ this grace is declared ãâã ãâã arise against ãâã by reason of the wic ked whiche can nether abide to heare their sinnes touched nor ãâã offred g That ãâã proclai meth ãâã against the Church troubles ãâã fal se doctrine so ãâã the ãâã watche h That is the moste parte of ãâã were seduced i Euen the verie ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã ãâã k Diuers ãâã of her ãâã were spred ãâã in the worlde Isa. 6. 6. m That is some excellent minister of the Church which shal corrupt the Scriptures n ãâã ãâã signifie false and corrupt doctrine o That is of Christ who is the sunne of iustice meaning that men by boasting of their workes and merites obscure Christ tread his death vnder ãâã p That is of the Church q Of the ministers and teachers which haue not taught as they ought to do r These are plagues for the conteÌpt of the Gospel i Meaning the ship masters and so them that had ãâã gouernement s Horrible threatnings against the infideles and rebellious persones a That is my ãâã shopes and ni sters which forsake the worde of God and so fall out of heaueÌ and become An gels of darkenes b This ãâã ãâã is ãâã to the Pope in signe where of he ãâã the keyes in his ãâã c A bundaÌ ce of ãâã ãâã which couer ãâã darkenes Christ and his Gospel d Locustes are false teachers he ãâã aÌd world lie ãâã Prelates with MoÌkes ãâã ãâã ãâã Archebishops e False and deceiuable doctrine which is ãâã to the flesh f That is secretly to persecute and to sting with the ir ãâã as scorpions do suche is the facion of the ãâã h That is the infideles whome ãâã blindeth with the ãâã of error i Thogh the elect be hurt yet they can not perish k The elect for a certeine space and at times are in troubles for the ãâã endure but from April to September which is fiue moneths Bishops Doctors Baschelers ma sters which forsa ke Christ to main teine false doctri ne l For at the beginning the sting of their conscien ce semeth as nothing but except thei sone seke re medie they perish m Suche is the terrour of the vn beleuing conscience which ãâã no assurance of mercie but feleth the iudgement of God against ãâã when men imbrace error and refuse the ãâã simplicitie of Gods worde n Which signifieth that the Popes ãâã shal be proude ambicious bolde stoute rash rebellious ãâã cruel Iecherous and autors of warre aÌd destruction of the simple children of God o They pretend a certeine title of honour which in dede beloÌgeth nothing vnto theÌ as the Priests by their crownes strange ãâã declare p That is thei pretend great gentlenes loue thei are wise politicke subtil elo quent and in worldlie ãâã ãâã all in all ãâã doings q That is ãâã delicate ãâã ãâã them selues to please ãâã ãâã lots r Signifying their oppression of the poore and crueltie against Gods ãâã Isa. 2. 19. s ãâã signifie their hardenes of heart and ãâã in their errors with ãâã ãâã ce vnder the protection of ãâã princes Hose 10. 8. t For as thogh they had ãâã so are they listed vp aboue the commune sorte of men and estemed moste holie and do all things with rage and fiercenes Luk 23. 30. Chap. 6. 16. Wisd 16 9. ãâã For the false ãâã caÌ not destroie the elect but suche as are ãâã to perdicion u To infect and kil with their venemous doctrine x Which is Antichrist the Pope king of ãâã and ãâã ambassadour y That is destroied for Antichrist the sonne of perdicion ãâã mens soules with false doctrine and the whole worlde with fyre and sworde 2. Thes. 2. ãâã z Which was the voyce of Christ sitting at the right hand of the Father a Meaning the enemies of the East countrey which shulde afflict the Church of God as did the Arabians ãâã Turkes and Tartarians b This signifieth the great readines of the enemies c Which signifieth their false doctrine and hypocrisie d And therefore were iustely destroyed * Psal. 115. 4. and 133. 15. a Which was Ie sus Christ that came to comfort his Church against the furious assaltes of Satan and Antichrist so that in al their troubles the faithful are sure to finde ãâã in him b Iesus Christ ãâã the testimonie of Gods ãâã towardes ãâã c It ouercame al the darkenes of the Angel of the bottomles pit d Straight ãâã and pure from al corruptions e Meaning the Gospel of Christ which Antichrist caÌ not hide seing Christ ãâã it open in his hand f Which declareth that in despite of Antichrist the Gospel shulde be preached
hathe made hys worde manifeste in due time through the preachyng which is* committed vnto me according to the commandement of God our ãâã 4 To Titus my naturall sonne accordynge to the commune faith Grace ãâã and pea ce from God the Father and from the Lord Iesus Christ our Sauiour 5 For this cause left I thee in Creta that thou shuldest continue to redresse the things that remaine and shuldest ordeine Elders in eucrie citie as I appointed thee 6 * If anye be vnreproueable the housbande of one wife hauyng faithfull children whiche are not sclandered of riote nether are disobedient 7 For a byshop muste be vnreproueable as Gods stewarde not frowarde not angrie not giuen to wyne no striker not giuen to ãâã lucre 8 But harberous one that loueth goodnes wise righteous holie temperate 9 Holding fast the faithfull worde accordyng to doctrine that he also may be able to exhorte with wholsome doctrine and improue them that say against it 10 For there are manie disobedient and vayne talkers and deceiuers of mindes chiefly they of the Circumcision 11 Whose mouths ãâã be stopped which sub uert whole houses teachyng things whiche they ought not for filthie lucre sake 12 One of theÌ selues euen one of their owne prophetes said The Cretians are alwayes lyars euil beastes slowe belyes 13 This witnes is true wherfore rebuke them sharpely that they may be souÌde in the faith 14 And not taking hede to * Iewish fables and commandements of men that turne from the trueth 15 Vnto the pure * are all things pure but vnto them that are defiled and vnbeleuing is nothing pure but euen their mindes and consciences are defiled 16 They professe that they knowe God but by workes they denie him and are abominable and disobedient and vnto euerie good worke reprobate CHAP. II. 1 He commendeth vnto him the wholsome doctrine and telleth him how he shall teache all degrees to be haue theÌ selues 11 Through the benefite of the grace of Christ. 1 BVt speake thou the things which become wholsome doctrine 2 That the Elder men be sobre honest discrete sounde in the faith in loue and in pacieÌce 3 The Elder women likewise that they be in suche behauiour as becometh holines not false accusers not giuen to much wine but teachers of honest things 4 That they may instruct the yong women to be sobre minded that they loue their housbands that they loue their children 5 That they be discrete chast kepyng at home good and * subiect vnto their housbands that the worde of God be not euill spoken of 6 Exhorte yong men likewise that they be sobreminded 7 Aboue althings shewe thy self an ensample of good workes with vncorrupt doctrine with grauitie integritie 8 And with the wholsome worde whiche can not be reproued that he whiche withstandeth may be ashamed hauing nothyng concerning you to speake euill of 9 * Let seruants be subiect to their masters and please theÌ in al things not answering again 10 Nether pykers but that they shewe al good faithfulnes that they may adorne the doctrine of God our Sauiour in all things 11 * For the grace of God that bringeth saluacion vnto all men hathe appeared 12 And teacheth vs that we shulde denie vngodlines and worldlie lustes and that we shulde liue sobrely and righteously godly in this present worlde 13 Loking for the blessed hope aÌd appearyng of the glorie of the mightie God and of our Sauiour Iesus Christ. 14 Who gaue him self for vs that he might redeme vs from all iniquitie and purge vs to be a peculiar people vnto him self zealous of good workes 15 These things speake and ãâã and rebuke with all autoritie ãâã that no man despice thee CHAP. III. 1 Of obedience to suche as be in autoritie 9 He warneth Titus to be ware of foolish and vnprofitable questions 12 Concluding with certeine ãâã matters 15 And salutacions 1 PVt them in remembrance that they * be subiect to the Principalities and Powers and that they be obedient and readie to euerie good worke 2 That they speake euil of no man that they be no fighters but softe shewing all mekenes vnto all men 3 * For we our selues also were in times past vnwise disobedient deceiued seruing the lustes and diuers pleasures ãâã in maliciousnes and enuie hatefull and hatyng one another 4 But when the bountifulnes and loue of God our Sauiour to warde man appeared 5 * Not by the workes of righteousnes which we had done but accordyng to his mercie he saued vs by the washing of the new birth and the renuyng of the holie Gost. 6 Whiche he shed on vs abundantly through Iesus Christ our Sauiour 7 That we being iustified by his grace shulde be made heires accordyng to the hope of eternall life 8 This is a true saying and these things I will thou shuldest affirme that they whiche haue beleued in God might be carefull to shewe forthe good workes These thyngs are good and profitable vnto men 9 * But stay foolish questions and genealogies and contentions and brawlings about the Law for they are vnprofitable and vaine 10 ãâã him that is an heretike after once or twise admonicion 11 Knowing that he that is suche is peruerted and sinneth being damned of his owne self 12 When I shall send Artemas vnto thee or Tychicus be diligent to come to me vnto Nicopolis for I haue determined there to winter 13 Bring Zenas the expounder of the Law and Apollos on their iourney diligently that they lacke nothyng 14 And let ours also learne to shewe for the good workes for necessarie vses that they be not vnfruteful 15 Al that are with me salute thee ãâã them that loue vs in the faith Grace be with you all Amen To Titus elect the first bishope of the Church of the Cretians written from Nicopolis in Macedonia THE EPISTLE OF of Paul to Philemon THE ARGVMENT ALbeit the excellencie of Pauls spirit wonderfully appeareth in other his Epistles yet this Epistle is a greate witnes and a declaration of the same For farre passing the basenes of his matter he fleeth as it were vp to heauen and speaketh with a diuine grace and ãâã Onesimus seruant to Philemon bothe robbed his master and fled away whome Paul hauing wonne to Christ sent againe to his master earnestly begging his pardone with moste waightie arguments prouing the duetie of one Christian to another and so with salutacions endeth 5 He reioyceth to heare of the faith and loue of Philemon 9 whome he desireth to forgiue his seruant Onesimus and louingly to receiue him ag ãâã 1 PAVL a prisoner of Iesus Christ our brother Timotheus vnto Philemon our dere friend and fellow helper 2 And to our dere sister Apphia and to Archippus our felowe souldier and to the Churche
all creatures oght onelye to worship and ser ue God Deut. 6. 16. and 10. 20. e This declareth howe hard it is to refist the tentacions of SataÌ for he giueth not ouer for twise or thrise putting ãâã Psal. 9 1. 12. Deut. 6. 16. f It is not ynough twise or thrise to resist Sa tan for he neuer ceaseth to ãâã or if he relent a litle it is to the end that he may renew his force aÌd assaile vs more sharply Mat. 13 54. Marke 6. 1. Iohn 4. 43. Isa. 61. 1. g That is endued with graces h He alludeth to the yere of Iubile which is mencioned in the Lawe whereby this great deliue raÌce was figured i They approued and commended whatsoeuer ãâã sayd k Bestow thy be nefites vpon theÌ whiche apperteine more vnto thee l Their infidelitie stayed Christ frome workyng miracles Iohn 4. 44. 1. Kyng 17. 9. Iames. 5. 27. m He sheweth by exaÌples that God ofte times preferreth the strangers to theÌ of the houshold 2 King 5. 54. n Because they perceiue that the grace of GOD shulde be taken frome them and giuen to others o And escaped miraculously out of their handes for hys houre was not yet come Mat. 4. 13. Marke 1. 21. Mat. 7. 29. Marke 1. 22. p Ful of dignitie maiestie which touched the heart of the auditours and caused them to beare reueren ce to his wordes q That is the mo cion of the deuil or that was tormented with a verie deuil Mat. 8. 14. mar 1. 29. Mar. 1. ãâã r The deuils are constrained to coÌ fesse Christ to be the ãâã of God and yet it doeth nothing auaile them because it cometh not of ãâã Mat. 4. 18. Mar. 1. 16. a To the intent that he might not be thronged of the preasse also that ãâã might the better be heard b The worde signifieth him that is made ruler ouer anie ãâã c He sheweth his prompt obedience to Christs commandement d Thei were so laden that thei al moste sunke e The feeling of Gods presence maketh afrayed f He ãâã him to the office of an Apostle Mat. 8. 2. mar 1. 40. Leui. 14. 4. g Hereby he shewed theÌ that he wolde not transgresse the Law and that thei shulde be inexcusable who seing the miracle wroght wolde not beleue Christ. Mat. 9. 2. mat 2. 3. h Christ toucheth the principal cau ãâã of all our euils i For as muche as his ãâã iewas sufficienth shewed by this miracle he gaue theÌ hereby to vnderstand that he had power to forgiue sinnes â Or aboue our ex ectacion Mat 9. 9. â Or Matthevve Mat. 2. 14. 1. Tim. 1. 15. k Which seme to be righteous and yet are but hypocrites â Greke make prayers Mat. 9. 14. Marke 2. 18. l The friends and familiars of Christ and hereby Iesus Christ declareth that he wil not burden his before thathe hathe made them able to beate m Read Mat. 9. 17 n He admonisheth them not to trust to muche to their owne sense or iudgement nor because they haue accu stomed them selues to one thing to condemne another which is better a Those feasts which conteined ãâã dais as the Passeouer aÌd the feast of Tabernacles had two Sab baths the first day of the feast and the last Mat. 12. 1. Marke 2. ãâã 1. Sam 21. 6. Exod. 19 33. Leui. 8. 32. 24. 9. Mat. 12. 5. Marke 3. 1. b Hauing power to dispense with and qualifie the keping of thesab bath and other ceremonies â Or a persons Mat. 10. 1. Mark 3. 13. 6. 7. Chap 9. 1 c According to the similitude of the twelue Patri arkes of whome the Churche of God is sprong d Ambassadors or messengers whome he had elected before but now enioyneth them their charge â Or champion Matth. 5. 2. Isa. 65. 13. Isa 61. 3. Matth. 5. 3. e They that are humble and submit them selues willingly to obei God f He meaneth ex communication which also he cal leth putting out their names S. Iohn calleth it casting out of the Synagogue S. Paul deliueriÌg to ãâã which punishement as it is moste terrible when it is iustly executed so is it ãâã to the godlie when they are cast out of wicked ãâã coÌpanie as the Prophet de clareth g The worde signifieth to leape for ioye or to shewe mir the by outwarde gesture Psal. 1. 1. h That put your trust in your riches forget the life to come Amos 6. 1. i Signifying theÌ that liue at case after the pleasures of the fiesh eccle 31. 8. k He reproueth ãâã vaine glorie when as men go about by all meanes to get fauour world lie pompe Isa. 65. 13. l Rather endure more iniurie theÌ reuenge your selues Mat. 5. 44. Mat. ãâã 39. m Be not so careful for the losse of thy goods that thoushuldest be discouraged to serue God 1. Cor. 6. 7. n They are communely called sinners whiche of a wicked life and ãâã all feare of God Mat. 7. 12. tob 4 16. Mat 5. 45. Mat. 5. 42. o Not onely ãâã hoping for profite but to lose the stocke ãâã forasmuch as Christ bindeth him self to repay the whole with a moste liberal interest deu 15 8. Mat. 5. 42. Mat. 7 1. Mat. 7. 2. Mat. 4. 24. Mat. 15. 54. Mat 10. 24. ãâã 13. 16. 15. 10. p He reproueth the hypocrisie of suche as winke at their owne horrible fautes and yet are to curious to ãâã out the least ãâã in their brother Mat. 7. 3. Mat. 7. 17. Mat. 12. 33. Mat. 7. 16. q The name and title are nothing worthe to proue that a maÌ is sent of God except in effect he shewe the same Mat. 7. 21. r He speaketh not onely to the false prophetes but to all false pa stours hirelings and ãâã Rom 2. 13. Iam. 1. 21. ãâã 8. 5. a It might be that this captaine did lie with his garrison in ãâã b In buylding them a Temple for their assemblies he shewed his zeale towardes the true seruice of God c The friends speake to Iesus in the captaines name d Or commande by a worde onely that it so be e He commendeth this heathen cadraine because he ãâã him self vpon Christs worde alone f Which was a ãâã of Galile ãâã the ãâã of ãâã not farre from Tiberias Or biere g Christ calleth those things that are not as if they were and giueth life to ãâã that be dead h That is to establish and restore them i To wit the Messias and redemer k He ãâã declareth by the vertues and power that were in ãâã that he was the Christ l Suche as fele their owne miserie and ãâã nes â Or ãâã ãâã is preached to the poore m That ãâã per seuere and not ãâã backe for anie thing that cam coÌme ãâã them n Read Mat. 11. 7. Matth. 3. 1. ãâã Angel â Or borne o They praised him as iust faith ful good and mer ciful so
to Christ. p That is kepeth a straict dyet aÌd refrayneth from suche thyngs as might distenpre his bodie q Or olde man whiche rebelleth against the Spirit r Lest he shulde be reproued of men when they shulde se hym do contrarie or contemne that thing whiche he taught others to do Exod. 13 21. Nomb. 9. ãâã Exod. ãâã 22. Exod. 16. 15. a Moses beyng their guide or minister or as some read they were baptized vnto Moses Law others by Moses Exod. 17. 6. b That is Manna whiche was the out warde signe or Sacrament of the Spirituall grace c They are the same meate that we do because the substance of theirs and ãâã Sacramentes is al one Nomb 20. 10. d That is signified Christ as all Sacraments do Nom. 26. 65. Nom 11. 4. and 26. 64. Psal. 106. 14. e Because hereby occasion was taken to forget God and coÌmit idolatrie therefore these indifferent things are counted idolatrie f Moses readeth foureaÌd Wentie thousand which declareth an infi nite nomber g Who was their leader and was called the Angel of God Exod. 32. 6. Nom. 25. 9. Nom. 21 6. Psal 106. 14. h Meaning ether the good or ãâã Angel whose mi nisterie God vseth to execute his iudgement to the ãâã destruction of the wicked i How God will plague vs if we be subiect to the like vices k Or later daies of Christs commyng l He that led you into this tentation which commeth vnto you ether in prosperi tie or aduersitie or for your sinnes past wil turne it to ãâã commoditie and deliuer you Nom. 14. 37. â Or thankes giuyng m Or prepare to this holye vse with praise and thankes giuen n The ãâã badge of our ãâã and incorporatioÌ with Christ o If we that are manye in nomber are but one bodie in effecte ioyned with our head Christ as many cornes make but one loafe let vs reno unce idolatrie which doeth sepa rate our vnitie p VVhiche is gouerned accordiÌg to the ceremonies of the Law q VVhich is to as semble in that companie where idoles are called vpon r For in those days they were accustomed to sel ãâã of the fles he of beastes sacrificed in the shambles and turned the money to the ãâã profit * Psal. 24. 1. s Or doute ãâã Chap. 6. 13. Eccl. 37. 35. t VVe must take hede that through our abuse our libertie be not con demned u If by the benefi te of God I may eat any kinde of meat why shuld I by any defaut cause this benefi te to be euil spoken of Colos. 3. 17. x That is the infirme y VVhich are indifferent 2. Thes. 3. 9. â Or in all thing remembreme Ephe. 5. 23. a This is referred to coÌmune prayer aÌd preaching for althogh one spea ke yet the action is commune so that the whole Church may be said to praye or preache â ãâã preaching b This tradition was obserued according to the time and place that all things might be done in comelines and to edification Gen. 1. 26. 5 1. 9 6. c Read chap. 14. 34. â Or powlled d The image of Gods glorie in whome his maie stie and power shine concerning his autoritie e Or receiueth her glorie in coÌmeÌdation of maÌ and therefore is subiect Col. 3. 3. 10. Gen. 2. 22. f Some thing to couer her head in signe of subie ction g To whom thei also shewe their dissolution and not onely to Christ. h Who is ãâã ãâã of their mutual con iunction i For as God made the womaÌ of maÌ so now is man multiphedby the woman k As women vse to weare l For God hathe giuen to woman longer ãâã theÌ vnto man to the end she shulde ãâã it vp about her head whereby she declareth that she must couer her head m Not that all were so but the moste parte n Gods Church is not onely subiect to discension as touching ãâã and maners but also to ãâã as touching doctrine o Who ought one ly to beare autoritie in the Church Mat. 26. 26. mar 14. 22. ãâã 22. 19. p Signifying the maner of his death when his bodie shulde as it were be torne and broken with most grieuous torments albeit not as the thies of the thieues were the which thing the breaking of the bread as a figure doeth moste liuely represent q By peruerting the true aÌd pure vse of the same 2. Cor. 13. 1. r But as thogh these holie ãâã of the Lords bodie and blood were commune ãâã ãâã without reuerence he coÌmeth vnto theÌ s Or dye Let theÌ loke to theÌ selues which ether adde or take away froÌ the Lords institu tion a The CorinthiaÌ hauing notable gifts semed to ha ue forgotten of whome and for what end they had receiued theÌ Mar. 9. ãâã b VVhich colde not heare your prayers c By Satans suggestion d As no maÌ that hathe the Spirit of God can blaspheme Christ worship idoles so none can acknowledge christ for Lord aÌd God withoutthe same Spirit Iohn 13. 12. C ap 8. 6. Phil 2. 10. e To wit the Church which is the whole body f That is the vnderstanding of the Scriptures g To do onely miracles by h To worke by miracles against Satan hypocrices as was done against Ananias Elymas c. i Meaning the de claration of Gods mysteries k To trie bothe the doctrine and the persones Rom. 2. 3. Ephes. 4. 8. l That we might be one bodie with Christ and the whole Church one Christ of the which ãâã Baptisme the ãâã Supper are effectual signes for by baptisme we are regenerat into one Spirit and by the Lords Supper we are in corporat into ãâã bodie to be gouerned by the same Spirit m And therefore whatsoeuer the diuersitie is yet the profite ought to be commune and serue to the ãâã of the Church n VVhose vse semeth to be more vile o VVe are more careful to couer them p Euerie one in his office for the preseruacion of the bodie q For all Churches dispersed throughout the worlde are diuers membres of one bodie â Or euerie one for his parte Ephes. 4. 11. r As Deacons s As Elders Chap. XIII â Or do you then desire the best giftes Mat. 17. 20. Luk. 17. 6. a If the Angels had tongues I had the vse there of did not bestowe them to profite my neigh bour it were nothing but vaine babling b Faith is here ta ken for the ãâã of doing miracles which the wicked may ha ue as Mat. 7. 22. and also for that faith called histo rical which beleueth the mightie power of Christ but can not apprehend Gods mercie through him aÌd this deuils haue I am 2. 19 there fore is separate froÌ charitie but the faith that iustifieth in effect can not as 1. Iohn 2. 9. c Not that it suffreth it self to be abused but iudgeth others by all loue and humanitie d VVhich may